Copyright: Copyright © 1997 by Micrografx, Inc.
Citation: Copyright © 1997 by Micrografx, Inc.


File Menu

The File menu commands let you create, open, import, save, close, and print image files. Additional commands let you acquire digital images using a TWAIN scanner, video grabber, or other input device; change the setup of your printer, scanner, or TWAIN device; and close Picture Publisher.

New	Creates a new image.
Open	Opens a previously saved file.
Close	Closes the current image window.
Close All	Closes all the open image windows.
Save	Saves the file on which you are working, using the current filename.
Save As	Assigns a name to a file or makes a copy of the current file using a new name.
Properties	Displays properties for the current image file.
Revert To Saved	Closes the current edited file and opens the last saved version of the file.
Acquire	Opens the TWAIN interface for scanning in image.
Import	Imports an image file as an object into the active image.
Export	Exports an object, or group of objects, into a new image file. It also exports the active image to CompuServe GIF format or to the JPEG compression format.
Package File	Locates temporary support files and places them on media automatically.
Page Setup	Lets you choose the way you lay out your printed image.
Setup Printer	Sets up the printer.
Setup Scanner	Sets up the scanner.
Setup Monitor	Sets up the monitor.
Setup Calibration	Lets you calibrate the scanner and printer.
Print	Prints your current image to the printer.
Print Preview	Displays a simulation of the current image as it will print.
Send	Sends your current image as e-mail.
Exit	Closes Picture Publisher.
1, 2, 3	Lists the last few files opened or saved. Lets you open these files quickly without using the Open command.


New

You use the New command to create a new image in Picture Publisher. There are four types of images you can create:

Line Art--an image that uses only black and white; also called a bi-level image.

Grayscale--an image that stores image data in varying shades of gray; also called a black-and-white image.

RGB Color--a color image that stores image data in shades of red, green, and blue.

CMYK Color--a color image that stores image data in shades of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.

The default image type is RGB, the default width is 4 inches, the default height is 5 inches, and the default resolution setting is 100 pixels per inch. The default background color is white. Increasing the size or resolution of the image increase the amount of memory Picture Publisher requires to create the image. Picture Publisher displays the amount of memory required to create the image in the bottom of the dialog box.


To create a new image


New Image Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify the parameters for a new image.

The default image type is RGB, the default width is 4 inches, the default height is 5 inches, and the default resolution setting is 100 pixels per inch. The default background color is the alternate color. Increasing the size or resolution of the image increase the amount of memory Picture Publisher requires to create the image. Picture Publisher displays the amount of memory required to create the image in the bottom of the dialog box.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the New command


Displays options for creating a new image: Line Art, Grayscale, RGB Color, and CMYK Color.


Lets you adjust the image width.


Displays the current unit of measurement: inches, millimeters (mm), picas, centimeters (cm), or pixels. Lets you choose the units you want to use for this image.

Note

These measurements apply to all dimensions within the image.


Lets you adjust the image height.


Lets you adjust the image resolution (the number of pixels per inch).


Displays the amount of memory required to create the image.

Note

Changing the image width, height, and resolution changes the amount of memory required to create the image.


Opens the Color Management Selection dialog box to let you select a source and destination profile.


To create a new image

1	On the File menu, click New.

2	In the Image Type box, select the type of image you want.

3	In the Width and Height boxes, enter the dimensions you want.

4	If you want a background color other than white for the image, click the Color button to open the Color Picker dialog box.

5	Click Create.


About the New command


Open

This command opens the Open dialog box to let you choose an image file to open.

You can open files of various formats including: Micrografx Picture Publisher (PPF); Micrografx Picture Publisher 5.0 (PP5); Tag Image File Format (TIFF); Adobe Illustrator (AI); Adobe PhotoShop (PSD); CompuServe Bitmap (GIF); CompuServe PNG (PNG); Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM); CorelDRAW! (CDR); CorelDRAW! Clip Art (CMX); Encapsulated PostScript (EPS); JPEG File Interchange (JPG); Kodak Photo CD (PCD); Macintosh PICT (PIC); Micrografx Designer 4.x (DS4); Micrografx Designer File (DSF); Micrografx Designer Clip Art (MGX); Micrografx Drawing (DRW); Micrografx Picture Publisher 4.0 (PP4); Microsoft Video (AVI); PC Paintbrush (PCX); PostScript (PRN); PostScript (PS); Scitex CT (SCT); Sun Raster (RAS); Targa Bitmap (TGA); Windows Bitmap (BMP); Windows DIB (DIB); and Windows Metafile (WMF).

Thumbnail Notes

To display thumbnails, click the Show/Hide Thumbnails button in the Open dialog box.

If thumbnails are being created and you want stop this process, highlight a thumbnail and click the right mouse button. Picture Publisher opens a right mouse menu. Deselect Update Thumbs Automatically to stop thumbnails from being created. You can select Update Selected Thumbs to create thumbnails for any highlighted files.


FastBits Mode

Low Resolution Mode


To open a file


To open a file

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	In the Files of Type box, select the file format you want.

3	In the Open Mode box, select the method of opening the file you want to use.

4	In the Look In box, select the drive you want to use.

5	Click the folder containing the file you want to open.

6	Click the file.

7	Click Open.

Thumbnail Notes

To display thumbnails, click the Show/Hide Thumbnails button in the Open dialog box.

If thumbnails are being created and you want stop this process, highlight a thumbnail and click the right mouse button. Picture Publisher opens a right mouse menu. Deselect Update Thumbs Automatically to stop thumbnails from being created. You can select Update Selected Thumbs to create thumbnails for any highlighted files.


About the Open command

FastBits Mode

Low Resolution Mode


FastBits

The FastBits mode displays a preview representation of an image and allows you to open a segment for editing. You can choose the segment to open by dragging your mouse pointer to draw a grid. You then select one segment of the grid to open.

Picture Publisher recombines the segment with the rest of the image when you save the segment. This allows you to edit a large image in small pieces on a computer with limited memory.

If you are making general changes to an image, such as color balance or contrast and brightness, you can record a macro on one segment and replay it on the others. This assures uniform changes throughout.

Note

You can only open an uncompressed TIFF file with no mask channel in FastBits mode.


Low Resolution

The Low Resolution mode allows you to open an image at a lower resolution than it was saved in. This option opens the Low Resolution Open dialog box for choosing the lower resolution. This dialog box displays the file size for each resolution you choose.

You can open a low resolution file to test general changes such as hue and saturation. Because the file is low resolution, processing is faster. After deciding on how to change the image, record a macro with the changes, open the larger original file, and run the macro while you do something else.

Low resolution files can also speed up proof printing on a low resolution printer. Your printer throws away all data above its resolution. This requires processing time. Sending an image with the proper resolution speeds up printing.

Note

You can only open a TIFF file in Low Resolution mode.


Close

The Close command closes the active image file. If the active image file contains changes you have not saved, Picture Publisher displays a message asking if you want to save the changes.


To close the active image window


To close a file

On the File menu, click Close.

If the image you are working with has been edited, and you did not save it before closing, Picture Publisher requests that you select one of three choices: Yes, No, or Cancel.

Clicking Yes saves changes to your image before closing the image window.

Clicking No closes the image window, but does not save changes to it.

Clicking Cancel cancels the Close command and returns you to the current image without saving it.


About the Close command


Close All

The Close All command closes all open image files. If any image file contains changes you have not saved, Picture Publisher displays a message asking if you want to save the changes.


To close all image windows


To close all files

On the File menu, click Close All.

If any image you are working with has been edited, and you did not save it before closing, Picture Publisher requests that you select one of three choices: Yes, No, or Cancel.

Clicking Yes saves changes to your image before closing the image window.

Clicking No closes the image window, but does not save changes to it.

Clicking Cancel cancels the Close command and returns you to the current image without saving it.


About the Close All command


Save

The Save command lets you save the currently active image using the current filename with the same file type and image settings.

If the file has never been saved and you choose the Save command, the Save As dialog box opens.

You should get in the habit of saving your work frequently. This will help to ensure that your files are saved in the event of a power interruption, a hardware failure, or a software problem. The first time you save a new image file, you name the file and choose where you want to store it. Afterwards, each time you choose the Save command, your changes are saved in that file.


To save a file


About the Save As command


To save a file

On the File menu, click Save.


About the Save command

About the Save As command

The benefits of saving a file in the PPF format


The Benefits of Saving a File in the PPF Format

The PPF format is Picture Publisher's native file format. Unlike other file formats Picture Publisher supports, PPF is the only format that lets you save command list information. Therefore, you can make changes to the image by using the Command Center command (on the Edit menu) at any point. You can save command list information in two ways:

As the entire command list, including all commands before and after the Insertion Pointer.

As a redo list, where all commands following the Insertion Pointer in the command list are saved.

In addition to saving command list information, the PPF format also saves:

Objects (including their alpha information)

Grids and guidelines

Current mask

Color management information

Note

If you need to open a PPF file in Picture Publisher 6.0 that was created and saved using Picture Publisher 7, you must select the Save Picture Publisher 6.0 File option in the PPF Options dialog box. To open the PPF Options dialog box, click Save As on the File menu, then click Options in the Save As dialog box. If you select this option, only the Mask Channel and CMS settings are saved. The command list is not saved if you select this option.


Why should I use the Command Center?

What is an object?


Lets you save a snapshot of your file in its current state. This option lets you save time when opening a file with a long command list by skipping all commands up to the Insertion Pointer. These commands are still included in the file, so you can make a change to these commands in the future.


Lets you save all the commands in the command list. This includes commands before and after the Insertion Pointer.


If you started working from an existing file as a starting point, this option lets Picture Publisher save a pointer to the original file. If you delete this original file, however, Picture Publisher is not able to regenerate this file correctly.


Lets you save the PPF as a Picture Publisher 6.0 file. This is useful for backwards compatibility if you have to deliver the final image to someone who is using Picture Publisher 6.0. If you select this option, only the Mask Channel and CMS settings are saved. The command list is not saved if you select this option.


Lets you save all commands after the Insertion Pointer in the command list. If you deselect this option, any commands following the Insertion Pointer are lost.


Lets you compress the image to save drive space. Unlike JPEG compression, there is no file degradation using this option.


Lets you save all floating objects and the current mask on your image.


Lets you save the current mask on your image.


Lets you save all CMS information if you are color managing your image.


Lets you compress the image to save drive space. Unlike JPEG compression, there is no file degradation using this option.


Lets you compress the image to save drive space. This option replaces pixel values by the differences between consecutive pixels.


This option is unavailabe for saving a GIF. If you want to use Smart Drop Out, you must export the selection to a file, then choose GIF.


Lets you select the TIFF preview you want for the image.


Lets you include a composite DCS file with the corresponding C, M, Y, and K files. This is useful if you are placing a pre-separated CMYK file into a desktop publishing program. You can import the composite DCS file as a place-holder for the graphic. You must make sure the DCS file is in the same folder as the corresponding C, M, Y, and K files when working with a desktop publishing program.


Save As

The Save As command lets you assign a new name to a file or make a copy of an existing file by giving it a new name. You can also change the file format or image type using the Save As command.

You can save files to various formats including: Micrografx Picture Publisher (PPF); Micrografx Picture Publisher 5.0 (PP5); Tag Image File Format (TIFF); Adobe PhotoShop (PSD); CompuServe Bitmap (GIF); CompuServe PNG (PNG); Encapsulated PostScript (EPS); JPEG File Interchange (JPG); Micrografx Picture Publisher 4.0 (PP4); Microsoft Video (AVI); PC Paintbrush (PCX); Scitex CT (SCT); Sun Raster (RAS); Targa Bitmap (TGA); Windows Bitmap (BMP); and Windows DIB (DIB).

Progressive JPEG Note

A progressive JPEG is a file saved using the JPEG format with interleaving, similar to an interlaced GIF, for use on Web pages. To save a file as a progressive JPEG, on the Image menu, point to HVS JPEG, and click Save JPEG. The HVS JPEG function is a plug-in. Please contact Digital Frontiers for any questions regarding the HVS JPEG option. You can use the Web Favorites dialog box on the Help menu to contact their Web page. You can use the Open command on the File menu to open a progressive JPEG file.


To save a file using a different format or name


To save a file using a different format or name

1	On the File menu, click Save As.

2	In the Save as Type box, select the file format you want.

3	In the Save In box, select the drive you want to use.

4	Click the folder where you want to save the file.

5	In the File Name box, type a new filename for the image.

6	Click Save.

Progressive JPEG Note

A progressive JPEG is a file saved using the JPEG format with interleaving, similar to an interlaced GIF, for use on Web pages. To save a file as a progressive JPEG, on the Image menu, point to HVS JPEG, and click Save JPEG. The HVS JPEG function is a plug-in. Please contact Digital Frontiers for any questions regarding the HVS JPEG option. You can use the Web Favorites dialog box on the Help menu to contact their Web page. You can use the Open command on the File menu to open a progressive JPEG file.


About the Save As command

The benefits of saving a file in the PPF format


Properties

The Properties command lets you open the Image Properties dialog box. This dialog box shows information about the image type, size, number of objects, and color management.

Note

You can also display the Image Properties dialog box by clicking on the Image Info button in the Status bar.


To display the image properties


About the Image Info button


To display image information
To display the image properties

On the File menu, click Properties.

Note

You can also display the Image Properties dialog box by clicking on the Image Info button in the Status bar.


About the Properties command

About the Image Info button


Image Information Dialog Box

This dialog box provides detailed information about the image type, size, number of objects, and color management.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To display the Image Information


About the Properties command

About the Image Info button


Shows the full pathname of the active image.


Shows the type of file, for example: TIFF, CCITT TIF, Sun Raster, Mac PICT, JPEG, BMP, etc.


Shows the data type of the file, for example: RGB, CMYK, 16-color, etc.


Shows the width of the active image.


Shows the height of the active image.


Shows the resolution of the active image.


Shows the memory and file size of the active image.


Shows the percentage of the current image in memory.


Shows the percentage of memory used for Undo operations.


Shows the percentage of memory used for Mask operations.


Shows the percentage of memory used for Mask Undo operations.


Shows the number of objects in the active image.


Shows the file size of all objects in the active image.


Shows the name of the precision transform device, or displays None if there is no precision transform chosen. (This information is available only for PP5 and TIFF images.)


Indicates whether the active image has been modified.


Shows the amount of memory remaining.


Revert To Saved

The Revert To Saved command restores the image to the most recently saved version, undoing all changes made since you last saved the file.

When you click the Revert To Saved command, Picture Publisher asks if you are sure you want to ignore all changes before reverting to the previous version. Click OK to revert to the previously saved version. Click Cancel to return to the current image.


To revert to the most recently saved version


To revert to the most recently saved version

1	On the File menu, click Revert To Saved.

2	Click OK. The most recently saved version opens.


About the Revert To Saved command


Acquire

The Acquire command lets you open the TWAIN interface. Picture Publisher supports the TWAIN driver interface to give you access to scanners, video grabbers, and other data acquisition devices without requiring special drivers.

The Acquire command requires a compatible scanner or video frame grabber with a video camera or videocassette recorder attached to the interface card.


Scanning tips


To use the TWAIN driver interface


Acquire Dialog Box

The options in the Acquire dialog box will vary according to the TWAIN driver and hardware installed. Refer to the documentation provided by the vendors of those products.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Acquire command

Scanning tips


To use the TWAIN driver interface

On the File menu, click Acquire. A dialog box opens.

Note

Each Acquire dialog box will be different, depending on the device being used. Refer to the documentation provided by the vendors of those products.


About the Acquire command

Scanning tips


Scanning Tips

When you are scanning an image, a pattern sometimes develops within the image. This behavior may make the image look pixelized. You can, however, scan the image at a higher DPI than desired then resize the image to alleviate this problem. In addition, you will want to apply the Unsharp Mask effect to sharpen the image.

When scanning the image, double the DPI of what you want the final DPI to be. For example, if you want your final image to be 150 PPI, scan the image in at 300 DPI. After scanning the image, open the image in Picture Publisher.

On the Image menu, choose Size. Enter the new PPI in the Resolution field (following the above example, enter 150 in this field) and check the Use SmartSizing box. This procedure combines pixels by averaging them together. This eliminates some or even all of the distorted pixels. You may want to size the Width and Height of the image, in addition.

Before applying the Unsharp Mask effect, you must make sure the image is either an RGB or CMYK image. If you're working with a palette color image you must convert the image since effects do not work on 256 color images.

On the Image menu, choose Effects and click Unsharp Mask under Photographic. Make sure the Radius slider is between 1 and 5 for the best range. Apply the effect and notice the smooth and even sharpening of your image.

Note

It is not always necessary to scan an image at an extremely high DPI. The quality of your output to your printer is limited to the lines per inch of the printer. So, the final PPI of the image should be equal to two times the lines per inch of your printer's output. If you are using the image for general viewing (Windows wallpaper), the image should be no greater than 100 PPI.


Import

This command lets you import an image file as an object into the active image. Picture Publisher treats the imported object as a normal Picture Publisher object. You can manipulate the object in various ways to incorporate it into the base image.

You can import files of various formats including: Micrografx Picture Publisher (PPF); Micrografx Picture Publisher 5.0 (PP5); Tag Image File Format (TIFF); Adobe Illustrator (AI); Adobe PhotoShop (PSD); CompuServe Bitmap (GIF); CompuServe PNG (PNG); Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM); CorelDRAW! (CDR); CorelDRAW! Clip Art (CMX); Encapsulated PostScript (EPS); JPEG File Interchange (JPG); Kodak Photo CD (PCD); Macintosh PICT (PIC); Micrografx Designer 4.x (DS4); Micrografx Designer File (DSF); Micrografx Designer Clip Art (MGX); Micrografx Drawing (DRW); Micrografx Picture Publisher 4.0 (PP4); Microsoft Video (AVI); PC Paintbrush (PCX); PostScript (PRN); PostScript (PS); Scitex CT (SCT); Sun Raster (RAS); Targa Bitmap (TGA); Windows Bitmap (BMP); Windows DIB (DIB); and Windows Metafile (WMF).


To import a file into the active image


To import a file into the active image

1	On the File menu, point to Import, and click From File. The Open dialog box opens.

2	In the Files of Type box, select the file format you want to import.

3	In the Look In box, select the drive you want to use.

4	Click the folder containing the file you want to import.

5	Click the file.

6	Click Open. Picture Publisher pastes the file as an object in the active image.


About the Import command


Export

This command lets you export an object, or group of objects, into a new file. You can also export the active image to the CompuServe GIF format or to the JPEG compression format.

You can export objects to various formats including: Micrografx Picture Publisher (PPF); Micrografx Picture Publisher 5.0 (PP5); Tag Image File Format (TIFF); Adobe PhotoShop (PSD); CompuServe Bitmap (GIF); CompuServe PNG (PNG); Encapsulated PostScript (EPS); JPEG File Interchange (JPG); Micrografx Picture Publisher 4.0 (PP4); Microsoft Video (AVI); PC Paintbrush (PCX); Scitex CT (SCT); Sun Raster (RAS); Targa Bitmap (TGA); Windows Bitmap (BMP); and Windows DIB (DIB).


To export an object into a new file

To export an image to the GIF format

To export an image to the JPEG format


To export an object into a new file

1	Select the object or objects you want to export.

2	On the File menu, point to Export, and click Selection To File. The Open dialog box opens.

3	In the Save as Type box, select the file format you want.

4	In the Save In box, select the drive you want to use.

5	Click the folder where you want to export the object(s).

6	In the File Name box, type a new filename for the object(s).

7	Click Save.


About the Export command


To export an image to the GIF format

1	On the File menu, point to Export, and click GIF Export. The GIF Options dialog box opens.

2	Set the GIF save options.

3	Click OK.


To export an image to the JPEG format

1	On the File menu, point to Export, and click JPEG Export. The JPEG Options dialog box opens.

2	Set the JPEG save options.

3	Click OK.


GIF Options Dialog Box

This dialog box displays the various options available to export a file using the CompuServe GIF format.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To export an image to the GIF format


About the Export command


JPEG Options Dialog Box

This dialog box displays the various options available to export a file using the JPEG compression format.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To export an image to the JPEG format


About the Export command


Lets you zoom in on the image.


Lets you zoom out on the image.


Returns the image view to fit inside the window.


Lets you view the image in full screen mode with the current transparency settings.


Lets you pick transparent colors by sensing color breaks in the range of colors.


 Set the Wand Range to determine sensitivity to color differences. As you increase the Wand Range percentage, the area of color included as transparency increases.


The current color of the background. The colors you choose to be transparent will show this background color.


Opens the Color Picker dialog box. You can choose the background color using this dialog box.


Opens the View Options dialog box.


Opens the Convert to Palette Color dialog box.


Adds the current color in the Image Palette to the Transparent Palette. Colors in the Transparent Palette will be transparent when you view the image in a Web browser.


Removes the current color in the Transparent Palette to the Image Palette. Colors in the Transparent Palette will be transparent when you view the image in a Web browser.


Check this box if you want to save the GIF with interlacing. Interlaced images display in a browser a little at a time so you can quickly view pieces of the image.


Check this box if you want this format's Options dialog box to open each time you save a file in this format.


Click this option if your modem speed is 14,400. The estimated download time displays above each of the preview windows.


Click this option if your modem speed is 28,800. The estimated download time displays above each of the preview windows.


Check this option to view the image in real time. Any changes you make automatically display.


Choose which subsampling method you want to use. YUV 4:4:4 is the highest quality compression.


Move the slider to choose the amount of compression you want to use. The more compression you use, the lower the image quality.


Package File

After creating an image using the Command List and PP format, you may need to take it to a service bureau. If you have cut and pasted onto the image, you need to find these temporary support files and place them on the transfer media. Normally, this could take so time, so instead use the Package File command to locate these files and place them on the media automatically. This command is only available when a PP format file is open.


To package a file for transport to a service bureau


Package PP5/PPF dialog box
Package File Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify the path to the media on which to store temporary support files for a file being packaged for transport to a service bureau.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Package File command


Type the path to the temporary support files. Picture Publisher copies the files to the location you specify.


To package a file for transport

1	On the File menu, click Package File.

2	Enter the path to the device (disk) where the temporary support files will be stored. (For example, a:.)

3	Click Package.

Note

This command is only available when a PP5 or PPF format file is open.


About the Package File command


Page Setup

This command lets you choose the way you lay out your printed image. You can set the image height and width either as a percentage of the original or to specific measurement units. You can also set the position of the image on the printed page.


About the Print command


To set up your printed image

To print an image


Page Setup Dialog Box

The Page Setup dialog box lets you set the width, height, size of the image, and positioning of the image when printed.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Page Setup command


To set up your printed image

1	On the File menu, click Page Setup. The Page Setup dialog box opens.

2	Select any options you want.

3	Click Ok.


To print an image

About the Page Setup command


Lets you set the width of the printed image.


Lets you set the height of the printed image.


Lets you set how far from the top of the page you want the printed image.


Lets you set how far from the left-hand side of the page you want the printed image.


Setup

The Setup command opens a submenu containing the following commands:

Printer

Scanner

Monitor

Calibration


Setup Printer

This command lets you set up a printer and specify print styles. Before you can print from Picture Publisher, you must choose a printer in Windows. Then you start Picture Publisher and set up a print device, select a type of printer, and select a print style.

Picture Publisher recognizes three types of printers: Monochrome, CMYK, and RGB. Choose Monochrome to print to a black-and-white printer. To print to a four-color CMYK device, such as a color ink jet or dye sublimation printer, choose the CMYK printer type. Choose the RGB printer type to print to an RGB device such as a film recorder.

Note

If you are printing to a CMY printer, choose the CMYK printer type and set the Black Generation Map option to "none." For access to the Black Generation Map, on the File menu, choose Setup Printer, click Setup Print Style, and select the Separation tab.


To set up your printer

To define a style for halftone screening

To edit a print calibration style

To define options for ink correction

To define options for black generation and GCR


Setup Printer Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you set options for the printer you want to use to print Picture Publisher images. Lets you choose from the predefined print styles that are supplied with Picture Publisher, as well as any that you have set up and saved yourself. Print styles are collections of default printer settings that have been optimized for a variety of output needs. You can define print styles for your own needs and add them to the list.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Setup Printer command


Lets you identify the type of printer you are using. Choices are Monochrome, CMYK color, and RGB color.


Lists the currently installed Windows printer drivers. Printer drivers can be added or deleted through the Windows Control Panel as with any other program. Any installed printer driver can be activated and used by Picture Publisher.


Opens the Setup Print Style dialog box.


Opens the Setup dialog box.


Setup Print Style Dialog Box

You can edit, or create, a print style by selecting options in the Setup Print Style dialog box and saving the changes. The Setup Print Style dialog box is divided into five tabs:

Separation tab

The Separation tab lets you use color management, set up ink correction, black generation, black removal, ink limits, and saturation boost.

Halftone tab

To reproduce photographs in a commercial print shop, prints are screened to create halftone images. A halftone image is a series of dots of varying sizes that represent shades of light and dark. The dots are arranged in rows. The number of lines per inch is the measure of the number of cells per inch in the image. The screen angle is the offset of a cell in one row to the cells in the line above or below. (Black-and-white images are traditionally screened at 45 degrees.)

Color separations are often rotated by 30 degrees in relation to each other. Typical screen angles are 45 degrees for black, 75 degrees for magenta, 90 degrees for yellow, and 105 degrees for cyan.

Picture Publisher applies an appropriate "screen" to the output as you print the image, based on the printer you choose. To get printed output that is comparable to the printing of halftone photographs, Picture Publisher adjusts the output to match the capabilities of that particular printer.

Calibration tab

The Calibration tab lets you calibrate Picture Publisher’s output by selecting and editing printer calibration maps and adjusting dot gain.

Extras tab

The Extras tab lets you select various options that are useful when printing an image, including trim marks, registration marks, separations identity, and color scales. It also lets you print the image flipped and inverted for photographic film production.

Profile tab

The Profile tab lets you choose a destination device and destination profile and preview the ink amounts for the chosen profile.

Notes

The Profile tab appears only when the Kodak Color Management System (CMS) is active.

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Lets you adjust the percentages of magenta and yellow inks used to print red.


Lets you adjust the percentages of magenta ink used to print red.


Lets you adjust the percentages of magenta and yellow inks used to print red.


Lets you adjust the percentages of yellow and cyan inks used to print green.


Lets you adjust the percentages of yellow ink used to print green.


Lets you adjust the percentages of cyan ink used to print green.


Lets you adjust the percentages of cyan and magenta inks used to print blue.


Lets you adjust the percentages of cyan ink used to print blue.


Lets you adjust the percentages of magenta ink used to print blue.


Lets you select a black generation map to be used.


Lets you specify the percentage of overlapping CMY to remove areas where black is generated.


Lets you adjust the maximum amount of black. As you adjust the amount, the Ink Amount map changes.


Lets you adjust the total amount of ink that the presses can hold. Consult with your service bureau to determine the best value.


Lets you increase the amount of saturation when the image is output. This setting can compensate for ink impurities and saturation loss that may occur when printing.


Shows you the effect of the current settings.


Lets you use the default printer halftone values. When deselected, Picture Publisher halftone values are used.


Lets you specify the type of halftone dot created: Circular, Square, or Elliptical.


Lets you specify the screen frequency for the halftone for cyan.


Lets you specify the screen frequency for the halftone for magenta.


Lets you specify the screen frequency for the halftone for yellow.


Lets you specify the screen frequency for the halftone for black.


Lets you specify the screen angle for cyan.


Lets you specify the screen angle for magenta.


Lets you specify the screen angle for yellow.


Lets you specify the screen angle for black.


Lets you select the calibration map you want to view.


Opens a menu containing commands for file management.


Lets you select a calibration map to use.


Lets you adjust the dot gain. Consult your service bureau for the dot gain setting required for their devices.


Lets you adjust the minimum dot percentage for highlights. As you change the value, the calibration map changes.


Lets you adjust the maximum dot percentage for shadows. As you change the value, the calibration map changes.


Lets you apply the calibration map to a CMYK image as it is converted using the Convert To or Save As commands.


Lets you apply the calibration map to the image only when it is printed. This option only applies to CMYK images. Other types of images have the calibration map applied when printed.


Adds trim marks (crop marks) at the corners of the image.

Trim marks indicate where the paper should be cut by the print shop to produce the correct page size. The trim marks appear as four sets of 1/2-inch horizontal and vertical lines.


Adds registration marks to the printed image.


Adds the identity of the separations and verifies the printer colors on a composite. Each label appears parallel to the longest edge of the page, at a unique location on the page so that it does not overprint the others. This option also prints the print style options on the top-left corner of each page. This is useful for determining the controls that were used to create an image when comparing it with other images or examining the output for quality improvement.


Adds a set of color scales to the printed image to help monitor four-color printing quality.

The scales appear on each separation as halftones at the selected line screen ruling. They print on the right of the black plate and on the left of the cyan, magenta, and yellow plates. As a result, the CMY colors overprint to produce grays. Print shops use the grayscale in monitoring values for gray color removal and black color replacement. The step scale also provides a direct comparison of CMY colors to evaluate dot-for-dot values, screen angles, moire, and dot gain.


Lets you produce film on an imagesetter for platemaking.


Mirrors or flips an image to be sent to the imagesetter set for "emulsion down" printing.

Like negative images, most image work is done "right reading," and emulsion side up or down is specified as part of the imagesetting process when outputting to film.


Lets you choose a profile for the selected device.


Lets you preview the ink amounts in the selected profile for the printer device.


To set up your printer

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Printer. The Setup Printer dialog box opens.

2	In the Select Print Style box, select the printer device you want to use.

3	Set other printing options as necessary.

4	Click OK.


About the Setup Printer command


Setup Scanner

The most common way to bring images into Picture Publisher is with a scanner. There are many types of scanners--hand-held, slide, flatbed, page fed, color, and black-and-white are the most common.

It is important to choose the right type of scanner and scanner configuration for the job. For instance, if you are scanning a large image, a flatbed scanner works better than a hand-held scanner. Use the minimum scanner resolution needed. Some scanners, such as slide scanners, can scan at resolutions as high as 3000 pixels per inch (ppi). Remember, the larger the ppi, the larger the image file size.

Before you can use a scanner with Picture Publisher, you must install it by following the instructions provided by the manufacturer.

To receive input from a TWAIN device, such as a video frame grabber or a TWAIN scanner, you must use the Acquire command. The operation of devices using TWAIN differs among manufacturers and products. For help using a TWAIN interface, see the documents supplied with the product. Choose a TWAIN device from the Setup Scanner dialog box.


Scanning tips


To set up a TWAIN device

To set up a scanner

To add a scanner calibration style

To edit a scanner calibration style


To set up a TWAIN device

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Scanner.

2	Click Select Source. A TWAIN setup dialog box opens.

3	Select a TWAIN device and click OK.

4	In the Scanner Calibration Map box, select a calibration map, or click Use Color Management.

5	Click OK.


To set up a scanner

To add a scanner calibration style

To edit a scanner calibration style

Scanning tips


To set up a scanner

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, click Scanner.

2	In the Select a Scan Device box, select a scanner driver.

If your scanner driver is not listed, contact the scanner manufacturer for a TWAIN driver.

3	In the Scanner Address box, type a scanner address, if necessary.

4	In the Scanner Calibration Map box, select a calibration map, or click Use Color Management.

5	Click OK.


To set up a TWAIN device

To add a scanner calibration style

To edit a scanner calibration style

Scanning tips


Setup Scanner Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify a TWAIN driver.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Setup Scanner command

Scanning tips


Displays the name of the TWAIN driver that is currently loaded.


Opens the Select Source dialog box to let you select a TWAIN device driver for a specific input device.


Lets you choose whether to use color management for scanning.


Lets you choose the name of a calibration map to use for scanning.


Opens a menu containing commands for file management.


Select Source Dialog Box

This dialog box is for selecting TWAIN device drivers designed for a specific input device and any program with a TWAIN interface. Dialog box options include a source list box for choosing the input device you want to use.

Note

Before you can use the Acquire command on the File menu, you must select a TWAIN input driver.

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Setup Monitor

You can visually balance your system so what you scan, view, and print look similar. To visually balance your system, you calibrate your monitor, scanner, and printer.

Before calibrating your monitor, establish a normal, or constant, environment in which you will be working. This includes ambient room light and color, contrast, and brightness controls on your monitor. To stabilize the monitor, turn it on for at least one hour.


Setup Monitor Dialog Box

Monitor Gamma tab

The Monitor Gamma tab lets you set the monitor gamma to compensate for how your monitor displays images.

You can adjust the gamma correction curve for both monochrome and RGB color screens. If you are working on a black-and-white screen, your gamma correction edits should be concentrated on only the bottom gamma patch. If you are working with a color monitor, you can use all four tables in the dialog box.

You should perform the two steps below before using the Monitor command.

The first step to adjusting your gamma curve for your monitor is to establish a norm, or constant environment in which you will be working. This includes ambient room light and any color, contrast, and brightness controls on your monitor. A change in any one of these could drastically affect how you would adjust your gamma curve.

The second step is to make sure that your monitor has been on for at least one hour.

The Setup Monitor dialog box opens when you click the Setup command on the File menu and then click Monitor. The Monitor Gamma tab of the dialog box displays three large color patches. Use the slider for each color patch to adjust the gamma curve.

Monitor Profile tab

The Monitor Profile tab lets you select a monitor profile when you are using the Kodak Color Management System.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To calibrate your monitor

To select a monitor profile


Lets you adjust the Red component by sliding the control left or right.


Lets you adjust the Red component by typing a number or by adjusting the number up or down.


Lets you adjust the Green component by sliding the control left or right.


Lets you adjust the Green component by typing a number or by adjusting the number up or down.


Lets you adjust the Blue component by sliding the control left or right.


Lets you adjust the Blue component by typing a number or by adjusting the number up or down.


Lets you see the results of the gamma adjustments.


Locks the sliders together so that when you move one slider, you move them all.


Unlocks all sliders so that you can move each one independently.


Disables the monitor gamma.


Lets you select your monitor from a drop-down list.


Lets you apply the currently selected  profile so you can see the effect the profile has on the monitor.


To calibrate your monitor

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Monitor.

2	Click the Monitor Gamma tab.

3	If you want to drag all three sliders at once, click the Lock button.

If you want to drag the sliders independently, click the Unlock button.

4	Drag each slider until the small patch inside each large color patch is the same color as its surrounding area.

Note

If the small patch is not visible inside the large color patch, the monitor gamma is already in adjustment.


To select a monitor profile

About the Setup Monitor command


To select a monitor profile

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Monitor.

2	Click the Monitor Profile tab.

3	In the Monitor Device box, select a device.

4	Click OK.


About the Setup Monitor command

To calibrate your monitor


Calibration Command
Calibration

You can visually balance your system so what you scan, view, and print look similar. To visually balance your system, you calibrate your monitor, scanner, and printer.

This command opens a submenu containing the following commands you can use for calibrating your scanner and printer.


Setup Calibration for Scanning

Setup Calibration for Printing


Setup Calibration For Scanning

This command opens the Calibrate Scanner dialog box to let you calibrate your scanner by either the visual or measurement method.


To calibrate a scanner visually

To calibrate a scanner using a step scale

To disable a scanner calibration map

To calibrate a scanner for grayscale scanning

To calibrate a scanner for color scanning


Calibrate Scanner Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you calibrate your scanner using either the visual or measurement method.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To calibrate a scanner visually


About the Setup Calibration For Scanning command


Lets you specify the method of calibration.


Lets you choose the channel to edit: Master, Red, Blue, or Green.


Lets you select the method of viewing the calibration map.


Lets you adjust the gamma of the calibration map.


Lets you make adjustments to the calibration map to affect all red, blue, and green channels together.


Applies the color channel calibration to the grayscale channel calibration.


Applies the grayscale channel calibration to the color channel calibration.


Opens the Load Map dialog box to let you select a previously saved map.


Opens the Options dialog box to let you define various options for mapping.


Lets you preview the effects of your changes on the image.


Resets the current changes.


Resets the changes made to all channels.


Lets Picture Publisher automatically enter values in the Calibrate dialog box. This button is available only when the calibration method is Measurement.


To calibrate a scanner visually

Scan an image, hold the scanned image next to your monitor, and adjust a map until the scanned image is similar to the displayed image. After the map is adjusted, save and load the calibration map.

If you have a color scanner, you may need to scan the image twice, once for grayscale calibration and once for color calibration. Calibrate your scanner for grayscale calibration first and test the results. If you find the results satisfactory, color calibration is not necessary.

Before you calibrate your scanner, you must disable the scanner calibration map for accurate calibration.


Scanning tips

About the Setup Calibration For Scanning command


To disable a scanner calibration map

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Scanner.

2	In the Scanner Calibration Map box, select None.

3	Click OK.


To calibrate a scanner for grayscale scanning

1	Place a test photograph on your scanner bed.

2	On the File menu, click Acquire.

3	In the Scan Type box, select Grayscale.

4	Click Scan. Wait for the image to be scanned.

5	On the File menu, point to Setup, point to Calibration, and click For Scanning.

6	Deselect Use for Color Scans, if necessary.

There are separate "channels" for grayscale and color calibration maps. By disabling this option, the color calibration map channel will not be overwritten.

7	If you have already calibrated your scanner for color scanning, click Load.

8	Locate the color calibration map, and click Load. The color channels of the calibration map are loaded.

9	Adjust the map until the image on the screen matches the original photo.

10	Click Save. The Scanner Calibration Name dialog box opens.

11	In the Enter New Name area, type Visual Scanner.

12	Click OK.

13	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Scanner.

14	In the Scanner Calibration Map box, select Visual Scanner.

15	Click OK.


To calibrate your scanner for color scanning
To calibrate a scanner for color scanning

1	Place a test photograph on your scanner bed.

2	On the File menu, click Acquire.

3	In the Scan Type box, click Color.

4	Click Scan. Wait for the image to be scanned.

5	On the File menu, point to Setup, point to Calibration, and click For Scanning.

6	Click All Channels the Same to select it.

7	Deselect Use for Grayscale Scans, if necessary.

There are separate "channels" for grayscale and color calibration maps. By disabling this option, the grayscale calibration map channel will not be overwritten.

8	If you already have calibrated your scanner for grayscale scanning, click Load.

9	Locate the grayscale calibration map, and click Load. The grayscale channel of the calibration map is loaded.

10	Adjust the map until the image on the screen matches the original photograph.

11	Click Save.

12	In the Enter New Name area, type Visual Scanner.

13	Click OK.

14	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Scanner.

15	In the Scanner Calibration Map box, select Visual Scanner.

16	Click OK. The scanner is calibrated for color scanning.

Note

If you cannot adjust the colors correctly, deselect the All Channels the Same option (see step 8), and adjust the Red, Green, and Blue channels separately.

You can also calibrate your scanner using a calibrated step scale. Contact Micrografx for information about purchasing a calibrated step scale.


To calibrate your scanner using a step scale
To calibrate a scanner using a step scale

1	Place the step scale on your scanner bed.

2	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Scanner.

3	In the Scanner Calibration Map box, select None.

4	Click OK.

5	On the File menu, click Acquire.

6	In the Scan Type box, select Grayscale.

7	Click Prescan to view the step scale in the Preview window.

8	Move the cursor to a corner of the step scale and drag a rectangle around the step scale.

9	Release the left mouse button to set the crop rectangle.

10	In the Resolution box, type 150.

11	Click Scan. Wait for the image to be scanned.

12	On the File menu, point to Setup, point to Calibration, and click For Scanning.

13	In the Calibration Method box, select Measurement.

14	Drag a rectangle around the step scale. (Do not include the cross-hatch patterns at the top of the step scale image.)

15	Click Measure Image. A message appears asking if you want to update the readings.

16	Click OK.

17	Click OK.

18	Click Save.

19	In the Enter New Name area, type a name.

20	Click OK.


Setup Calibration For Printing

This command opens the Calibrate Printer dialog box to let you calibrate your printer by either the visual or measurement method.

Note

For accurate printer calibration, you must disable the printer calibration map before you calibrate your printer.


To disable the printer calibration map

To calibrate your printer

To calibrate your printer using a step scale


Calibrate Printer Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you calibrate your printer using either the visual or measurement method. Some options are available only when you choose a specific measurement method.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To disable the printer calibration map

To calibrate your printer

To calibrate your printer using a step scale


About the Setup Calibration For Printer command


To disable the printer calibration map

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Printer.

2	Click Setup Print Style.

3	Click the Calibration tab.

4	In the Printer Calibration Map area, select None.

5	Click OK.

6	In the Enter New Name text box, type a name.

7	Click OK.


To calibrate your printer

1	On the File menu, click Print.

2	Click Print. The image prints to your printer.

3	On the File menu, point to Setup, point to Calibration, and click For Printing.

4	Adjust the map until the image on the screen matches the printed image.

5	Click Save.

6	In the Enter Map Name box, type Visual Printer.

7	Click OK.

8	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Printer.

9	Click Setup Print Style.

10	Click the Calibration tab.

11	In the Printer Calibration Map box, select Visual Printer.

12	Click OK.

13	In the Enter New Name area, type Calibrated Printer.

14	Click OK. The Printer Style Name dialog box closes.

15	Click OK.

Note

You can also calibrate your printer using the image of a color or grayscale step scale image that ships with Picture Publisher.


To calibrate your printer using a step scale

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Printer.

2	Click Setup Print Style.

3	Click the Calibration tab.

4	In the Printer Calibration Map box, select None.

5	Click OK.

6	In the Enter New Name box, type a new name.

7	Click OK.

8	Click OK.

9	If you are using a color printer, open the file STEPS.TIF. If you are using a grayscale printer, open the file GSTEPS.TIF. (These files are located in the Tutorial folder.)

10	On the File menu, click Print.

11	Click Print. The image is sent to your printer.

12	Scan the results from your printer with a scanner that has been calibrated or measure the patches with a dot area meter and enter the results in the Calibrate Printer dialog box.

13	On the File menu, point to Setup, point to Calibration, and click For Printing.

14	In the Calibration Method box, select Measurement.

15	Drag a rectangle around the scanned scale.

16	Click Measure Image. Picture Publisher reads the value of each step and enters each value in the Calibrate Printer dialog box. If the scanned image is color, the cyan, magenta, and yellow values are entered. If the scanned image is grayscale, the black values are entered.

17	Click Save.

18	In the File Name area, type a name for the calibration file.

19	Click OK.


Print

With Picture Publisher, you can print images to any Windows-compatible printer or output device. You can even "print" to a file for delivery to a service bureau or a remote printer.

Before you can print from Picture Publisher, you must choose a printer in Windows. Then you start Picture Publisher and set up a print device, select a type of printer, and select a print style.

You choose a printer with Picture Publisher just as you would with any other Windows application--with the Windows Control Panel. For more information about choosing a printer, see the Windows documentation.


About the Page Setup command


To print an image


Print Dialog Box

The Print dialog box contains options to change print styles to make adjustments to your printer for optimal results.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To print an image


About the Print command

About the Page Setup command


Lets you set the width, height, size of the image, and positioning of the image when printed.


Lets you specify the number of copies to print.


Shows how the printed image will look on the page.


Lets you change the Width and Height values independent of each other. Use this option to stretch an image when it prints.


Centers the printed image on the page. When you deselect this option, you can then specify where to position the image relative to the top and left margins.


Lets you specify how you want to output an image. Click the down arrow to the right of the Type of Output list box and then click the type of output you want.


Displays the currently selected output device.


Displays the currently selected print style.


Lets you produce high-quality, high-detail images on low-resolution printers. Unlike a standard halftone, no screen ruling is required for ScatterPrint. Choosing the ScatterPrint option ignores the Screen Ruling option for your printer. See your printer documentation for more information on screen ruling.


Lets you send the minimum amount of data to a PostScript printer to get the highest resolution capable from the printer. This usually speeds the printing of images to PostScript printers. If this option is not selected, all the data is sent to the printer.


Lets you send information to your printer in the binary format, rather than the ASCII format. Printing with the binary format is faster than ASCII; however, not all printers or service bureaus can accept the binary format.


Lets you use the default screening values of the printer.


Resets setup values to what they were before changes were made.


To print an image

1	On the File menu, choose Print. The Print dialog box opens.

2	In the Type of Output box, select the type of output you want.

If you are printing to a PostScript device and select either Black Ink Separation or Color Ink Separation options you can select which color plate to print.

3	Select any options you want.

4	Click Print. The image is sent to the printer.


About the Print command

About the Page Setup command

Printing problems


Printing Problems

If you are experiencing printing problems, check the following table for possible solutions:

Problem	Possible Solution
Moire patterns on output	Change screen angles
Ink balance incorrect	Adjust ink recipes in the Setup Print Style dialog box or use the Visual Color Balance command in the Map menu.
Incorrect colors using an ink-jet printer	One of the cyan, magenta, yellow, or black ink reservoirs is empty, or the printer screening is off.
Color not correct	Gamut limiting problems. Use a printer with a wider color range.
Color not correct	Disable "color matching" options in printer drivers.


About the Print command


Print Preview

The Print Preview command displays a preview of the way the image will print.

Note

You can't access Print Preview unless you have installed and activated CMS and you have converted the CMYK image to Color Managed.


To display a preview of how an image will print


To display a preview of how an image will print

On the File menu, click Print Preview.

Note

You can't access Print Preview unless you have installed and activated CMS and you have converted the CMYK image to Color Managed.


About the Print Preview command


Send

The Send command lets you send an image in an e-mail message. This command uses your computer's current e-mail program.


To send an image as e-mail


To send an image as e-mail

1	On the File menu, click Send.

2	Follow the normal procedures required for your computer's e-mail program.


About the Send command


Recall

The Recall command lets you reopen an image file that you recently opened or saved. The recent file names are listed at the bottom of the File menu.

Note

You can set the number of file names using the Options command on the Tools menu.


To open a recently saved file


To open a recently saved file

1	Click the File menu.

2	At the bottom of the menu, click the name of the file you want to reopen.


About the Recall image file command


Exit

This command closes Picture Publisher.

If you have any image files open in which you have unsaved changes, Picture Publisher prompts you to save the files before the program closes.


To close Picture Publisher


To close Picture Publisher

On the File menu, click Exit.

If the file you are working with has changed and you did not save it before clicking the Exit command, a dialog box opens and requests that you select one of three choices: Yes, No, or Cancel.

Yes closes Picture Publisher and saves the changes to the image.

No closes Picture Publisher and does not save changes to your image.

Cancel cancels the Exit command and returns you to the current image.


About the Exit command


Mask Menu

The Mask menu works in conjunction with the Mask tools to remove, load, and save masks. The menu also contains commands that let you crop an image and blend an image to the edges of a pasted image.

Undo/Redo Mask	Removes the last change made to a mask.
Remove Mask	Deletes all active masks.
Load Mask	Loads a previously saved mask and places it in the current image.
Save Mask	Saves masks for future use.
Chroma Mask	Creates a mask based on color.
Create Mask From Object	Creates a mask from a selected object.
Invert Mask	Reverses the masked and unmasked areas.
Feather Mask	Smooths the edge transition between the masked and unmasked areas of an image.
Remove Holes	Removes holes from the inside of masks.
Mask Smoother	Smooths a mask.
Crop To Mask	Lets you cut out unwanted portions of an image.
Stroke Mask	Draws a border outline under a mask.
Hide Mask	Hides the mask's borders while keeping the masks in place.


Undo/Redo Mask

The Undo command is used to reverse or undo actions taken in creating or modifying masks. The Undo command varies according to the action previously taken. For example, if you used the Smart Mask too, the Undo command reads "Undo Smart Mask." If you used the Invert Mask command in the Mask menu, the Undo command reads "Undo Invert Mask."

The Redo command restores the most recent undo. After you use the Undo command, the Redo command replaces it on the Mask menu. You can toggle between Undo and Redo to see your mask before and after the latest change.

Notes

If a change cannot be reversed, the Undo command is gray.

To save memory, you can disable Undo for Masks with the options on the Undo tab in the Options dialog box.


 About the Mask Menu commands


 To undo a masking action

To redo a masking action


To undo a masking action

On the Mask menu, click Undo. The previous action is undone. The menu item changes to Redo.


 To redo a masking action

About the Undo/Redo Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


To redo a masking action

On the Mask menu, click Undo. The previous action is undone. The menu item changes to Redo.


 To undo a masking action

About the Undo/Redo Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


Remove Mask

When you are done editing a masked area, you can remove, or deselect, the mask. This lets you draw another mask to edit another portion of the image.

Note

Removing a mask is not the same as hiding a mask.


To remove all active masks


To remove all active masks

On the Mask menu, click Remove Mask. All active masks disappear.

Note

Removing a mask is not the same as hiding a mask.


About the Remove Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


Load Mask

Picture Publisher lets you save masks and load them at a later time. You may want to save a mask if it is fairly complex; you can save time by using it later. The mask retains its original size and location.


To load a mask


About the Save Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


Load Mask Dialog Box

The Load Mask dialog box lets you choose a previously saved mask file to open.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Load Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


To load a mask

1	On the Mask menu, click Load Mask. The Load Mask dialog box opens.

2	In the Select Mask Name box, select a mask name.

3	Click Load.

Notes

To move or edit the mask, use the Mask Transform tool or the Mask Point Editing tool in the Mask tool set.

If the mask is a different size from the image, or you have an existing mask, the Mask Transform tool becomes available.

The Delete Current Mask option deletes the current mask before adding the new mask.


About the Load Mask command

About the Save Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


 Save Mask

Picture Publisher lets you save masks and load them at a later time. You may want to save a mask if it is fairly complex; you can save time by using it later. The mask retains its original size and location.


To save a mask


About the Load Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


Save Mask Dialog Box

The Save Mask dialog box lets you name and store a mask that you created.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Save Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


To save a mask

1	On the Mask menu, click Save Mask. The Save Mask dialog box opens.

2	In the Enter Mask Name box, type a name for the mask.

3	Click Save.


About the Save Mask command

About the Load Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


Chroma Mask

The Chroma Mask command is designed to let you easily create a mask for dropping out color. For example, if an image has a neutral background (blue, gray, green), you can use the Chroma Mask command to draw a mask around the background, and easily replace the background with a texture.


 To create a mask using Chroma Mask


 About the Mask Menu commands


Chroma Mask Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you create a mask based on the colors in the image.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


 About the Chroma Mask command


Lets you choose a color model when using the Chroma Mask. Choices are Normal, HSL (Hue, Saturation, and Lightness), and Lightness.


Lets you choose the additive mode to add to a masked area.


Lets you choose the subtractive mode to subtract from a masked area.


Lets you specify a percentage range to define how close the mask color will be to the chosen color. A 0% setting masks only an exact color match; a 100% setting masks all colors.


Lets you specify a percentage range to define how close the mask color will be to the chosen color. A 0% setting masks only an exact color match; a 100% setting masks all colors.


Lets you specify a percentage range to define how close the mask color will be to the chosen color. A 0% setting masks only an exact color match; a 100% setting masks all colors.


Lets you specify a percentage range to define how close the mask color will be to the chosen color. A 0% setting masks only an exact color match; a 100% setting masks all colors.


Lets you specify a percentage range to define how close the mask color will be to the chosen color. A 0% setting masks only an exact color match; a 100% setting masks all colors.


Lets you specify a percentage range to define how close the mask color will be to the chosen color. A 0% setting masks only an exact color match; a 100% setting masks all colors.


Lets you specify a percentage range to define how close the mask color will be to the chosen color. A 0% setting masks only an exact color match; a 100% setting masks all colors.


Lets you specify a percentage range to define how close the mask color will be to the chosen color. A 0% setting masks only an exact color match; a 100% setting masks all colors.


Lets you turn on or off the color selected in the Probe button.


Lets you turn on or off the color selected in the Probe button.


Lets you turn on or off the color selected in the Probe button.


Lets you turn on or off the color selected in the Probe button.


Lets you turn on or off the color selected in the Probe button.


Lets you turn on or off the color selected in the Probe button.


Lets you turn on or off the color selected in the Probe button.


Lets you turn on or off the color selected in the Probe button.


Lets you set the fade percentage. As you increase the Fade percentage, the edges of the mask become softer. As you decrease the Fade percentage, the edges of the mask become more defined.


Lets you specify whether the current mask in the image is to be removed during this operation.


Lets you preview the area that Chroma Mask affects before applying the mask.


To create a mask using Chroma Mask

1	On the Mask menu, click Chroma Mask.

2	In the Color Model box, select a color model.

3	Click the Additive or Subtractive mode button to add or subtract to the mask.

4	Click a Probe button. The pointer changes to a probe.

5	Move the pointer to a color in the image and click the left mouse button.

6	In the Range box, enter the range value for the probe you selected, if necessary.

7	In the Fade box, increase the fade value, if necessary.

8	Click Preview to view the mask.

9	Repeat steps 4 through 8 until the mask is as you want it.

10	Click OK. The Chroma Mask dialog box closes and an area of the image is masked.


About the Chroma Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


Create Mask From Object

Picture Publisher lets you create a mask from a selected object or group of objects. It can be especially useful when you want to create a text mask, as shown.


 About the Mask Menu commands


 To create a mask from an object


To create a mask from an object

1	Select an object which you want to make into a mask.

2	On the Mask menu, click Create Mask From Object.


About the Create Mask From Object command

About the Mask Menu commands


Invert Mask

After a mask has been drawn, you can invert it (reverse it). Inverting a mask removes the mask from the area inside the border and masks the area outside the border. You can make various changes either to the masked or to the unmasked area. If you want the changes to apply to the unmasked area, invert the mask before making the changes.

The inside area is masked on the image to the left. The outside area is masked on the image to the right.


 About the Mask Menu commands


To invert a mask


To invert a mask

On the Mask menu, click Invert Mask.


About the Invert Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


Feather Mask

Images in masked areas often present sharp edges that, when moved or copied, easily identify them as added objects in an image. Picture Publisher lets you feather the edges of masks so that, when you move or copy the images, they blend smoothly into the surrounding base image. You can choose the number of pixels to be used so you can control the amount of feathering. You also control the direction of the feathering: outside, center, or inside, and whether the edge should be hard, normal, or soft.


 About the Mask Menu commands


To feather a mask


Feather Mask Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you smooth the edge transition between the masked and unmasked areas of an image.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Feather Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


Lets you enter the number of pixels for the feathering to extend from the border.


Displays the options for selecting how quickly the feathering drops off: hard, normal, or soft.


Displays the options for selecting whether to feather the mask inside the border, outside the border, or centered on the border.


To feather a mask

1	Create a mask using one of the mask tools.

2	On the Mask menu, click Feather Mask.

3	In the Amount box, type the number of pixels to feather.

4	In the Edge box, select an edge type.

5	In the Direction box, select a direction for the feathering.

6	Click Feather.


About the Feather Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


Remove Holes

The Remove Holes command lets you remove holes from the inside of masks. For example, the Smart Mask tool may leave part of the image inside a mask unmasked. Use the Remove Holes command to include the areas inside the mask.


 About the Mask Menu commands


To remove holes in a mask


To remove holes in a mask

On the Mask menu, click Remove Holes.


About the Remove Holes command

About the Mask Menu commands


Mask Smoother

The Mask Smoother command on the Mask menu lets you smooth rough edges of masks. It opens the Mask Smoother dialog box to let you specify how many pixels the mask will be smoothed.


 To smooth a mask


 About the Mask Menu commands


Mask Smoother Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify how many pixels the mask will be smoothed.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Mask Smoother command

About the Mask Menu commands


Lets you specify the amount of smoothness, in pixels, you want.


To smooth a mask

1	On the Mask menu, click Mask Smoother.

2	In the Amount box, type the amount for smoothing.

3	Click Smooth.


About the Mask Smoother command

About the Mask Menu commands


Crop To Mask

The Crop To Mask command lets you cut out unwanted portions of an image.


 About the Mask Menu commands


 To crop a portion of an image


To crop a portion of an image

1	Mask the portions of your image you wish to keep.

2	On the Mask menu, click Crop To Mask. The screen repaints to the size of the masks, crops the image area, and removes the masks.

Note

If more than one mask is defined, the image is cropped to the smallest area that includes all of the masks.


About the Crop To Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


Stroke Mask

The Stroke Mask command draws a border outline under a mask. You can use this command to add any number of special effects, such as adding a neon border to a masked part of the image.

The feather amount is set from the current Retouch tool ribbon settings, which lets you set the smoothing transition between the line and surrounding image. You define the feather as a percent of the drawing tip size. Feathering applies to both sides of the line.


 About the Mask Menu commands


To stroke a mask


To stroke a mask

1	Draw a mask using one of the mask tools.

2	Click the Retouch tool in the Main toolbar.

3	Click either the Paint tool or the Texture tool.

4	Choose the options you want to use in the ribbon.

5	On the Mask menu, click Stroke Mask.

Note

You can also click the Stroke button on the Paint tool or Texture tool ribbons to stroke a mask.


About the Stroke Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


Hide/Show Mask

The Hide/Show Mask command keeps all masks in place but hides or shows the mask borders. The mask border consists of a black and white animated line (red and green in grayscale images) denoting the edges of the mask. If the mask is blocking a detailed area of the image, you may want to hide it so you can better view any changes you make to the masked area.


 About the Mask Menu commands


To hide or show a mask


To hide/show a mask

On the Mask menu, click Hide Mask or Show Mask.


About the Hide/Show Mask command

About the Mask Menu commands


Map Menu

The Map menu commands let you adjust the colors and intensities in an image to enhance it for output. They include adjustments to contrast, hue, brightness, and saturation, and special effects such as posterizing and thresholding.

Modify Color Maps	Controls the output density of the primary colors, individually and combined, over the full range from highlight to shadow.
Contrast/Brightness	Sharpens (or softens) and darkens (or lightens) the image, similar to the controls on a computer monitor.
Color Balance	Increases or decreases the effect of certain colors on an image.
Tone Balance	Modifies tonal range.
Posterize	Produces special effects by reducing the levels of grays and colors in an image.
Threshold	Produces special effects by changing the threshold point in an image.
Hue Shift	Shifts all hues in an image.
Hue Map	Shifts selected ranges of hues in an image.
Histogram	Displays the shadows, midtones, and highlights of an image.
Apply Calibration Map	Lets you make adjustments in Picture Publisher to improve the quality of your images by compensating for imperfections in scanning and printing devices.
Edit Palette	Lets you edit the palette if the image was converted to palette color. Palette color images are images of 256 or fewer colors.


Modify Color Maps

One of Picture Publisher's most powerful features is its ability to let you modify color maps to enhance the colors in your original image. You can use a color map to control brightness, contrast, color balance, hue, saturation, and tonal details. You can also use it to create special effects such as posterization.

A color map is a graph that represents the color values in an image. With this map, you can alter all original colors at once or you can specify primary color channels individually.

You adjust color maps by dragging the points on the color map curve to change the shape of the curve. A point is a device you use to change the shape of a color map curve. By default, there are three points on the curve but you can have as many as 11. By clicking the Curves/Lines toggle button, you adjust the map curve by curves or line segments.

To add a point to a color map curve, click on the curve or click the Probe button, move the probe to the image, and click the left mouse button. As you move the probe over the image, the color intensity under the probe is mapped to the color map curve. A point is added to the curve when you click the left mouse button. This lets you easily find the color map point location for a specific color intensity.

By pressing Spacebar, you cycle upward through the points in the color map curve. By pressing Shift+Spacebar, you cycle downward through the points. You can use the arrow keys to move an active point by one unit. If you hold Shift and press an arrow key, you move an active point by five units. To delete a point, select the point by clicking on it to make it active, and pressing Delete.

Both axes of the color map specify the intensity of a color. The horizontal axis represents colors as they exist in the image (input). The vertical axis represents how you want the color to appear in the image (output). If percentages are chosen in the Options dialog box, zero on each axis indicates white, or no intensity. One hundred is black, or full intensity. Picture Publisher measures the intensities in percentages. The percentages can range from 0 to 100 (highlights to shadows) or 100 to 0, depending on the user-definable input axis setting. You can toggle this setting by clicking the gradient area directly under the color map.

The color map lets you access different channels: one for each channel in the image. You can map these channels to adjust input colors to different output colors. To access the additive primary colors, you must have an RGB image open. To access the subtractive primary colors, you must have a CMYK image open.


About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


To modify the color map for an image


Modify Color Maps Dialog Box

The Modify Color Maps dialog box lets you control brightness, contrast, color balance, hue, saturation, and tonal details for an image. You can also use it to create special effects such as posterization and add, rename, and delete Map files.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Modify Color Maps command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Displays the color channels that you can modify. Modify either the RGB channels or the CMYK channels based on the type of image. The Master channel affects all colors equally.


Lets you move the entire map up.

If you click inside either the vertical or horizontal gradient area, you flip the axes of the map.


Lets you move the entire map down.

If you click inside either the vertical or horizontal gradient area, you flip the axes of the map.


Lets you move the entire map to the left.

If you click inside either the vertical or horizontal gradient area, you flip the axes of the map.


Lets you move the entire map to the right.


Lets you flip the vertical axis of the map. Click inside the gradient area


Lets you flip the horizontal axis of the map. Click inside the gradient area


Lets you display the map as curves or lines.


Opens the Save Map dialog box to let you save the map.


To adjust a color map

1	On the Map menu, click Modify Color Maps.

2	In the Channel box, select the channel you want to modify.

3	In the Editing box, select Visual, if necessary.

Note

You could instead click Numeric and enter the numeric values directly into the Input and Output boxes.

4	Move the cursor to a point on the curve, press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the point to a new location. Release the left mouse button.

5	Click OK.

Notes

If the changes are not acceptable at this point, you can click the Undo command to revert to the previously applied changes. To make the changes a part of the working image, either click the Manual Apply command on the Edit menu if in Manual Apply mode or resume editing to automatically apply them in Auto Apply mode.

As you change a point in Visual mode, the corresponding Input and Output values in Numeric dialog box change. Also, as you change Input and Output values in Numeric mode, the corresponding points in the Visual mode change.


About the Modify Color Maps command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Color maps options dialog box
Color Map Options Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you define various options for color mapping.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Lets you define the softness or hardness of the color map curve. The default is Normal.


Lets you define the starting number of points that appear on the Visual color map.


Toggles whether you want the units for the color map to be percentages. When deselected, RGB color map values (0 to 255) are used.


Toggles whether you want a grid to be displayed on the Visual color map curve.


Save Map Dialog Box

The Map Name dialog box opens when you click the Save button in the Modify Color Maps dialog box or the Tone Balance dialog box. It lets you enter a name under which the map file will be saved.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To modify Color Maps

To balance the tonal range of an image


About the Modify Color Maps command


Load Map Dialog Box

The Load Map dialog box opens when you click the Load button in the Modify Color Maps dialog box or the Tone Balance dialog box. It lets you select the name the map file to be loaded.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To modify Color Maps

To balance the tonal range of an image


About the Modify Color Maps command


Contrast/Brightness

You can adjust the contrast and brightness of an image using the Modify Color Maps dialog box or you can use the Contrast/Brightness command.

Picture Publisher's Contrast/Brightness command on the Map menu lets you control the contrast and brightness of an image using two different methods: the "visual" method and the "joystick" method. The visual method shows samples of an image with different contrast and brightness settings. You simply click on a sampled image and the contrast and brightness settings are automatically changed.

You can choose the tonal range you want to affect: Full, Highlights, Midtones, and Shadows. Choose Full to affect every range in the image. Choose Highlights to affect the lightest values in the image. Choose Midtones to affect the middle values in the image. Choose Shadows to affect the darkest values in the image.

The joystick method lets you change the contrast and brightness by moving a joystick. As you move the joystick, the contrast and brightness numeric values change. You can also enter the values directly.


To adjust contrast and brightness using the joystick method

To adjust contrast and brightness visually


Contrast explained

Brightness explained

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Contrast

Contrast is the difference between the lightest and darkest areas of an image. When you increase or decrease contrast, you raise or lower the differences between light and dark colors in an image. For light colors this means you add or subtract the amount of white in the color. For dark colors, this means you add or subtract black.

The illustration below shows an image before (left) and after (right) increasing its contrast.


Brightness explained

About the Contrast/Brightness command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Brightness

Brightness is the overall amount of lightness and darkness of an image. When you increase or decrease brightness, you raise or lower the overall tone of the image. This means you add lightness or darkness to all colors in the image.

The illustration below shows an image before (left) and after (right) decreasing its brightness.


Contrast explained

About the Contrast/Brightness command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Contrast/Brightness Dialog Box

The Contrast/Brightness dialog box lets you adjust the contrast and brightness of an image using a joystick.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Contrast explained

Brightness explained

About the Contrast/Brightness command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Displays the tone ranges that you can choose to affect. They include Full, Highlights, Midtones, and Shadows.


Shows the percentage of change applied to contrast. A positive number, such as 10, increases the contrast. A negative number, such as -10, decreases it.


Shows the percentage of change applied to brightness. A positive number, such as 10, increases the contrast. A negative number, such as -10, decreases it.


Lets you make changes by dragging. Reflects the changes as you make them.


Toggles automatic preview. Automatic preview lets you apply the preview to the image directly without the need to click a button each time.


To adjust contrast and brightness using the joystick method

1	On the Map menu, point to Contrast/Brightness, and click Joystick.

Note

Value boxes in the Change area display numerical percentages for changes in contrast and brightness. The joystick and numerical displays are interactive, and changes can be made with either one.

2	Drag the handle of the joystick or enter numerical values in the Contrast and Brightness boxes to adjust the image.

Note

Move the joystick up and down to adjust the contrast; move it left and right to adjust the brightness. The same results are achieved by entering positive or negative values in the Change boxes. To reset both values to 0, click Reset or double-click the joystick.

3	Click Preview and review the changes.

Note

Even though the image may change interactively (with a 256-color Windows display driver) and may provide feedback as contrast and brightness are modified, only Preview shows the full effect of all changes.

4	Click OK.

Note

If the changes are not acceptable at this point, you can click the Undo command to revert to the previously applied changes. To make the changes a part of the working image, either click the Manual Apply command on the Edit menu (if in manual apply mode) or resume editing to automatically apply them (in auto apply mode).


To adjust contrast and brightness visually

Contrast explained

Brightness explained

About the Contrast/Brightness command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Visual Contrast/Brightness Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you adjust the contrast and brightness of an image while viewing a series of small images that show how your changes alter the image.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Visual Contrast/Brightness Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you adjust the contrast and brightness of an image while viewing a series of small images that show how your changes alter the image.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Shows the original image. Clicking this button resets all changes to the image.


Shows how all current changes will alter the image.


Lets you adjust the balance of the image. Labels indicate the affect each button has. The images show the change each button will make. Click the appropriate button to make a change.


Lets you adjust the balance of the image. Labels indicate the affect each button has. The images show the change each button will make. Click the appropriate button to make a change.


Lets you adjust the balance of the image. Labels indicate the affect each button has. The images show the change each button will make. Click the appropriate button to make a change.


Lets you adjust the balance of the image. Labels indicate the affect each button has. The images show the change each button will make. Click the appropriate button to make a change.


Lets you adjust the balance of the image. Labels indicate the affect each button has. The images show the change each button will make. Click the appropriate button to make a change.


Lets you adjust the balance of the image. Labels indicate the affect each button has. The images show the change each button will make. Click the appropriate button to make a change.


Lets you adjust the balance of the image. Labels indicate the affect each button has. The images show the change each button will make. Click the appropriate button to make a change.


Lets you adjust the balance of the image. Labels indicate the affect each button has. The images show the change each button will make. Click the appropriate button to make a change.


Displays the tone ranges that you can choose to affect. They include Full, Highlights, Midtones, and Shadows.


Lets you enter the percentage of change you want to apply to a color each time you click on the one of the image buttons. Move the slider by dragging the control.


Click on the image above to adjust the amount of contrast/brightness according to the indicators below the image.


Click on the image above to adjust the amount of contrast/brightness according to the indicators below the image.


Click on the image above to adjust the amount of contrast/brightness according to the indicators below the image.


Click on the image above to adjust the amount of contrast/brightness according to the indicators below the image.


Click on the image above to adjust the amount of contrast/brightness according to the indicators below the image.


Click on the image above to adjust the amount of contrast/brightness according to the indicators below the image.


Click on the image above to adjust the amount of contrast/brightness according to the indicators below the image.


Click on the image above to adjust the amount of contrast/brightness according to the indicators below the image.


Click on the image above to adjust the amount of contrast/brightness according to the indicators below the image.


Click on the image above to adjust the amount of contrast/brightness according to the indicators below the image.


Click on the image above to adjust the amount of contrast/brightness according to the indicators below the image.


Click on the image above to adjust the amount of contrast/brightness according to the indicators below the image.


To adjust contrast and brightness visually

1	Mask the area you want to modify or use the entire image.

2	On the Map menu, point to Contrast/Brightness, and click Visual.

3	In the Tonal Range box, select the tone range you want to modify.

4	Move the Increments slider to alter the percentage of change you want to apply to a color each time you click one of the image buttons.

5	Click the image buttons to apply the changes.

6	Click Preview to see how the changes alter the image.

7	Click OK.


To adjust contrast and brightness using the joystick method

Contrast explained

Brightness explained

About the Contrast/Brightness command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Color Balance

Adjusting the color balance means that you can increase or decrease the effect of certain colors for all or part of an image. Often an objectionable tone can ruin the appearance of a color you want to emphasize. For example, you may have scanned an old color photograph that has developed a distracting green color tint.

You can use color balancing either to enhance the color you want to emphasize or to reduce the color you want to tone down. The illustration below shows an image before (left) and after (right) color balancing.

You can choose the tonal range you want to affect: Full, Highlights, Midtones and Shadows. Choose Full to affect every range in the image. Choose Highlights to affect the lightest values in the image. Choose Midtones to affect the middle values in the image. Choose Shadows to affect the darkest values in the image.

Picture Publisher provides two methods to change color balance--the "visual" method and the "joystick" method. The visual method shows samples of an image with different color balance settings. You simply click on a sample image and the color balance settings are automatically changed. This simplifies the process of changing color balance.

The joystick method lets you change the color balance by moving a joystick. As you move the joystick, the color balance numeric values change. You can also enter values directly.


To adjust color balance using the joystick method

To adjust color balance visually


About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Color Balance Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you enter changes to the color balance of your image using a joystick.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Map Menu commands

About the Color Balance command

Understanding color correction


To adjust color balance using the joystick method

1	Mask the area you want to modify or use the entire image.

2	In the Channel box, select the channel you want to modify.

3	In the Tonal Range box, select the tone range you want to modify.

4	In the Contrast and Brightness boxes, enter the percentage changes you want to apply.

You can also set these values by dragging the joystick up and down to adjust the contrast, and dragging the joystick left and right to adjust the balance.

5	Click Preview to see how the changes alter the image.

6	Make any additional changes to other channels and values.

7	Click OK.


To adjust color balance visually

About the Color Balance command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Visual Color Balance Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you adjust the color balance of your image using the visual method.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Visual Color Balance Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you adjust the color balance of your image using the visual method.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Shows the change value for red when all current changes are applied to the image.


Shows the change value for green when all current changes are applied to the image.


Shows the change value for blue when all current changes are applied to the image.


Shows the change value for cyan when all current changes are applied to the image.


Shows the change value for magenta when all current changes are applied to the image.


Shows the change value for yellow when all current changes are applied to the image.


Shows the change value for darker when all current changes are applied to the image.


Shows the change value for lighter when all current changes are applied to the image.


Lets you maintain the overall density of the original image.


To adjust color balance visually

1	Mask the area you want to modify or use the entire image.

2	On the Map menu, point to Color Balance, and click Visual.

3	In the Tonal Range box, select the tone range you want to modify.

4	Move the Increments slider to alter the percentage of change you want to apply to a color each time you click one of the image buttons.

5	If you want to maintain the overall density of the original image, click Maintain Density.

6	Click the image buttons to apply the changes.

7	Click Preview to see how the changes alter the image.

8	Click OK.


To adjust color balance using the joystick method

About the Color Balance command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Tone Balance

If an image is either too dark or too light, it may have some hidden detail that can be extracted using the Tone Balance command.

The Tone Balance command lets you balance the tonal range of an image. This usually improves contrast and midtone detail. For example, suppose the darkest tone of an image is 79 percent black, and that is where your darkest shadow should be. You can use this command to make that tonal area 100 percent black.

The illustration below shows an image before and after adjusting the tones.

After you choose the Tone Balance command, Picture Publisher generates a histogram of an image displayed in the Tone Balance dialog box. (The histogram reflects the channel selected. For example, if you choose the master channel, a luminance histogram is created). This histogram is a chart of an image where the horizontal axis represents the percentage of gray values and the vertical axis represents the number of image pixels with each value. The Auto Clip automatically sets the starting positions of the highlights and shadows to the percentages set in the Options dialog box. You can move the markers to any location in the histogram.

By moving the markers you can also manually "sacrifice" more highlight and shadow points to increase midrange detail. For example, if you select 10 percent as your highlight, all pixels with values 10 percent or less become 0 percent or white. This adjustment brightens an image. By doing this you discard some of the highlights, but you gain midtone details. A similar effect happens with the shadows. If you set the darkest shadow value to 90 percent, pixels with values of 90 percent and more turn black. Picture Publisher distributes the other values relative to their beginning values.

You can also locate the value of a shadow, midtone, or highlight in an image by clicking the respective probe button and clicking the probe on the image.


To balance the tonal range of an image


About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Tone Balance Dialog Box

The Tone Balance dialog box displays a histogram of the image. The histogram is a chart, where the horizontal axis represents the percentage of gray values and the vertical axis represents the number (count) of values. Below the histogram are the Highlights, Midtones, and Shadows markers. You can slide the markers to different positions by dragging.

Clicking one of the Probe buttons (Shadows, Midtones, or Highlights) and then pointing to the image displays the data count for the specific probe point. The count values displayed indicate the percentage of data at that point. These readings are interactive and change as the probe is moved. These data counts are used to locate the markers on the histogram and to identify the quantity of image data discarded when the tonal range is adjusted. Click on the image to enter the data for that specific point.

Notes

You may need to reposition the dialog box to give you a better view of the effect your changes have on the image.

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Tone Balance command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Displays a histogram (chart) of an image where the horizontal axis represents the percentage of gray values and the vertical axis represents the number of image pixels with each value.


Lets you change the starting positions of the highlights, midtones, and shadows in the image by dragging the pointers left or right.


Lets you change the starting positions of the highlights in the image.


Lets you change the starting positions of the midtones in the image.


Lets you change the starting positions of the shadows in the image.


Lets you probe the Highlights value from the image.


Lets you probe the Midtones value from the image.


Lets you probe the shadows value from the image.


Lets you set the maximum highlight value.


Lets you set the minimum shadow value.


Automatically sets the tonal range.


Set the percentage of highlights you want to sacrifice.


Set the percentage of shadows you want to sacrifice.


Click to use the midtone as a percentage.


To balance the tonal range of an image

1	On the Map menu, click Tone Balance.

2	In the Channel box, select the channel you want to modify.

3	Drag the shadow, midtone, and highlight markers to new locations on the histogram.

You can also enter values in the Shadow, Midtone, and Highlight boxes, or click the Shadow, Midtone, and Highlight Probe buttons to probe the tone values from the image.

4	In the Maximum Highlights and Minimum Shadows boxes, enter any appropriate values.

5	Click OK.

Note

You can adjust the tonal range in an area of an image by defining the area with a mask.


About the Tone Balance command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Posterize

The Posterize command limits the number of density levels used by each primary color to achieve a pronounced effect. They are modified either by adjusting individual primary color channels or by adjusting all channels at the same time by using the Master channel.


To posterize an image


About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Posterize Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify the density levels for the posterization process.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Posterize command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Lets you change posterization density levels (up to 256).


Lets you change posterization density levels (up to 256) by sliding left or right.


To posterize an image

1	On the Map menu, click Posterize.

2	In the Channel box, select the channel you want to modify.

3	Move the Posterize slider to change posterization density levels.

4	Click Preview to review your changes.

5	Repeat steps 2 through 4 as necessary, adjusting levels for each channel until you have a satisfactory image.

6	Click OK.

Note

Even though the image may change interactively (with a 256-color Windows display driver) and may provide feedback as posterization is modified, only Preview shows the full effect of all changes.

If the changes are not acceptable at this point, you can click the Undo command on the Edit menu to revert to the previously applied changes. To make the changes a part of the working image, either click the Manual Apply command on the Edit menu (if in manual apply mode) or resume editing to automatically apply them (in auto apply mode).


About the Posterize command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Threshold

Threshold turns on individual colors that are pure above a threshold density point and turns off colors that are below it. The following images illustrate the behavior of the Threshold command. The left image is a simple gradient that varies in color from pure blue to pure white with a mixture of blue and white inbetween. The right image is a result of changing the threshold point to 50 percent. If the threshold were changed to 1 percent, the gradient image would become almost completely blue. If the threshold were changed to 99 percent, the gradient image would become almost completely white.

The Threshold command is useful for converting a grayscale image into a line art image.


To change the threshold of an image


About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Threshold Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you make changes to the threshold of individual color channels or to all channels by using the Master channel.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Threshold command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Lets you change the Threshold density.


Lets you change the Threshold density by sliding left or right.


To change the threshold of an image

1	On the Map menu, click Threshold.

2	In the Channel box, select the channel you want to modify.

3	Move the Threshold slider to change the threshold density.

4	Click Preview to review your changes.

5	Repeat steps 2 through 4 as necessary, adjusting levels for each channel until you have a satisfactory image.

6	Click OK.

Note

Even though the image may change interactively (with a 256-color Windows display driver) and may provide feedback as posterization and threshold are modified, only Preview shows the full effect of all changes.

If the changes are not acceptable at this point, you can click the Undo command on the Edit menu to revert to the previously applied changes. To make the changes a part of the working image, either click the Manual Apply command on the Edit menu (if in manual apply mode) or resume editing to automatically apply them (in auto apply mode).


About the Threshold command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Hue Shift

The Hue Shift command lets you shift all hues in an image based on the Hue, Saturation, and Lightness (HSL) color model. Remember that hue is specified by a numeric value ranging between 0 to 359 degrees. These values represent a hue location on an HSL color wheel. When you shift the hues in an image using the Hue Shift command, all hues are shifted by the same amount effectively changing all colors in the image. The Hue Shift command also lets you adjust the saturation and lightness of an image.

Note

The Hue Shift and Hue Map commands are similar in that they shift colors; however, the Hue Shift command shifts all hues in an image while the Hue Map command shifts only selected colors in an image.


To shift the hues in an image


About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction

HSL color model


Hue Shift Dialog Box

The Hue Shift dialog box lets you adjust hue shift, saturation, and lightness.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Hue Shift command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction

HSL color model


Lets you pick a "starting" point from the image.


Lets you shift the hue in the image.


 Lets you shift the hue by sliding the control. The unshifted hue and its value are shown below the slider. The shifted hue and its value are shown above the slider.

Note

To shift the hue one degree at a time, click on the slider and then press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move the slider.


Lets you shift all hues in the image to a single color.


Lets you add or subtract gray in all hues.


Lets you add or subtract gray in all hues by sliding the control.


Lets you increase or decrease lightness in all hues and saturations.


Lets you increase or decrease lightness by sliding the control.


To shift the hues in an image

1	On the Map menu, click Hue Shift.

2	Click the Hue Shift Probe button and move the pointer to the image.

3	Click the pointer on the image. The color under the pointer is copied to the Hue Shift area.

4	Move the Hue Shift slider until the levels are satisfactory.

5	Move the Saturation Shift slider to add or subtract gray in all hues.

6	Move the Lightness Shift slider to increase or decrease lightness.

7	Click Preview to review your changes.

8	Click OK.

Note

Even though the image may change interactively (with a 256-color Windows display driver) and may provide feedback as hue shift, saturation shift, and lightness shift are modified, only Preview shows the full effect of all changes.

If the changes are not acceptable at this point, you can click the Undo command on the Edit menu to revert to the previously applied changes. To make the changes a part of the working image, either click the Manual Apply command on the Edit menu (if in manual apply mode) or resume editing to automatically apply them (in auto apply mode).


About the Hue Shift command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction

HSL color model


Hue Map

The Hue Map command lets you shift selected ranges of hues in an image using the Hue, Saturation, and Lightness (HSL) color model.

For changing hues, Picture Publisher divides the HSL color wheel into 12 ranges. Each range represents 30 of the 360 hues. You shift a range by moving a hue shift slider. Hue shift is useful if you want to change a single color in an image to another color as shown below.

The Hue Map command also lets you adjust the saturation and lightness of an image. When you change the saturation, you increase or decrease the purity of a hue. This lets you "enrich" the colors or reduce the colors in an image.

Light defines the amount of white or black mixed with a color.

Note

The Hue Shift and Hue Map commands are similar in that they shift colors; however, the Hue Shift command shifts all hues in an image while the Hue Map command shifts only selected colors in an image.


To shift a range of hues in an image


About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction

HSL color model


Hue Map Dialog Box

The Hue Map dialog box lets you adjust hues, saturation shift, and lightness shift.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Hue Map command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction

HSL color model


Lets you shift the hue by sliding the control. The unshifted hue and its value are shown below the slider. The shifted hue and its value are shown above the slider.

Note

To shift the hue one degree at a time, click on the slider and then press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move the slider.


Lets you shift the hue by sliding the control. The unshifted hue and its value are shown below the slider. The shifted hue and its value are shown above the slider.

Note

To shift the hue one degree at a time, click on the slider and then press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move the slider.


Lets you shift the hue by sliding the control. The unshifted hue and its value are shown below the slider. The shifted hue and its value are shown above the slider.

Note

To shift the hue one degree at a time, click on the slider and then press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move the slider.


Lets you shift the hue by sliding the control. The unshifted hue and its value are shown below the slider. The shifted hue and its value are shown above the slider.

Note

To shift the hue one degree at a time, click on the slider and then press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move the slider.


Lets you shift the hue by sliding the control. The unshifted hue and its value are shown below the slider. The shifted hue and its value are shown above the slider.

Note

To shift the hue one degree at a time, click on the slider and then press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move the slider.


Lets you shift the hue by sliding the control. The unshifted hue and its value are shown below the slider. The shifted hue and its value are shown above the slider.

Note

To shift the hue one degree at a time, click on the slider and then press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move the slider.


Lets you shift the hue by sliding the control. The unshifted hue and its value are shown below the slider. The shifted hue and its value are shown above the slider.

Note

To shift the hue one degree at a time, click on the slider and then press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move the slider.


Lets you shift the hue by sliding the control. The unshifted hue and its value are shown below the slider. The shifted hue and its value are shown above the slider.

Note

To shift the hue one degree at a time, click on the slider and then press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move the slider.


Lets you shift the hue by sliding the control. The unshifted hue and its value are shown below the slider. The shifted hue and its value are shown above the slider.

Note

To shift the hue one degree at a time, click on the slider and then press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move the slider.


Lets you shift the hue by sliding the control. The unshifted hue and its value are shown below the slider. The shifted hue and its value are shown above the slider.

Note

To shift the hue one degree at a time, click on the slider and then press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key to move the slider.


To shift a range of hues in an image

1	On the Map menu, click Hue Map. The Hue Map dialog box opens, showing a row of 12 vertical sliders for hue adjustment. On the top and bottom of the sliders are two color swatches. The lower swatch is the input (old) hue, and the upper swatch is the output (new) hue.

2	Move the 12 Hue Map sliders until the color swatches are changed to the hues you want.

Note

Beneath the hue controls is a separate slider control for saturation shift. Drag the slider to the right to increase color saturation. The colors appear purer. Drag the slider to the left to decrease saturation. As the slider moves to the left, the color purity decreases toward gray, and becomes black and white at the far left. The same result is achieved by entering saturation correction values directly in the box.

3	Move the Saturation Shift slider to change saturation.

4	Move the Lightness Shift slider to change lightness.

5	Click Preview to review your changes.

6	Click OK.

Note

Even though the image may change interactively (with a 256-color Windows display driver) and may provide feedback as hue and saturation are modified, only Preview shows the full effect of all changes.

If the changes are not acceptable at this point, you can click the Undo command on the Edit menu to revert to the previously applied changes. To make the changes a part of the working image, either click the Manual Apply command on the Edit menu (if in manual apply mode) or resume editing to automatically apply them (in auto apply mode).


About the Hue Map command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction

HSL color model


Histogram

The Histogram command displays a histogram of the current image. The histogram shows the distribution of the shadows, midtones and highlights for the Master channel and the color channels.


To view the histogram of an image


About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Histogram Dialog Box

The Histogram dialog box lists shadows, midtones and highlights information for the current image. You can view the Master channel and each of the color channels.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Histogram command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Displays the percentage of pixels in the image that are in the Shadows range. The value changes as you move the sliders below the histogram.


Displays the percentage of pixels in the image that are in the Midtones range. The value changes as you move the sliders below the histogram.


Displays the percentage of pixels in the image that are in the Highlights range. The value changes as you move the sliders below the histogram.


Displays the total pixels in the image.


Displays the intensity of the area under the probe.


Displays the number of pixels under the probe.


To view the histogram of an image

1	On the Map menu, click Histogram.

2	In the Channel box, select a channel to view, if necessary.


About the Histogram command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Apply Calibration Map

Because of differences and imperfections in scanners and printers, Picture Publisher lets you correct for these problems by applying calibration maps to an image. If you have already calibrated Picture Publisher for a scanner or printer, you will not have to make any adjustments to an image. However, if you have not calibrated Picture Publisher to your scanner or printer, you still can take advantage of Picture Publisher's calibration feature by using the Apply Calibration Map command.

Even if you have calibrated Picture Publisher to your printer, you can use this command on an image that will be pasted into another application, such as a page layout program. Simply apply the calibration map to the image before the image is pasted into the page layout program. Then, when the image is printed, the quality will be as good as if you printed directly from Picture Publisher.


To apply a calibration map to an image


Setup Calibration for Scanning

Setup Calibration for Printing

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Apply Calibration Map Dialog Box

The Apply Calibration Map dialog box lets you choose the scanner on which an image was scanned and the printer you plan to use to output an image.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Setup Calibration for Scanning

Setup Calibration for Printing

About the Apply Calibration Map command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Lets you select the printer calibration map you want to use.


Opens a menu containing commands for file management.


To apply a calibration map to an image

1	Use the entire image or mask the part you want to change.

2	On the Map menu, click Apply Calibration Map.

3	In the Scanner Calibration Map box, select a map name.

4	In the Printer Calibration Map box, select a map name.

5	Click Apply.


Setup Calibration for Scanning

Setup Calibration for Printing

About the Apply Calibration Map command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Edit Palette

Picture Publisher provides the Edit Palette command for editing palette color images. For example, if you have a specific color in the image you want to replace with another (red to green), you can use the Palette Editor dialog box to change the colors.


To replace a color using the Palette Editor dialog box

To replace a palette of a palette color image

To remap an image to a different palette


About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Palette Editor Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you edit, replace, or remap the color palette of an image that has been converted to palette color. Palette color images are images of 256 or fewer colors. To change a color in the palette, double-click the color. The Color Picker dialog box opens to let you pick a color.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Edit Palette command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Shows the current palette.


Replaces the colors in the original color palette on a one-for-one basis. For example, if you replace the original color palette with the Default color palette, the first color in the original color palette is replaced with the first color in the Default color palette (black), the second color in the original color palette is replaced with the second color in the Default color palette (blue), and so on.


Replaces the colors in the original color palette by analyzing the original color palette and matching them, as closely as possible, to the colors in the new color palette. When you choose this option you can select a dither type. Choices are pattern, scattered, and none.


When you choose the Remap Color Palette option, this list box lets you select a dither type for the palette.


Opens the Load Palette dialog box to let you open a new color palette to replace the original color palette.


Opens the Save Palette dialog box to let you save the current palette.


To replace a color using the Palette Editor dialog box

1	Open the image you want to edit.

2	Convert the image to a palette color image, if necessary.

3	On the Map menu, choose Edit Palette. The Palette Editor dialog box opens.

4	Double-click the color you want to change. The Color Picker dialog box opens.

5	Select the color you want to replace the other color.

6	Click Ok. The Color Picker dialog box closes.

7	Click Ok. The Palette Editor dialog box closes.


To replace a palette of a palette color image

1	Open the image you want to edit.

2	Convert the image to a palette color image, if necessary.

3	On the Map menu, choose Edit Palette. The Palette Editor dialog box opens.

4	Click Replace Color Palette.

5	Click Load. The Load Palette dialog box opens.

6	In the Select Palette Name box, select the palette you want.

7	Click Load.

8	Click Ok.


To remap an image to a different palette

1	Open the image you want to edit.

2	Convert the image to a palette color image, if necessary.

3	On the Map menu, choose Edit Palette. The Palette Editor dialog box opens.

4	Click Remap Color Palette.

5	Click Load. The Load Palette dialog box opens.

6	In the Select Palette Name box, select the palette you want.

7	Click Load.

8	In the Dither box, select a dither option.

9	Click Ok.


About the Edit Palette command

About the Map Menu commands

Understanding color correction


Command Menus

File Menu	Contains commands that let you create, open, save, close, and print files. Additional commands let you add digital images using a scanner or video grabber; change the setup of your printer, scanner, or video grabber; send a file as e-mail; and close Picture Publisher.
Edit Menu	Contains commands that undo operations and transfer images to and from the Clipboard.
View Menu	Contains commands that let you show or hide toolbars, rulers, and image information. The menu also contains commands that let you view the image at 1:1, fit it to the window size, or view the entire image in full screen mode.
Tools Menu	Contains commands that let you set up the operating environment of Picture Publisher, including recording and playing macros, setting up options, saving positions, and customizing your menus and accelerator keys.
Mask Menu	Contains commands that work with the Mask tools to remove, load, and save masks. The menu also contains commands that let you manage the mask.
Map Menu	Contains commands that let you adjust the colors and intensities in an image. They include adjustments to contrast, brightness, color and tone balance, hue, and special effects, such as posterizing and thresholding. You can also adjust your monitor and compensate for scanning and printing imperfections, and edit the color palette.
Object Menu	Contains commands for aligning, positioning, and arranging objects; ordering objects; feathering objects; merging masks with objects; creating objects from masks; anchoring objects to the base image; deleting objects; selecting and deselecting objects; and hiding the marquee (mask border).
Image Menu	Contains commands that let you resize, rotate, flip, invert (positive and negative), and filter an image or portions of an image defined by a mask. You can also stitch two images together using the Stitch command.


Objects, menu
Object Menu

The Object menu contains commands for selecting and deselecting objects; aligning, locking, and ordering objects; feathering objects; merging masks with objects; creating and deleting objects; and combining objects with each other or with the base image.

Align	Lets you align objects.
Position	Lets you position objects in an image.
Arrange	Lets you group, ungroup, lock, and unlock objects.
Order	Lets you move an object up or down one level on the layers, or move an object to the front or back of all other objects.
Rotate	Rotates the object.
Crop	Lets you crop the selected object.
Drop Shadow	Lets you create a drop shadow on an object.
Combine	Combines selected objects with each other or with the base image.
Feather Object	Lets you feather (anti-alias) the edges of the object.
Merge Mask	Combines the active mask with the object's mask channel.
Create Object From Mask	Lets you change a masked area into an object.
Delete Objects	Deletes the currently selected objects.
Edit Object Alpha	Lets you work directly on the alpha channel and edit the object directly.
Hide Marquee	Hides the object marquee.


What is an object?


What is an Object?

An object is an image that floats on the base image. For example, think of a base image as a pool and an object as a raft that floats on the pool. Usually an object is an image copied from another image file in Picture Publisher or from another Windows program. An object can also be text that you type on the base image. An object is outlined using black and cyan marquee marks (similar to those used to define masks).

Objects can be manipulated using commands from the Object menu and using the Object Manager. Also, any Picture Publisher command that can be used to edit the base image can be used to edit an object, including drawing masks, retouching, and applying special effects. Objects can be selected, grouped, copied, pasted, moved, layered, cropped, and deleted from atop the base image. When you are satisfied with the results of your editing, you can combine the floating objects with each other or with the base image.

You can save files containing objects in two ways:

using the PPF file format (maintains objects and their properties in the file)

using other file formats (floating objects are not maintained; they are combined with the base image when saved)


Creating objects

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window

The benefits of saving a file in the PPF format


Creating Objects

Objects can be created in four ways:

by pasting onto an existing base image

by transforming a copy or moving a masked section on an existing base image

by using the Create Object from Mask command

by typing text onto an existing base image


To create an object by pasting onto the base image

To create an object by transforming a masked area

To create an object by moving a masked area

To create an object from a mask

To create an object by typing text


Creating an object by pasting

Creating an object by transforming or moving a masked area

About the Create Object from Mask command

Creating an object by typing text

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Creating an Object by Pasting

You can create an object in Picture Publisher by pasting a copy of an image from the Windows Clipboard or the ClipboardBrowser. The image can be copied or cut from your current image, from a different Picture Publisher image, or from any one of several other Windows applications with a compatible graphics format.

When you create an object by pasting, Picture Publisher places a transform box around the newly created object, letting you use any of the functions of the Mask Transform ribbon.

Double-clicking an object with a transform box around it or pressing Enter releases the object from the Transform tool and draws a black and cyan marquee around the object. This marquee defines the outer edges of the object.


To create an object by pasting onto the base image


Creating an object by transforming or moving a masked area

Creating an object by typing text

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To create an object by pasting onto the base image

1	Copy the image to be pasted into the Windows Clipboard.

2	Press Alt+Tab to switch to Picture Publisher, if necessary. Ensure the base image is the active image file.

3	On the Edit menu, choose Paste. The image is copied onto the base image. A transform box appears around the newly created object.

4	Perform any transform operations you want.

5	Double-click the transform box or press Enter when you are done transforming the image. A black and cyan marquee defines the outer edges of the object.


Creating an object by pasting

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Creating an Object by Transforming or Moving a Masked Area

You can create an object on a base image by masking an area of the image and either transforming or moving the masked area. You can also use the Create Object from Mask command on the Object menu to create an object from a masked area.

When you create an object by transforming or moving a masked area, Picture Publisher places a transform box around the newly created object, letting you use any of the options of the Mask Transform ribbon.

Double-clicking the object or pressing Enter releases the object from the Transform tool and draws a black and cyan marquee around the object. The marquee defines the outer edges of the object.


To create an object by transforming a masked area

To create an object by moving a masked area


Creating an object by pasting

Creating an object by typing text

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To create an object by transforming a masked area

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the masking tool you want.

3	Use the Mask tool to mask the area to be transformed.

4	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

5	Click the Mask Transform tool.

6	In the Modify box in the ribbon, select Copy Image.

7	Click the masked area to display the transform box for the masked area.

8	Perform any transform operations you want.

9	Double-click the transform box or press Enter when you are done. A black and cyan marquee marks the object.


Creating an object by transforming or moving a masked area

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To create an object by moving a masked area

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the masking tool you want.

3	Use the Mask tool to mask the area to be transformed.

4	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

5	Click the Mask Transform tool.

6	In the Modify box in the ribbon, select Move Image.

7	Click the masked area to change the mask into a transform box.

8	Point to the transform box, press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the masked area to a new location. The area previously occupied by the masked area turns white and is marked by a black and white marquee.

9	Double-click the transform box or press Enter when you are done. A black and cyan marquee marks the object.


Creating an object by transforming or moving a masked area

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Creating an Object by Typing Text

You can create an object on the base image by using the Text tool and typing text directly on the base image.

Double-clicking the newly typed text changes the text into an object bound by a black and cyan marquee.

Note

You cannot create an object in Picture Publisher by pasting text from the Windows Clipboard. Text objects can be created only by typing.


To create an object by typing text


Creating an object by pasting

Creating an object by transforming or moving a masked area

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window

About the Text tool


To create an object by typing text

1	Click the Text tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Choose the text style and size you want in the ribbon, if necessary.

3	Click the image where you want to begin typing. A text cursor appears.

4	Type the text you want.

5	Double-click the image to change the text to an object.


Creating an object by typing text

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window

About the Text tool


Align

Picture Publisher lets you easily align objects on a base image. You can align objects by left, right, middle, center, top, or bottom. You can position the aligned objects on the left of the base image, on its right, in the middle, centered on the base image, at the top of the base image, or at the bottom of the base image.


What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To align two or more floating objects


Object Alignment Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you set up the alignment you want. It also lets you preview the alignment before it is applied to the image. You can choose from three alignment types: Object To Image, Object To Object, or Object To Mask.

Object To Image lets you align an object or objects to the image. For example, you can use this alignment type to align an object to the exact center of an image.

Object To Object lets you align two or more objects to each other. For example, you can use this alignment type to align two or more objects in a straight line.

Object To Mask lets you align an object to a mask. For example, you can use this alignment type to align an object in the center of a mask.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Align command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Lets you choose the type of alignment to do.


Lets you align the selected objects to the left.


Lets you align the selected objects in the center horizontally.


Lets you align the selected objects to the right.


Lets you space the selected objects horizontally with equal space between each object.


Lets you align the selected objects to the top.


Lets you align the selected objects in the center vertically.


Lets you align the selected objects to the bottom.


Lets you space the selected objects vertically with equal space between each object.


Shows a representation of the alignment results based on your button choices.


Shows a representation of the alignment results based on your button choices.


Shows a representation of the alignment results based on your button choices.


Shows a representation of the alignment results based on your button choices.


To align two or more floating objects objects
To align two or more floating objects

1	On the View menu, click Object Manager, if necessary.

2	Click the objects to be aligned.

3	On the Object menu, click Align. The Object Alignment dialog box opens.

4	In the Alignment Type box, select an alignment type.

5	Click an alignment button.

6	Click Preview to see the changes.

7	Click OK.


About the Align command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Position

You can change the position of an object precisely with the Position command on the Object menu. You may want to move an object to an exact coordinate on an image, and you can do this by specifying the X and Y position of the upper left corner of the object in the Object Position dialog box.

Tip

If precision in positioning an object is not required, you can simply drag the object to the position you want.


To change the position of an object


What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Object Position Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you precisely specify the positioning of a selected object or group of objects.

Tip

If precision in positioning an object is not required, you can simply drag the object to the position you want.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Position command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Lets you specify an X position (horizontal) for the selected object. The starting location for the X position (a value of 0) is the left side of the image.


Lets you specify an Y position (vertical) for the selected object. The starting location for the Y position (a value of 0) is the top of the image.


To change the position of an object
To position objects precisely

Tip

If precision in positioning an object is not required, you can simply drag the object to the position you want.

1	On the View menu, click Object Manager, if necessary.

2	Click the object or group of objects to reposition.

3	On the Object menu, click Position. The Object Position dialog box opens.

4	In the Units box, select the coordinate system (inches, millimeters, picas, centimeters, or pixels).

5	In the X Position and Y Position boxes, enter the coordinates.

6	Click OK.


About the Position command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Arrange

The Arrange command lets you group, ungroup, lock, and unlock objects.

Tip

The Object Manager window provides the same commands for manipulation of objects.


Group command

Ungroup command

Lock command

Unlock command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To group two or more objects

To ungroup a grouped object

To lock an object

To unlock an object


Group

The Group command lets you group two or more objects. After the objects are grouped, Picture Publisher considers the objects to be one object. Use the Ungroup command to ungroup the grouped objects.

Tip

The Object Manager window also provides a grouping function for objects.


About the Ungroup command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To group two or more objects

To ungroup a grouped object


To group two or more objects

1	Select the objects you want to group.

2	On the Object menu, point to Arrange, and click Group.


To ungroup a grouped object

About the Group command

About the Ungroup command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Ungroup

The Ungroup command lets you ungroup objects that have been grouped together with the Group command.

Tip

The Object Manager window also provides an ungrouping function for objects.


About the Group command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To ungroup a grouped object

To group two or more objects


To ungroup a grouped object

1	Select a grouped object.

2	On the Object menu, point to Arrange, and click Ungroup.


To group two or more objects

About the Ungroup command

About the Group command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Lock

By choosing the Lock command in the Arrange submenu on the Object menu, you can lock objects on a base image. Locking an object means you cannot move or otherwise manipulate the object. To move or manipulate the object after it has been locked, unlock it.

Tip

The Object Manager window also provides a locking function for objects.


About the Unlock command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To lock an object

To unlock an object


To lock an object

1	Select an object or group of objects to lock.

2	On the Object menu, point to Arrange, and click Lock.


To unlock an object

About the Lock command

About the Unlock command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Unlock

This command lets you unlock objects on a base image. Unlocking an object means you can move or otherwise manipulate the object.

Tip

The Object Manager window also provides an unlocking function for objects.


About the Lock command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To unlock an object

To lock an object


To unlock an object

1	Select a locked object.

2	On the Object menu, point to Arrange, and click Unlock.


To lock an object

About the Unlock command

About the Lock command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Order

Picture Publisher lets you change the order of objects so overlapping objects can be properly layered to create the image you want.

Tip

The Object Manager window also provides ordering functions for objects.


Bring Forward

Send Backward

Bring To Front

Send To Back

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To change the order of objects


Bring Forward

The Bring Forward command moves a selected object forward one level (layer).

Tip

The Object Manager window also provides a Bring Forward function for objects.


About the Send Backward command

About the Bring To Front command

About the Send To Back command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To change the order of objects


Send Backward

The Send Backward command moves a selected object back one level (layer).

Tip

The Object Manager window also provides a Send Backward function for objects.


About the Bring Forward command

About the Bring To Front command

About the Send To Back command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To change the order of objects


Bring To Front

The Bring To Front command moves a selected object to the front of all other objects.

Tip

The Object Manager window also provides a Bring To Front function for objects.


About the Bring Forward command

About the Send Backward command

About the Send To Back command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To change the order of objects


Send To Back

The Send To Back command moves a selected object to the back of all other objects. It does not, however, move it behind the base or original image.

Tip

The Object Manager window also provides a Send To Back function for objects.


About the Bring Forward command

About the Send Backward command

About the Bring To Front command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To change the order of objects


To change the order of objects

1	Select the object you want to affect.

2	On the Object menu, point to Order, and click the Order command you want.


About the Bring Forward command

About the Send Backward command

About the Bring To Front command

About the Send To Back command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Rotate

Occasionally you have an object you want to rotate or turn upside down (flip). Picture Publisher lets you easily rotate an object. You can rotate the object clockwise or counterclockwise by 90 degrees or you can rotate it by 180 degrees. You also can rotate an object by an arbitrary amount and direction.


What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To rotate an object


To rotate an object

1	On the Object menu, point to Rotate, and click a Rotate command.

Note

If you click the Arbitrary Angle command, the Rotate Object dialog box opens. Continue with steps 3 and 4.

2	In the Angle box, type the number of degrees of rotation.

3	Click either the Clockwise or Counterclockwise button.

4	Click Use Weighted Averaging if you want Picture Publisher to calculate the pixels from neighboring pixels to eliminate jagged edges (aliasing).

5	Click Rotate.


About the Rotate command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Rotate Object Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify an angle and direction in which to rotate your object. You can click the Use Weighted Averaging option to create a high-quality rotation.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Crop

The Crop tool lets you reduce the size of an object and remove unwanted areas of the object by selecting a rectangular portion of the object that you want to keep and discarding the portion of the object outside the rectangle.

Tip

The Object Manager window also provides a Crop function for objects.


What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To crop an object


To crop an object

1	On the Object menu, click Crop.

2	In the Method list box in the ribbon, select a cropping method.

If you choose Constrain Aspect, type values for the Width and Height.

If you choose Constrain Size, type values for the Width and Height and select a unit of measure, if necessary.

3	Click where you want to start the cropping rectangle. Press the left mouse button to move the rectangle while you are drawing it.

In Freeform and Constrain Aspect, you drag a rectangle; in Constrain Size, you position a box.

4	When the rectangle is the size and location you want, release the left mouse button to crop the object.


About the Crop command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Drop Shadow

This command creates a drop shadow from any floating object or masked area. After creating the drop shadow, Picture Publisher groups the object and shadow.

Tip

You can also access the Drop Shadow wizard from the Wizard Browser on the Tools menu.


What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To create a drop shadow


To create a drop shadow

1	Select the object, or mask off an area, to which you want to apply a drop shadow.

2	On the Object menu, click Drop Shadow. The Drop Shadow dialog box opens.

3	Point to the blue box.

4	Press and hold the left mouse button and move the drop shadow to your liking.

5	Set the drop shadow's Transparency and Feathering.

6	Click the Color button to set the color of the drop shadow.

7	Click Finish.

Or

2	Set the drop shadow's Transparency and Feathering.

3	Position the drop shadow by typing a pixel amount in the X and Y Offset boxes.

4	Click the Color button to set the color of the drop shadow.

Note

Select the Halo Effect option to create a "halo" drop shadow. A halo creates a drop shadow using the same pixel amount on both the X and Y axes. You can change the size of the halo by typing a number in the percentage box or clicking the arrows to change the percentage.


About the Drop Shadow command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Combine

The Combine command lets you permanently combine objects with each other or with the base image.


Objects Together

All Objects With Base

Selected Objects With Base

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To combine objects together

To combine all objects with the base image

To combine selected objects with the base image


Objects Together

The Objects Together command combines all selected objects with each other, but not with the base image. You can select, move, and manipulate the combined objects together on top of the base image.

You can undo a combined object immediately after a combine with the Undo command, or use the Command List Manager to undo a combine.


To combine objects together

To combine all objects with the base image

To combine selected objects with the base image


About the Combine All Objects With Base command

About the Combine Selected Objects With Base command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To combine selected objects
To combine selected objects together

1	Select two or more objects.

2	On the Object menu, point to Combine, and click Objects Together.


To combine all objects with the base image

To combine selected objects with the base image

About the Combine Objects Together command

About the Combine All Objects With Base command

About the Combine Selected Objects With Base command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


All Objects With Base

The All Objects with Base command combines all objects on the image with the base image. When floating objects are combined with the base image, the objects become a permanent part of the image and lose their status as separate objects. You can no longer select, move, or manipulate objects combined with a base image.

You can undo a combined object immediately after a combine with the Undo command, or use the Command List Manager to undo a combine.


To combine all objects with the base image

To combine selected objects with the base image

To combine objects together


About the Combine Objects Together command

About the Combine Selected Objects With Base command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To combine all objects with the base image

On the Object menu, point to Combine, and click All Objects With Base.


To combine selected objects with the base image

To combine objects together

About the Combine All Objects With Base command

About the Combine Objects Together command

About the Combine Selected Objects With Base command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Selected Objects With Base

The Selected Objects with Base command combines only selected objects with the base image. When floating objects are combined with the base image, the objects become a permanent part of the image and lose their status as separate objects. You can no longer select, move, or manipulate objects combined with a base image.

You can undo a combined object immediately after a combine with the Undo command, or use the Command List Manager to undo a combine.


To combine selected objects with the base image

To combine all objects with the base

To combine objects together


About the Combine All Objects With Base command

About the Combine Objects Together command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To combine selected objects with the base image

1	Select one or more objects to combine with the base.

2	On the Object menu, point to Combine, and click Selected Objects With Base.


To combine all objects with the base image

To combine objects together

About the Combine Selected Objects With Base command

About the Combine All Objects With Base command

About the Combine Objects Together command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Feather Object

Objects often present sharp edges that easily identify them as added objects in an image. Picture Publisher lets you feather the edges of floating objects so they blend smoothly into the surrounding base image. You can choose the number of pixels to be used so you control the amount of feathering. You also control whether the edge should be hard, normal, or soft.


To feather an object


What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Feather Object Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you set up the smoothing of the edge transition between an object and the surrounding image.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Feather Object command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Lets you enter the number of pixels for the feathering to extend from the border.


Displays the options for selecting how sharply the feathering drops off: hard, normal, or soft.


To feather an object

1	Select the object to feather.

2	On the Object menu, click Feather Object.

3	In the Amount box, type the number of pixels to feather.

4	In the Edge box, select an edge type.

5	Click Feather.


About the Feather Object command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Merge Mask

The Merge Mask command on the Object menu is a powerful feature that makes a merged object take on the characteristics of the mask. For example, if a gradient is on the mask channel and you merge an object with the mask, the object will gradually blend, as does the gradient.

After you merge an object with a mask, you can still select, move, and manipulate the merged object, which retains the properties of the mask.


What is an object?

About the Mask Channel

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To merge objects with a mask


To merge objects with a mask

1	Create a mask using one of the mask tools in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Selector tool in the Main toolbar.

3	Click the object you want to merge with the mask. If you want to merge more than one object, click one object, press and hold Shift, and click additional objects.

4	On the Object menu, click Merge Mask.

Note

Using this command removes the portion of any selected object not inside the border of a mask.


About the Merge mask command

What is an object?

About the Mask Channel

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Create Object From Mask

The Create Object From Mask command creates an object of the area inside a mask. If more than one mask exists, a single object is created from the masked areas.


Creating objects

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To create an object from a mask


To create an object from a mask

1	Create a mask using one of the mask tools in the toolbar.

2	On the Object menu, click Create Object from Mask.

Note

The original masked area remains under the object.


About the Create Object from Mask command

Creating objects

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Delete Objects

You can delete objects floating on the base image. If the object was created by transforming a masked area while in move image mode, the deletion leaves a white area on the base image.

Tip

The Object Manager window also provides a Delete Object function.


About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To delete objects


To delete objects

1	Click the Selector tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the object you want to delete. If you want to delete more than one object, click one object, press and hold Shift, and click additional objects.

3	On the Object menu, click Delete Objects.

4	Click Yes to delete the selection.


About the Delete Objects command

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Edit Object Alpha

The alpha channel contains a grayscale image of any object on the base image. You can work directly on the alpha channel and edit the object directly.

With the alpha channel displayed, you can use any of the toolbar tools, plus most of the commands on the menus to create and manipulate an object.

Whatever you draw or place into the alpha channel will become a mask on the object. For example, if you were to fill the alpha channel with a brick texture, the brick texture will be a brick texture cutout on the object.

Tip

The Object Manager window also provides an edit alpha channel function for objects.


What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To edit an object's alpha channel


To edit an object's alpha channel

Note

In this example, you select an object and edit its alpha channel to include a gradient subtractive mask. This makes the object transparent.

1	Click an object to select it.

2	On the Object menu, click Edit Object Alpha.

3	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

4	Click the Shape Mask tool.

5	In the Shape box in the ribbon, select circular as the shape of the mask.

6	Draw a circular mask on the object.

7	Click the Fill tool in the Main toolbar.

8	Click the Gradient Fill tool.

8	In the Gradient Type box in the ribbon, select Radial.

9	Move the mouse pointer over the center of the object mask and then drag from the center to the outside edge.

10	On the Object menu, click Edit Object Alpha to deselect this command.


About the Edit Object Alpha command

What is an object?

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Hide/Show Marquee

Picture Publisher lets you hide the marquees for objects floating on a base image. The border, called the marquee, consists of a black and cyan animated line (on color images), or a red and green animated line (on grayscale images) denoting the edges of the object. If the marquee is blocking a detailed area of the image, you may want to hide it so you can better view any changes you make to the object.

Hiding a marquee does not change any property or characteristic of the object. A hidden marquee can easily be shown on the base image again.


About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


To hide or show an object's marquee


To hide or show an object's marquee

On the Object menu, click Hide Marquee or Show Marquee.


About the Show Marquee command

About the Object menu commands

About the Object Manager window


Image Menu

The Image menu contains commands that let you resize, rotate, flip, invert (positive and negative), stitch two images, and create special effects on an image or portions of an image defined by a mask.

Size	Lets you redefine the size of an image without deleting (cropping) any portion of it.
Expand	Redefines the boundaries of an image without changing the original image.
Rotate	Rotates an entire image.
Flip	Flips an image horizontally, vertically, or diagonally.
Channels	Lets you view and modify the individual color components of a color image, and recombine previously split images.
Convert To	Lets you change the image type of any image.
Invert	Reverses the colors of an image or portions of an image (defined by a mask).
Stitch	Lets you stitch two images together.
Effects	Lets you modify images with special effects that change images in many different ways.
Wizards	Lets you choose one of Picture Publisher's 13 wizards.
Macros	Lets you choose one of Picture Publishers 15 pre-defined macros.


Size

Picture Publisher lets you use the Size command to resize and scale an image to suit your needs without deleting any portion of the image. You can increase or decrease the size of a file by specifying the height, width, or the percentage you want to change the image. You also can adjust the image's resolution to suit the requirements of a specific output device.

Picture Publisher, by default, maintains the aspect ratio for an image. As you change either the width or the height, the size of the other changes proportionally to prevent distortions to the aspect ratio.

The Use SmartSizing option specifies that Picture Publisher is to maintain the detail of an image when you change the size or resolution of the image. SmartSizing requires more image processing time, and may blur the image slightly.

The image on the left was sized without SmartSizing; the image on the right was sized with SmartSizing.

Note

The Size command can change the resolution and size of an image, providing better control over file size. For best results, file size should match the output capability of the imaging device. Excess data can result in an oversized file, with some data simply being thrown away if a printer cannot use this data.


To resize and scale an image


About the Image Menu commands


Size Image Dialog Box

This dialog box displays the image file specifications at 100% magnification. This is the actual size of the image as it was loaded into Picture Publisher. It also lets you adjust the width and height of the image.

You can use the SmartSizing option to maintain most of the detail of an image when you change the size or resolution. When the size or resolution decreases, pixels are discarded. Most other programs discard or replicate pixels, regardless of color value. With SmartSizing, each pixel that remains is newly generated from the color values of the discarded neighboring pixels. Each of the pixels in the original image contributes to the pixels in the new image.

When image size or resolution increases, new pixels are created by sampling the neighboring pixel values. Although it takes a little longer for Picture Publisher to process the changes, SmartSizing helps the image to retain the best possible quality after resizing.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Size command

About the Image Menu commands


Displays the new values for width as a percentage of the original. WScale can be changed by typing a new percentage in the data box.

Note

If the Allow Size Distortions option is selected, the width scaling and height scaling options are independent of one another. If it is not selected, changing the WScale automatically changes the HScale proportionally to maintain the original aspect ratio of the image.


Displays the new values for height as a percentage of the original. HScale can be changed by typing a new percentage in the data box.

Note

If the Allow Size Distortions option is selected, the width scaling and height scaling options are independent of one another. If it is not selected, changing the HScale automatically changes the WScale proportionally to maintain the original aspect ratio of the image.


You can use the SmartSizing option to maintain most of the detail of an image when you change the size or resolution. When the size or resolution decreases, pixels are discarded. Most other programs discard or replicate pixels, regardless of color value. With SmartSizing, each pixel that remains is newly generated from the color values of the discarded neighboring pixels. Each of the pixels in the original image contributes to the pixels in the new image.

When image size or resolution increases, new pixels are created by sampling the neighboring pixel values. Although it takes a little longer for Picture Publisher to process the changes, SmartSizing helps the image to retain the best possible quality after resizing.


Lets you change the image dimensions or resolution but keep the file size the same. You also can use this option to decrease the size of an image and increase the resolution at the same time. When this option is active, the image size remains constant, while changing one of the width, height, or resolution options changes all of the others. Choosing this option disables the Allow Size Distortion option.


To resize and scale an image

1	On the Image menu, click Size.

2	Change the options to match the size and resolution you want.

3	Click Size.

Note

Click the Undo command on the Edit menu to reverse the changes after clicking Size in the Size Image dialog box.


About the Size command

About the Image Menu commands


Expand

Picture Publisher lets you create an expanded copy of an image without changing the original image. For example, if you want to draw a black border around an image, you select a black background color, then expand the image area. Thus, you have expanded the image area without expanding the image.

You can expand all sides, or you can expand one or more sides as you want.


To expand the boundaries of an image


About the Image Menu commands


Expand Image Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify new boundaries and margins for your image without expanding the image.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Expand command

About the Image Menu commands


Lets you enter the margin to place to the left of the original image.

Note

The combined values of the Left and Right areas, when added to the width of the original image, equals the width of the new image.


Lets you enter the margin to place to the right of the original image.

Note

The combined values of the Left and Right areas, when added to the width of the original image, equals the width of the new image.


Lets you enter the margin to place at the top of the original image.

Note

The combined values of the Top and Bottom areas, when added to the height of the original image, equals the height of the new image.


Lets you enter the margin to place at the bottom of the original image.

Note

The combined values of the Top and Bottom areas, when added to the height of the original image, equals the height of the new image.


Lets you enter the margin to place to the left of the original image.

Note

The combined values of the Left and Right areas, when added to the width of the original image, equals the width of the new image.


Lets you enter the margin to place to the right of the original image.

Note

The combined values of the Left and Right areas, when added to the width of the original image, equals the width of the new image.


Lets you enter the margin to place at the top of the original image.

Note

The combined values of the Top and Bottom areas, when added to the height of the original image, equals the height of the new image.


Lets you enter the margin to place at the bottom of the original image.

Note

The combined values of the Top and Bottom areas, when added to the height of the original image, equals the height of the new image.


Lets you choose a color for the new boundaries of the image. Double-clicking the Color area box opens the Color Picker dialog box to let you specify a color.


To expand the boundaries of an image

1	On the Image menu, click Expand.

2	Change the size.

3	If you want to change the boundary color, click the Color button.

4	Select a color from the Color Picker dialog box and click OK.

5	Click Expand to increase the boundaries of the image.


About the Expand command

About the Image Menu commands


Rotate

Occasionally you have an image you want to rotate or turn upside down (flip). Picture Publisher lets you easily rotate an image. You can rotate the image clockwise or counterclockwise by 90 degrees or you can rotate it by 180 degrees. You also can rotate an image by an arbitrary amount and direction.


To rotate an image


About the Image Menu commands


To rotate an image

1	On the Image menu, point to Rotate, and click a Rotate command.

Note

If you click the Arbitrary Angle command, the Rotate Image dialog box opens. Continue with steps 3 and 4.

2	In the Angle box, type the number of degrees of rotation.

3	Click either the Clockwise or Counterclockwise button.

4	Click Use Weighted Averaging if you want Picture Publisher to calculate the pixels from neighboring pixels to eliminate jagged edges (aliasing).

5	Click Rotate.


About the Rotate command

About the Image Menu commands


Rotate Image Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify an angle and direction in which to rotate your image. You can click the Use Weighted Averaging option to create a high-quality rotation.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Rotate command


Lets you enter the number of degrees for rotation.


Lets you rotate the image in the clockwise direction.


Lets you rotate the image in the counterclockwise direction.


Flip

Picture Publisher lets you mirror an image. It lets you flip the image vertically or horizontally, or diagonally (both vertically and horizontally at the same time). This has the same effect as reversing a photographic slide.

If there is a mask on the image, Picture Publisher mirrors the masked area. If there is no mask on the image, Picture Publisher mirrors the image or selected object.


About the Image Menu commands


To flip an image


To flip an image

On the Image menu, point to Flip, and click a Flip command.

Note

Click the Undo command on the Edit menu to reverse a flipping effect.


About the Flip command

About the Image Menu commands


Channels

Picture Publisher lets you split an entire color image into the channels that make up the image. The resulting windows (three or four, depending on the color model used) contain the grayscale images for each channel in the chosen model. Available modes include RGB (Red, Green, Blue), HSL (Hue, Saturation, Lightness), and CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black).

For example, for the RGB model, three grayscale windows are opened: one for red, one for green, and one for blue.

The split and recombine features for color channels are especially useful as a special effects tool. You can edit each channel window independently and, when you are done, combine the channels back into a single image.

You are also able to save these grayscale files as separate image files using the Save and Save As commands on the File menu.

Possible uses of the Channels command:

Apply smart fills to aid in an auto-mask procedure, then click the Save Mask command on the Mask menu.

Apply paint or tooling edits to only one of the three channels to enhance the values in that channel.

Apply filters to one or more of the channels to intensify a color.

Compare color ranges between the color values and identify methods when editing specific areas.

Note

Do not close any channel before recombining. All channels must be present for the recombine process to be successful.


About the Image Menu commands


To split a color image

To recombine a previously split image


To split a color image

On the Image menu, point to Channels, and click a Channel command.

Notes

The Split CMYK command is only available with a CMYK image. The Split RGB and Split HSL commands are only available with an RGB image. Use the Convert To command on the Image menu to convert an image to another image type.

To see individual splits, minimize the top image.


To recombine a split image

About the Channels commands

About the Image Menu commands


To recombine a previously split image

On the Image menu, point to Channels, and click Recombine.


To split a color image

About the Channels commands

About the Image Menu commands


Convert To

Picture Publisher lets you change the type of data used for storing an image and how it appears on screen. You can convert images to line art, scattered line art (resembles dots from a pen), grayscale (up to 256 shades of gray), palette color (up to 256 colors), RGB color, or CMYK color.

These conversion features can be used to change an image to match the requirements of a particular output device, or you can use them to create special effects to enhance an image.

The Convert To command on the Image menu converts the image type of the image on your screen. When you click the Convert To command, a submenu opens and displays the following commands.

Command	Action
Line Art	Creates monochrome art.
Scattered	Dithers your line art image to give the impression of more shades of gray.
Grayscale	Makes an image with up to 256 shades of gray.
Palette Color	Creates a one-channel, 8-bit image. Clicking this command opens the Convert to Palette Color dialog box.
RGB Color	Makes a 24-bit image. This provides the most colors, up to 16 million.
CMYK Color	Converts the image to the primary subtractive colors.
Color Managed	Creates a new image using color management. Clicking this command opens the Color Management Selection dialog box.
Note

If the source image contains more information than the destination image, you cannot convert the destination image back to its original condition unless you click the Undo command on the Edit menu before performing any other operation. For example, if you convert a full-color image to a grayscale image (a color image contains more information than a grayscale image), all of the color information is lost unless you click the Undo command. If you convert a grayscale image to a full-color image, the image will not contain color but is capable of accepting any color available to a full-color image.


To convert an image


About the Image Menu commands


Convert to Palette Color Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify how you want your image to be converted.

Line Art produces a black-and-white, high-contrast conversion of the original image. Scatter also converts the image to line art but uses a dither pattern to reduce the contrast and simulate grayscales.

Grayscale creates a one-channel, 8-bit image. The image can have up to 256 shades of gray depending on the original image. RGB, CMYK, and 256-color images convert to 256 shades of gray using the Grayscale command. Color images with 8 or 16 colors convert to an equal number of grayscales. If you convert a grayscale image to a full-color image (CMYK or RGB), the new image does not automatically contain color but is capable of accepting any color available to a full-color image.

Palette Color creates a one-channel, 8-bit image. Use this command to work with an image you want to use in an application supporting only 8-bit color. When converting to palette color, you can select 8, 16, 256 colors, or a custom number of colors. If you are converting from 24-bit color, you select the type of dithering to use to simulate colors not available on the palette. Dithering creates the illusion of a color by placing dots of other colors very close together. The types of dithering are pattern, scattered, and none. Pattern dithering simulates a multicolor image by dithering the pixels in a repeating checkerboard pattern. Scattered dithering randomly places dots to simulate a color. No dithering uses the available colors in the palette.

RGB Color uses three channels, one for each of the primary additive colors—red, green, and blue.

CMYK Color converts an image to the primary subtractive color--cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. The conversion is based on the currently active print style.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Convert To command

About the Image Menu commands


Lets you choose from 8-color, 16-color, 256-color, or Custom. Greater-color images usually look better; however, the greater-color images require more disk space than fewer-color images. If you choose the Custom image type, you can specify the number of colors in the image by setting a value in the Number of Colors area.


If the image type in the Image Type list box is Custom, you can use this area to specify the number of colors in an image.


Lets you choose from None, Pattern, or Scattered. The None option does not dither the colors. The Pattern option lets you simulate a greater-color image by dithering the pixels in a repeating "checkerboard" pattern. The Scattered option lets you simulate a greater-color image by dithering the pixels in a random fashion. The results you get from the Scattered option are similar to those you get when you print with the ScatterPrint option in the Print dialog box. The best results are usually obtained from the Scattered option.


Lets you choose the Optimized palette, the System palette, or a Custom palette. The System option creates an image with colors equally spaced across the RGB color spectrum. An Optimized palette contains colors based on the predominant colors in the original image, and can help you create better results when editing an image. The Custom option lets you select a previously saved palette from the Palette Name area.


Select a name from the list box.


To convert an image

1	Open the file you want to convert.

2	On the Image menu, point Convert To, and click a Convert To command.

If you click Palette Color, the Convert to Palette Color dialog box opens.

3	Set any available options.

4	Click Convert.


About the Convert To command

About the Image Menu commands


Invert

Picture Publisher lets you invert the colors in an image to their complimentary or opposite colors. You can use this as a special effect to change images. The inverted image resembles a negative of a photograh.

You can invert the entire image, a selected object, or the masked area of an image.


About the Image Menu commands


To invert an image


To invert an image

On the Image menu, click Invert.

Note

To reverse an effect using the Invert command, click Undo on the Edit menu.


About the Invert command


Stitch

The Stitch command offers a simple solution to the problems associated with piecing images together manually. With the Stitch command, you only need to scan different areas of the image so there is overlap in the images, choose two common points on both images, and click the Stitch button in the ribbon. Picture Publisher then creates a new image from the two smaller images.

Before you can use the Stitch command, you must have two open images in Picture Publisher that have an overlapping area. An overlapping area is an area where two images are identical. These images can be previously loaded images or images that you just scanned.

The Stitch command operates by aligning the image-based markers that you place on two images. You begin by placing the images side by side, so you can see the overlapping areas. Then place two points, one on each image, that are identical in the overlapping area. These first two points are indicated by small circular markers. Next, place two more points in the overlapping area. These second points are indicated by small square markers. You now have two images with one circular and one square marker on each image.

When the Stitch command begins working, it first overlays the top (circular) markers of the images. Only one of the images is transformed, and the other image remains unchanged (anchored).

It may be difficult to scan images so they are perfectly straight. This is not a problem with the Stitch command. The Stitch command rotates the transformed image so the bottom (square) markers of the two images are vertically aligned to each other, effectively making the two images perfectly aligned.

Next the Stitch command stretches the transformed image so it is the same size as the other image. Now all markers are aligned to each other. Because these markers are aligned, all other points between them are also aligned.

The Stitch command can compare the brightness of the two images and make changes to the transformed image so it matches the other image. The Stitch command also can blend the adjoining edges of the images.

After the Stitch command performs all these operations, which are done automatically for you, it creates a new image composed of the two images.


To stitch two images together


About the Image Menu commands


Let you move the view of the active image so you can see the round or square markers if the markers have been placed but are not in view. If a marker has not been placed, the respective Locate button is grayed. If a marker is already in view, nothing happens when you click the Locate button.


Lets you place or delete markers on the active image. It contains the filename of the images and circular and square marker buttons. If a circular or square marker button is in, the respective marker has been placed on the image. If it is out, it has not been placed on the image. To place a marker for the first time, you can either click a circular or square marker button or click the left mouse button on the active image. To remove a circular or square marker from the active image, click the circular or square marker button.


Lets Picture Publisher automatically adjust the markers so they align to the exact pixel on both images. The markers initially must be placed within 10 pixels of each other in order for them to align successfully.


Opens the Stitch Options dialog box. Click this button only after you have placed all four markers.


Stitch Options Dialog Box

After you have placed all four markers and you click the Stitch button in the ribbon area, the Stitch Options dialog box opens. This dialog box lets you choose additional options before the stitching operation begins.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Stitch command

About the Image Menu commands


Lets you select the first image to be transformed. The second image becomes the anchor.


Lets you select the second image to be transformed. The first image becomes the anchor.


Lets you blend the edges of the two images once they are stitched together.


Lets you select the amount of blending that occurs when the Blend Seam option is selected by using the slider to select low, medium, or high pressure. The smaller the percentage, the lower the pressure.


Lets you change the brightness of the transformed image so it matches the other image.


Lets you adjust the amount of brightness from -100 to 100 percent by adjusting the slider.


Improves the quality of the image if it is rotated, scaled, or skewed during the transformation. This option makes the resulting image look less jagged.


To stitch two images together

1	Open two images that have an overlapping area.

On the File menu, click Open.

Locate the first file in the ImageBrowser dialog box and double-click the filename.

On the File menu, click Open.

Locate the second file in the ImageBrowser dialog box and double-click the filename.

2	On the Image menu, click Stitch.

3	Click the title bar of the first image to make it active.

4	Move the cursor to an overlapping point located in the upper part of the image.

5	Click the left mouse button.

6	Move the cursor to an overlapping point that is located in the lower part of the image. The circular and square markers for an image should be placed as far apart as possible vertically so the rotation and scaling accuracy is as high as possible.

7	Click the left mouse button.

8	Click the title bar of the second image to make it active.

9	Move the cursor to the point that corresponds to the circular marker in the first image.

10	Click the left mouse button.

11	Move the cursor to the point that corresponds to the square marker in the first image.

12	Click the left mouse button.

13	Click Stitch.

14	Select the options you want in the dialog box.

15	Click Stitch.

Notes

Before you can use the Stitch command, you must open two images that have an overlapping area. You may find it easier to place the markers if the images are side by side; however, they are not required to be.

For the best results, the images that are stitched together should have the same resolution.

Each image must have two markers--a circular marker and a square marker. The circular markers must be on identical points in the overlapping area of the images. The square markers also must be on identical points in the overlapping area of the images. Typically, the square markers are below the circular markers, but they do not have to be.

To accurately locate each overlapping point, you may need to zoom in on an area of the image by using the Zoom tool.

If you did not zoom in on your image to place markers, you can have Picture Publisher adjust the position of the markers by clicking Adjust. You also can move the markers by dragging them after they are placed.


About the Stitch command

About the Image Menu commands


Wizards

Picture Publisher ships with 13 wizards. These wizards automate different imaging processes, from generating contact sheets to creating cool text.

To run a wizard, on the Image menu, point to Wizards, and click the wizard of your choice.


Macros

Picture Publisher ships with 18 pre-defined macros. These macros can enhance the appearance of your image files.

To run a macro, on the Image menu, point to Macros, and click the macros of your choice.


Digimarc

Picture Publisher includes PictureMarc from Digimarc, which allows you to embed and read digital watermarks in your image. These watermarks allow you to embed information which communicates your copyrights and authorship. The watermarks are imperceptible, apparent to the computer, but not to the viewer of an image, providing a persistent identity which travels with the image wherever it goes.

A Digimarc watermark carries a unique Creator Id, and image attributes. A Creator Id is assigned when you subscribe to MarcCentre, Digimarc's on-line service. You provide a complete set of contact details, including your name, phone number, address, e-mail and web addresses, and specialty. This is uniquely associated with your creator id.

A Digimarc watermark is actually a small random pattern added to the luminance component of the pixels in your image. At high magnification, you might notice seemingly random changes in brightness of a pixel. This change is not enough to harm the visual integrity of your image, but carries information which survives normal edits and even printing and scanning.

Digimarc watermarks do not prevent someone from using your images or infringing on your copyright. But they do communicate that you are claiming your copyrights, and provide a mechanism for interested parties to contact you about the image or one like it.

Whenever someone opens or scans a watermarked image into Picture Publisher, it is automatically checked for a watermark. If one is present, a copyright symbol is added to the title bar, communicating to the viewer that someone has embedded information in the image. From there, the viewer can read the watermark, where they discover your creator id. By clicking the Web Lookup button in the read dialog, or calling Digimarc's fax-back service, the viewer has direct access to your contact details.

To find out more about Digimarc and PictureMarc, go to www.digimarc.com.


To embed a watermark

To read a watermark


To embed a watermark

1	On the Image menu, point to Digimarc, and click Embed Watermark.

2	If you have not personalized your copy of PictureMarc, click Personalize. In the Personalize dialog, click the Register button, or call the Digimarc phone number to subscribe to MarcCentre, and get your unique Creator Id. Enter this id, with the personal identification digits, in the Creator Id field, following the instructions on the registration form, and click OK.

3	Select the Type of Use attribute (Restricted Use or Royalty Free), and set or unset the Adult Content attribute (note this is for communication only, and does not affect display of the image in Picture Publisher.

4	Set the watermark intensity. This determines how strongly the watermark is placed in the image. The higher the intensity, the more visible the watermark will be, and the more edits and transformations it will survive. Likewise, the lower the intensity, the less visible the watermark will be, and the less it will survive. The default setting is 2, and is suitable for most applications.

5	Click OK to embed the watermark.


About the Digimarc command


To read a watermark

1	On the Image menu, point to Digimarc, and click Read Watermark.

2	If a watermark is present, you will see a read results dialog displaying the creator id and image attributes found in the watermark.

3.	To find out more about the creator or distributor of the image, either launch a web browser and go to the URL provided; call the Digimarc fax-back service at the number listed; or if you have a Web connection, click the Web Lookup button to go directly to the page of contact details for that Creator Id.


About the Digimarc command


Selector Tool

The Selector tool selects individual or multiple objects for transforming, grouping, or deleting.


To select an object


Lets you select individual or multiple objects for transforming, grouping, or deleting.


Lets you copy or move a selected object or objects.


To select an object

1	Click the Selector tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the object you want to select.

or

Press Shift and click multiple objects to select multiple objects.

or

Drag a selection rectangle around a group of objects to select all objects totally inside the rectangle.

Note

You can deselect an individual object without affecting the other selected objects by pressing Shift and clicking the object.


About the Selector tool


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you move selected objects up one layer each click. Each object resides on a different layer. You can see this by overlapping the objects and viewing them. Pressing Shift while clicking a button moves the selection to the back or front layer.

Note

When you have multiple objects selected on non-consecutive layers, each object moves one layer when you click the button. If you hold Shift and then click, all selected objects move to the top or bottom in their relative sequence.


Lets you move selected objects down one layer each click. Each object resides on a different layer. You can see this by overlapping the objects and viewing them. Pressing Shift while clicking a button moves the selection to the back or front layer.

Note

When you have multiple objects selected on non-consecutive layers, each object moves one layer when you click the button. If you hold Shift and then click, all selected objects move to the top or bottom in their relative sequence.


Lets you display the Transform tool for the selected objects. Controls in this ribbon allow you to change the shape and orientation of the selection.


Lets you group or ungroup multiple selected objects. Grouped objects can be moved and selected as one object.


Lets you lock or unlock selected objects.


Selector Transform Tool

Using the Selector Transform tool, you can copy or move a selected object or objects.

When you use the Selector Transform tool, you first use the Selector tool to choose one or more objects to transform. Then you click the Selector Transform tool. Picture Publisher places a transform box around the selected object or objects.

Note

When you select more than one object to transform, the transform box is placed around all selected objects. During the transform, they are treated as a single object.

You can perform several operations using the Selector Transform tool.

move an object

rotate an object

resize an object

flip an object

When you are done with an operation, double-click on the transform box (or image), or press Enter to release the Selector Transform tool.

Note

A rotation tool resides in the middle of the transform box surrounding the selection. The rotation tool consists of a circle marking the pivot point, a square marking the rotation handle, and a line connecting the two. You rotate the selection by dragging the handle. Dragging the pivot point allows you to change the center of rotation. You can change the sensitivity of the rotation tool by dragging the handle closer to or farther away from the pivot point. The tool becomes less sensitive as you drag the handle farther away. This simply means you must drag the handle more to rotate the image.


To move an object using the Selector Transform tool

To rotate an object using the Selector Transform tool

To resize an object using the Selector Transform tool

To flip an object using the Selector Transform tool


To move an object using the Selector Transform tool

1	Click the Selector tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Select the object or objects to be transformed.

3	Click the Selector Transform tool in the Main toolbar.

A transform box appears on the selected object or objects. The ribbon changes to show the Selector Transform options.

4	Point to the inside of the transform box, press the left mouse button, and drag the transform box to the location you want. The object moves to the new location.

5	Press Enter to leave Selector Transform mode.

Note

You can press Esc at any time during this process to exit the transform mode.

Tip

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to objects. For example, if you select an object on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Edit Skew, Edit Perspective, Edit Distortion, Align, Position, Arrange, Order, and Combine. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


About the Selector Transform tool


To rotate an object using the Selector Transform tool

1	Click the Selector tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Select the object or objects to be transformed.

3	Click the Selector Transform tool in the Main toolbar.

A transform box appears on the selected object or objects. The ribbon changes to show the Selector Transform options.

4	Click the Rotation button in the ribbon corresponding to the type of rotation you want: Normal (flat), X-Axis, or Y-Axis.

5	Point to the end of the rotate handle in the transform box, press the left mouse button, and drag the handle to the angle you want. The object rotates to the new angle.

6	Press Enter to leave Selector Transform mode.

Note

You can press Esc at any time during this process to exit the transform mode.

Tip

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to objects. For example, if you select an object on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Edit Skew, Edit Perspective, Edit Distortion, Align, Position, Arrange, Order, and Combine. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


To resize an object using the Selector Transform tool

1	Click the Selector tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Select the object or objects to be transformed.

3	Click the Selector Transform tool in the Main toolbar.

A transform box appears on the selected object or objects. The ribbon changes to show the Selector Transform options.

4	Click the Transform Mode button in the ribbon corresponding to the type of resizing you want: Scale, Skew, Perspective, or Distort.

5	Point to the corner or side handle of the transform box, press the left mouse button, and drag the handle in or out to the size you want. The object changes to the new size.

6	Repeat steps 4 and 5, if necessary.

7	Press Enter to leave Selector Transform mode.

Notes

Scale lets you enlarge or reduce the size of the transform box proportionally or non-proportionally; Skew lets you "slide" the transform box from rectangular to a slanted parallelogram; Perspective lets you change the size of one side of the transform box to add a three-dimensional appearance to the object; and Distort lets you stretch the transform box as if it were a rubber sheet with each corner and side independently resizable.

You can press Esc at any time during this process to exit the transform mode.

Tip

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to objects. For example, if you select an object on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Edit Skew, Edit Perspective, Edit Distortion, Align, Position, Arrange, Order, and Combine. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


To flip an object using the Selector Transform tool

1	Click the Selector tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Select the object or objects to be transformed.

3	Click the Selector Transform tool in the Main toolbar.

A transform box appears on the selected object or objects. The ribbon changes to show the Selector Transform options.

4	Click the Flip button corresponding to the flip you want: Horizontal or Vertical. The selected object flips in the chosen direction.

5	Press Enter to leave Selector Transform mode.

Note

You can press Esc at any time during this process to exit the transform mode.

Tip

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to objects. For example, if you select an object on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Edit Skew, Edit Perspective, Edit Distortion, Align, Position, Arrange, Order, and Combine. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


Mask Tools

The Mask tools let you select, or mask, areas of an image so that you can edit one area without affecting another.

Click an icon below to read more information about the tool.

Click the Shape Mask tool to create a rectangular/square or elliptical/circular mask.

Click the Freehand Mask tool to create a custom mask.

 	Click the Paint on Mask tool to create an irregularly shaped mask by using paint brushes on areas you want to mask.

Click the Smart Mask tool to automatically draw a mask.

Click the Mask Transform tool to move, rotate, skew, or change the size and shape of a mask.

Click the Mask Point Editing tool to change the shape of a mask by moving, adding, or deleting points on a mask.

Tips

Use the Additive and Subtractive mode buttons to control what is included in the mask. For example, if you paint too much, you can subtract the unwanted area from the mask using the Subtractive mode button in the ribbon. This way, you can get exactly what you want in the masked area.

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to the mode in which you are working. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, Mask Transform, etc. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


What is a Mask?


Opens the Mask toolset to let you select, or mask, areas of an image so that you can edit one area without affecting another.

You can use masks to isolate your editing and retouching. You can also use masks to outline areas for cutting and copying to create montages. Finally, you can copy masked areas from one place in an image to another place in the same image, or into other images or programs.

An outline shows the shape of the mask as you create it. This shape displays as a "marquee" when you are finished drawing the mask. The marquee is identified by a moving black and white border on color images, and a moving green and red border on grayscale and line art images.


What is a Mask?

A mask is a border used to set off an area for changes or protection from changes. Masks also mark an area for copying or cutting to the Windows Clipboard or a named clipboard.

The mask tools in Picture Publisher are modeled after graphic design and photographic design tools. For example, an icon used for several of the Mask tools is a razor knife, a tool commonly used when manually creating cardboard or film masks.

A mask can be rectangular, elliptical, freehand-drawn, or painted. A special Smart Mask tool can be used to trace the edges of obviously visible objects. After you create a mask, you can change its size, its shape, or both.

A mask is marked with a black and white marquee on a color image, and green and red on a grayscale image. The mask can be hidden. Hiding a mask does not change any property or characteristic of the mask. A hidden mask can easily be shown on the image again.

You can draw multiple masks on a single image. The masks can be separate or overlapping. A new mask overlapping an existing mask can

add to the area of the existing mask

subtract from the area of the existing mask

add to the area where the mask doesn't exist and subtract from the area where the masks overlap

You can also convert masked areas into Picture Publisher objects. See the section "Understanding objects" for more information.


About the Mask tools


Shape Mask Tool

The Shape Mask tool lets you create a rectangular, square, elliptical, or circular mask.

A mask is marked with a black and white marquee on a color image, and green and red on a grayscale image.

Tips

Use the Additive and Subtractive mode buttons to control what is included in the mask. For example, if you paint too much, you can subtract the unwanted area from the mask using the Subtractive mode button in the ribbon. This way, you can get exactly what you want in the masked area.

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to the mode in which you are working. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, Mask Transform, etc. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


To draw a rectangular or elliptical mask


About the Mask tools

What is a Mask?


Lets you create a rectangular, square, elliptical, or circular mask.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you choose whether you want to create rectangular or elliptical masks. Click the down arrow in the list box, then click the rectangular or elliptical shape to choose the mask shape.


To draw a rectangular or elliptical mask

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Shape Mask tool.

3	Select a mask mode in the ribbon.

4	In the Shape box in the ribbon, select a mask shape (rectangular or elliptical).

5	In the Method box in the ribbon, select a mask method.

If you choose Constrain Aspect, type values for the Width and Height.

If you choose Constrain Size, type values for the Width and Height and select unit of measure.

6	Click where you want to start the mask and drag to create the mask.

7	When the mask is the size and location you want, release the left mouse button to display the mask.

Tips

Use the Additive and Subtractive mode buttons to control what is included in the mask. For example, if you paint too much, you can subtract the unwanted area from the mask using the Subtractive mode button in the ribbon. This way, you can get exactly what you want in the masked area.

Press and hold the right mouse button and move the mouse to reposition the mask while you are drawing it.

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to masking. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, and Mask Transform. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


About the Shape Mask tool

About the Mask tools

What is a Mask?


Freehand Mask Tool

The Freehand Mask tool lets you create a custom mask by manually or automatically tracing an outline of the area you want to mask.

You can draw a freehand mask one point at a time (by clicking the left mouse button), or you can press and hold the left mouse button while dragging the pointer (as if you were drawing with a pencil).

A mask is marked with a black and white marquee on a color image, and green and red on a grayscale image.

Tips

Use the Additive and Subtractive mode buttons to control what is included in the mask. For example, if you paint too much, you can subtract the unwanted area from the mask using the Subtractive mode button in the ribbon. This way, you can get exactly what you want in the masked area.

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to the mode in which you are working. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, Mask Transform, etc. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


To draw a freehand mask

To load a shape

To save a shape

To create a clipping path

To create a clipping path from an existing mask


About the Mask tools

What is a Mask?


Lets you create a custom mask by manually or automatically tracing an outline of the area you want to mask.

You can draw a freehand mask one point at a time (by clicking the left mouse button), or you can press and hold the left mouse button while dragging the pointer (as if you were drawing with a pencil).


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you select a method of using the Freehand Mask tool.

Choose Freehand to draw a mask without constraints.

Choose AutoMask to draw a mask semi-automatically along color break lines. This allows you to trace parts of the image distinguished by their color.

Choose Point Edit to edit, add, and delete points in a mask.


Lets you anti-alias (or feather) the mask edges.


Lets you draw lines with the Freehand Mask tool.


Lets you draw curves with the Freehand Mask tool.


Lets you choose a color model to use for creating the mask. For example, if all hues in the mask are similar, but there is a wide range of lightness and darkness, you might want to use the HSL model to draw the mask.


Lets you determine the amount of change in color that Picture Publisher uses to trace the mask. If all colors are very similar you may want to use a small number so the mask does not expand too much. A high sensitivity gives you more precision, but requires more time to create the mask.


Lets you determine the minimum line length in pixels that Picture Publisher can draw when automasking.

The Point Edit option displays the following additional options related to point editing only.


Activates a line editing tool for the selected point.


Lets you activate a Bézier curve editing tool for the selected point. This allows you to curve the lines on each side of the point.


Lets you move points in a mask. Do this by dragging a point.

Note

To toggle between Add Point mode and Move Point mode, press and hold Shift.


Lets you add points to a mask. Do this by clicking on the marquee between two existing points.

Note

To toggle between Add Point mode and Move Point mode, press and hold Shift.


Lets you delete a point on a mask.


To draw a freehand mask

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Freehand Mask tool.

3	Select a mask mode in the ribbon.

4	In the Method box, select Freehand.

5	Click where you want to start the mask and drag to create the mask.

6	When the mask is the size and location you want, double-click the left mouse button to display the mask.

Notes

If you are in point editing mode, press Enter to complete the mask.

When in point editing mode, you can press Tab to select all points in the first shape with a selected point (or all points in all shapes if none are selected).

Tips

If you make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last line segment.

Place the last point near the first point before closing the mask. This helps you avoid an unwanted line.

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to masking. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, and Mask Transform. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


To load a shape

To save a shape

To create a clipping path

To create a clipping path from an existing mask

About the Freehand Mask tool

About the Mask tools

What is a Mask?

AutoMasking


AutoMasking

AutoMasking is a feature of the Freehand Mask that senses the edge of an area by detecting a color break, then automatically tracing it.

AutoMasking is used in conjunction with the Freehand Mask tool to create mask outlines in irregular areas. This powerful tool has adjustable sensitivity. It can detect the edge of an element based on the actual image data, rather than relying on a visual interpretation of a screen display.

A mask is marked with a black and white marquee on a color image, and green and red on a grayscale image.

Tip

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to the mode in which you are working. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, Mask Transform, etc. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


About the Freehand Mask tool

About the Mask tools

What is a Mask?


To draw a mask using AutoMask

To edit points before a mask is completed


To draw a mask using AutoMask

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Freehand Mask tool.

3	In the Method box in the ribbon, select AutoMask.

4	Select a mask mode in the ribbon.

5	In the Sensitivity box, enter the amount of change in color you want Picture Publisher to use to trace the mask.

If all colors are very similar you may want to use a small number so the mask does not expand too much. A high sensitivity gives you more precision, but requires more time to create the mask.

6	In the Min. Line Length box, enter the minimum line length in pixels that Picture Publisher can draw when automasking.

7	Click where you want to begin the mask.

8	Drag the pointer and guideline a short distance (about 1/4 to 1/2 inch) along an edge of the image, and click. AutoMask automatically traces that edge of the image, approximating the guideline.

9	Repeat step 8 until the image is almost completely traced.

10	Double-click to close the mask.

Tip

If AutoMask can not find a distinct edge, the mask might draw unpredictably. If this happens, click the left mouse button to stop the mask from drawing, then press Backspace repeatedly until you return to a good outline.


AutoMasking

About the Freehand Mask tool

About the Mask tools

What is a Mask?

To edit points before a mask is completed


To edit points before a mask is completed

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Freehand Mask tool.

3	Click the Additive Mode button in the ribbon.

4	In the Method box in the ribbon, select either Freehand or AutoMask.

5	Begin drawing a mask on the image.

6	In the Method box in the ribbon, select Point Edit. The mask turns into a series of line segments and Bézier curves.

7	Click the button corresponding to the point edit mode you want in the ribbon (Make Line, Make Bézier, Move Points, Add Points, Delete Points).

Note

You can use the Point Edit method to edit points as you are creating a mask. You may want to use this method if you have placed a point and are not happy with its placement.


AutoMasking

About the Freehand Mask tool

About the Mask tools

What is a Mask?

To draw a mask using AutoMask


Paint On Mask Tool

You can point a mask on an image using the Paint On Mask tool in the Mask tool set. By painting directly on the image, you can create irregularly-shaped masks using the brush size and shape you want.

A mask is marked with a black and white marquee on a color image, and green and red on a grayscale image.

Tips

Use the Additive and Subtractive mode buttons to control what is included in the mask. For example, if you paint too much, you can subtract the unwanted area from the mask using the Subtractive mode button in the ribbon. This way, you can get exactly what you want in the masked area.

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to the mode in which you are working. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, Mask Transform, etc. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


To paint on a mask


About the Mask tools

What is a Mask?


Lets you create an irregularly shaped mask by painting on areas you want to mask.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you choose the way the Paint On Mask tool will work. Choose Image Mask to paint a mask directly on the image. Choose Object Alpha to paint on the object’s alpha channel. This lets you change the characteristics of the whole object or parts of it. For example, select an object and choose Object Alpha in the Paint On Mask list box. Choose the Subtractive mode to paint away part of the object. Choose the Additive mode to add part of the object back.


To paint on a mask

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Paint On Mask tool.

3	Select a mask mode in the ribbon.

4	Click the Shape button in the ribbon, and select a brush shape.

5	In the Size box, enter a brush size.

6	Set any other options in the ribbon.

7	Click where you want to start the mask and drag to paint on the mask.

8	When the mask is the size and location you want, release the left mouse button when the mask is as you want it.

Tips

Use the Additive and Subtractive mode buttons to control what is included in the mask. For example, if you paint too much, you can subtract the unwanted area from the mask using the Subtractive mode button in the ribbon. This way, you can get exactly what you want in the masked area.

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to masking. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, and Mask Transform. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


About the Paint on mask tool

What is a Mask?

About the Mask tools


Smart Mask Tool

The Smart Mask tool draws a mask automatically based on color. You choose the color to be masked by pointing the cursor to an area of the image you want masked and clicking. Smart Mask senses color breaks within the image and masks between them.

The Smart Mask tool is most effective when the contrast or color break is strong at the edge of the area to be masked. For example, the Smart Mask tool is useful for masking black letters when they are displayed on a white background.

As with other masking tools, you can set the mode to Additive (to add to the mask) or Subtractive (to subtract from the mask).


To use the Smart Mask tool


What is a Mask?

About the Mask tools


Automatically draws a mask by sensing color breaks within the image and masking between them. You choose the color to be masked by pointing the cursor to the area of the image you want masked and clicking.

The Smart Mask tool is most effective when the contrast or color break is strong at the edge of the area to be masked. For example, the Smart Mask tool is useful for masking black letters when they are displayed on a white background.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Set the Wand Range to determine sensitivity to color differences. As you increase the Wand Range percentage, the area of color included in the mask increases.


Set the Wand Fade to create smooth edges on masks as the mask is drawn. As you increase the Wand Fade percentage, the edges of the mask becomes softer. As you decrease the Wand Fade percentage, the edges of the mask become more sharply defined.


Lets you mask similar colors throughout the image after you have created the first mask.


Lets you increase the size of the mask by the percentage amount set in the Expand Mask Amount box.


Lets you set the amount to increase the size of the mask.


To use the Smart Mask tool

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Smart Mask tool.

3	Select a mask mode in the ribbon.

4	In the Wange Range box in the ribbon, enter a value from 0% to 100%.

5	In the Color Model box, select a color model.

6	Set any other options in the ribbon.

7	Click inside the area of the image to be masked. A mask marquee appears.

Note

You can delete your masks by opening the Mask menu and choosing the Remove Mask command or opening the Edit menu and choosing the Undo command.

Tip

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to masking. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, and Mask Transform. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


About the Smart Mask tool

What is a Mask?

About the Mask tools


Mask Transform Tool

Using the Mask Transform tool, you can copy or move a mask or the mask and the image inside the mask.

When you use the Mask Transform tool, you can click on the image to choose an entire masked area, or draw a bounding box with the Selector tool to select a portion of the masked area to transform. Picture Publisher places a transform box around the masked area.

You can perform several operations using the Mask Transform tool.

move a mask or a masked image

rotate a mask of a masked image

resize a mask or a masked image

flip a mask or masked area

copy a mask or a masked image

When you are done with an operation, double-click on the transform box (or image), or press Enter to release the Mask Transform tool.

Note

A rotation tool resides in the middle of the transform box surrounding the selection. The rotation tool consists of a circle marking the pivot point, a square marking the rotation handle, and a line connecting the two. You rotate the selection by dragging the handle. Dragging the pivot point allows you to change the center of rotation. You can change the sensitivity of the rotation tool by dragging the handle closer to or farther away from the pivot point. The tool becomes less sensitive as you drag the handle farther away. This simply means you must drag the handle more to rotate the image.


To move a mask or masked image

To rotate a mask or masked image

To resize a mask or masked image

To flip a mask or masked image

To copy a mask or masked image


What is a Mask?

About the Mask tools


Lets you copy or move the mask only or both the mask and the image inside the mask.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Displays the options for choosing how you want to transform the selection:

Copy Mask lets you duplicate the mask without changing the image.

Move Mask lets you move the mask without changing the image.

Copy Image lets you duplicate the mask and the image inside the mask; this is similar to copying and pasting an image. This creates an object if objects are enabled in the Options dialog box.

Move Image lets you move the mask and the image inside the mask; this is similar to cutting and pasting the image. This creates an object if objects are enabled in the Options dialog box.


Lets you change the height and width of the selection. Drag a corner handle to enlarge or shrink the selection. Drag an edge handle to move just the height or width.


Lets you slant the selection. Drag a corner handle or a top and bottom edge handle to skew the selection left or right. Drag an edge handle to skew the selection up or down.


Lets you add a three-dimensional appearance to the selection. Dragging a corner handle in one direction moves the adjacent corner handle  an equal distance in the opposite direction.


Lets you stretch the selection as if it is a rubber sheet. Each corner handle operates independently of the others. Drag a corner handle in any direction.


Lets you rotate the selection flat, as if you are looking down on a spinning disk.


Lets you rotate the selection by pushing the top back and pulling the bottom forward, or vice versa, as if you are turning a rotisserie (rotating spit). This rotation is actually from a 45 degree angle.


Lets you rotate the selection by pushing the left back and pulling the right forward, or vice versa, as if you are turning a revolving door. This rotation is actually from a 45 degree angle.


To move a mask or masked image

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Mask Transform tool.

3	In the Modify box in the ribbon, select Move Mask or Move Image.

4	Point to the inside of the masked area and click the left mouse button to select the entire masked area.

or

Point to a location on the image and drag a selection box over the portion of the mask you want to move. A transform box appears on the selected area. The ribbon changes to show the Mask Transform options.

5	Point to the inside of the transform box, press the left mouse button, and drag the transform box to the location you want. The masked area moves to the new location.

6	Press Enter to leave Mask Transform mode.

Notes

To cut a portion of the image without masking an area, click the mask tool and choose the Mask Transform tool. Chose Move Image in the Modify list box. Drag a bounding box around the area you want to cut and release the mouse button when you finish.

You can delete a mask by selecting it while using the Mask Transform tool and pressing Del.

You can press Esc at any time during this process to exit the transform mode.

Tip

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to masking. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, and Mask Transform. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


About the Mask Transform tool

What is a Mask?

About the Mask tools


To rotate a mask or masked image

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Mask Transform tool.

3	In the Modify box in the ribbon, select Move Mask.

4	Point to the inside of the masked area and click the left mouse button to select the entire masked area.

or

Point to a location on the image and drag a selection box over the portion of the mask you want to transform.

A transform box appears on the selected area. The ribbon changes to show the Mask Transform options.

5	Click the Rotation button in the ribbon corresponding to the type of rotation you want: Normal (flat), X-Axis, or Y-Axis.

6	Point to the end of the rotate handle in the transform box, press the left mouse button, and drag the handle to the angle you want. The masked area rotates to the new angle.

7	Press Enter to leave Mask Transform mode.

Notes

You can delete a mask by selecting it while using the Mask Transform tool and pressing Del.

You can press Esc at any time during this process to exit the transform mode.

Tip

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to masking. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, and Mask Transform. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


To resize a mask or masked image

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Mask Transform tool.

3	In the Modify box in the ribbon, select Move Mask or Move Image.

4	Point to the inside of the masked area and click the left mouse button to select the entire masked area.

or

Point to a location on the image and drag a selection box over the portion of the mask you want to transform.

A transform box appears on the selected area. The ribbon changes to show the Mask Transform options.

5	Click the Transform Mode button in the ribbon corresponding to the type of resizing you want: Scale, Skew, Perspective, or Distort.

6	Point to the corner or side handle of the transform box, press the left mouse button, and drag the handle in or out to the size you want. The masked area changes to the new size.

7	Repeat steps 5 and 6, if necessary.

8	Press Enter to leave Mask Transform mode.

Notes

Scale lets you enlarge or reduce the size of the transform box proportionally or non-proportionally; Skew lets you "slide" the transform box from rectangular to a slanted parallelogram; Perspective lets you change the size of one side of the transform box to add a three-dimensional appearance to the mask; and Distort lets you stretch the transform box as if it were a rubber sheet with each corner and side independently resizable.

You can delete a mask by selecting it while using the Mask Transform tool and pressing Del.

You can press Esc at any time during this process to exit the transform mode.

Tip

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to masking. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, and Mask Transform. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


To flip a mask or masked image

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Mask Transform tool.

3	In the Modify box in the ribbon, select Move Mask or Move Image.

4	Point to the inside of the masked area and click the left mouse button to select the entire masked area.

or

Point to a location on the image and drag a selection box over the portion of the mask you want to transform. A transform box appears on the selected area. The ribbon changes to show the Mask Transform options.

5	Click the Flip button corresponding to the flip you want: Horizontal or Vertical. The mask flips in the chosen direction.

6	Press Enter to leave Mask Transform mode.

Notes

You can delete a mask by selecting it while using the Mask Transform tool and pressing Del.

You can press Esc at any time during this process to exit the transform mode.

Tip

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to masking. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, and Mask Transform. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


To copy a mask or masked image

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Mask Transform tool.

3	In the Modify box in the ribbon, select Copy Mask or Copy Image.

4	Point to the inside of the masked area and click the left mouse button to select the entire masked area.

or

Point to a location on the image and drag a selection box over the portion of the mask you want to move. A transform box appears on the selected area. The ribbon changes to show the Mask Transform options.

5	Point to the inside of the transform box, press the left mouse button, and drag the transform box to the location you want. A copy of the mask moves to the new location.

6	Press Enter to leave Mask Transform mode.

Notes

To copy a portion of the image without masking an area, click the mask tool and choose the Mask Transform tool. In the Modify box, select Copy Image. Drag a bounding box around the area you want to copy and release the mouse button when you finish.

You can delete a mask by selecting it while using the Mask Transform tool and pressing Del.

You can press Esc at any time during this process to exit the transform mode.

Tip

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to masking. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, and Mask Transform. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


Mask Point Editing Tool

Picture Publisher lets you edit an existing mask to change its shape point by point. You can edit points as line segments or Bézier curves, move existing points, add points, and remove points to redraw the mask any way you want.

Note

When in point editing mode, you can press Tab to select all points in the first shape with a selected point (or all points in all shapes if none are selected).


To edit points as line segments

To edit points as Bézier curves

To add points to a mask

To remove points from a mask

To move points on a mask


What is a Mask?

About the Mask tools


Lets you change the shape of a mask by moving, adding, or deleting points on the mask.

The Mask Point Editing tool lets you fine-tune a mask by adjusting its individual points. The tool is especially useful when you need to make minor changes to a mask.

Note

When in point editing mode, you can press Tab to select all points in the first shape with a selected point (or all points in all shapes if none are selected).


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you edit points as line segments or Bézier curves.


Lets you choose the maximum curvature the program will allow when converting to line segments.


Lets you choose how sharp the corners of a point are. The lower the continuity, the sharper the corner. The higher the continuity, the softer the edges of the corner.


Lets you choose the maximum curvature the program will allow when converting to Bézier curves.

Click the masked area to enter point editing mode and display the following options in the ribbon, for both the Lines and Curves methods.


To edit points as line segments

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Mask Point Editing tool.

3	In the Method box in the ribbon, select Lines.

4	Click a point or draw a bounding box around the area of the mask you want to edit. The mask changes to display all points or selected points.

5	Edit the points.

6	Press Enter to leave the editing mode.

Tip

Press L to change the selected point(s) into a line.


To edit points as Bézier curves

To add points to a mask

To remove points from a mask

To move points on a mask

About the Mask Point Editing tool


To edit points as Bezier curves
To edit points as Bézier curves

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Mask Point Editing tool. The ribbon changes to show the Mask Point Editing options.

3	In the Method box in the ribbon, select Curves.

4	Click a point or draw a bounding box around the area of the mask you want to edit. The mask changes to display all points or selected points.

5	Edit the points as necessary.

6	Press Enter to leave the editing mode.

Tip

Press Shift while dragging a Bézier handle to unlock the Bézier handle and create a cusp. Press C to change the selected point(s) into a Bézier curve.


To edit points as line segments

To add points to a mask

To remove points from a mask

To move points on a mask

About the Mask Point Editing tool


To move points on a mask

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Mask Point Editing tool.

3	Click the masked area to display the points.

4	Click the Move Points button in the ribbon.

5	Point the mouse pointer to the point to be moved, press the left mouse button, and drag the point to its new location.

6	Repeat step 5 for additional points, if necessary.

7	Press Enter to leave the editing mode.

Tip

To move multiple points, draw a bounding box around the points, and move one of the points. Using the right mouse button while moving any point will move the entire curve.


To edit points as line segments

To edit points as Bézier curves

To add points to a mask

To remove points from a mask

About the Mask Point Editing tool


To add points to a mask

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Mask Point Editing tool.

3	Click the masked area to display the points.

4	Click the Add Points button in the ribbon.

5	Point the mouse pointer where you want to add a point and click. A new point appears at that place on the image.

6	Repeat step 5 for additional points.

7	Press Enter to leave the editing mode.

Tip

Press Shift and click where you want to add a point.


To edit points as line segments

To edit points as Bézier curves

To remove points from a mask

To move points on a mask

About the Mask Point Editing tool


To remove points from a mask

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Mask Point Editing tool.

3	Click the masked area to display the points.

4	Click the Remove Points button in the ribbon.

5	Point the mouse pointer to the point to be removed and click.

6	Repeat step 5 for additional points.

7	Press Enter to leave the editing mode.

Tips

To select multiple points for deleting, draw a bounding box around the points.

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to masking. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, and Mask Transform. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


To edit points as line segments

To edit points as Bézier curves

To add points to a mask

To move points on a mask

About the Mask Point Editing tool


Crop Tool

The Crop tool lets you reduce the size of an image and remove unwanted areas of the image by selecting a rectangular portion of the image that you want to keep and discarding the portion of the image outside the rectangle. This tool is especially useful when an image contains extraneous imagery that you want to trim off and discard.

You can also use the crop tool to extract a portion, such as a person’s face, and create a closeup portrait of the person, by trimming other persons and side items from the image.


To draw a cropping rectangle


Lets you reduce the size of an image and remove unwanted areas in the image by selecting a rectangular portion of the image that you want to keep and discarding the portion outside the rectangle.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you choose the method of cropping. Choose Freeform to draw the cropping rectangle without constraints. Choose Constrain Aspect to draw a cropping rectangle with a specific width to height ratio. Enter the ratio in the Width and Height edit boxes. Choose Constrain Size to draw a cropping rectangle of a specific size.


Lets you enter the width of the rectangle to crop.


Lets you enter the height of the rectangle to crop.


Lets you choose the units of measure for cropping.


To draw a cropping rectangle

1	Click the Crop tool.

2	In the Method list box in the ribbon, select a cropping method.

If you choose Constrain Aspect, type values for the Width and Height.

If you choose Constrain Size, type values for the Width and Height and select a unit of measure, if necessary.

3	Click where you want to start the cropping rectangle. Press the left mouse button to move the rectangle while you are drawing it.

In Freeform and Constrain Aspect, you drag a rectangle; in Constrain Size, you position a box.

4	When the rectangle is the size and location you want, release the left mouse button to crop the image.

Tip

Click the right mouse button to open the mouse menu for quick access to commands and tools related to masking. For example, if you draw a mask on an image and click the right mouse button, a mouse menu displays commands such as Remove Mask, Undo Mask, and Mask Transform. The commands available depend on what you are working with in Picture Publisher.


About the Crop tool


Draw Tools

The Draw tools let you draw simple lines and shapes on your image. For example, the Draw tools let you insert an image into an oval picture frame.

Click an icon below to read more information about the tool.

Click the Shape Draw tool to draw rectangular or elliptical shapes on an image.

Click the Freehand Draw tool to draw closed, irregular shapes.

Click the Polyline tool to draw straight lines or freehand sketches.

Notes

Because these tools draw directly onto the image and are not vector-based drawings, they cannot be selected and moved after they are drawn. For this reason, it is best to work in the Manual Apply mode while experimenting, so several changes can be undone until you get the desired result.

Press Esc before releasing the left mouse button to cancel a drawing.


About brush styles

About the Edit Brush command

About the Delete Brush command

About the Add Brush command

About the Reset Brush command


Opens the Draw toolset to let you draw simple lines and shapes on your image. For example, the Draw tools let you insert an image into an oval picture frame.

Notes

Because Draw tools draw directly onto the image and the drawings are not vector-based, they cannot be selected and moved after they are drawn. For this reason, it is best to work in the Manual Apply mode while experimenting, so several changes can be undone until you get the desired result.

Press Esc before releasing the left mouse button to cancel a drawing.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you choose how to fill solid shapes. For example, you can choose to fill a circle with color, show only its outline, or show only the fill with no outline.

Outline and fill colors are selected with the Color Probe, Color Picker, or Color Palette and are displayed in the Color Swatch. The active color is the outline and the alternate color is the interior color, regardless of which Fill Style option is selected.


Polyline Tool

The Polyline tool lets you draw straight lines or freehand sketches.

Use the Polyline tool just as you would draw with a pencil. The paint is applied when you double-click at the end of a stroke.

Note

Click ? on the toolbar, and then click the ribbon item you want information about. You can also right-click the item you want information about, and then click the What's This? command.


To use the Polyline tool

To edit a brush style

To delete a brush style

To add a custom brush

To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command

To reset a brush style


Lets you draw straight lines or freehand sketches.

Use the Polyline tool just as you would draw with a pencil. The paint is applied when you double-click at the end of a stroke.

Notes

Because this tool draws directly onto the image and drawings are not vector-based, they cannot be selected and moved after they are drawn. For this reason, it is best to work in the Manual Apply mode while experimenting, so several changes can be undone until you get the desired result.

Press Esc before releasing the left mouse button to cancel a drawing.


To use the Polyline tool

1	In the toolbar, click the Draw tool.

2	Click the Polyline tool.

3	Click the Brush Styles button in the ribbon area, and select the desired brush style.

4	Change the options in the ribbon area.

5	Point where you want to begin drawing.

6	Click from point to point on the image. The points are connected with a straight line.

7	Double-click the left mouse button when you finish.

Notes

Pressing and holding Ctrl before drawing a line forces a horizontal or vertical line.

A smaller brush size lets you draw more quickly than a larger brush.

Press Backspace before you complete the line to delete the last line segment drawn.


About the Polyline tool

About the Draw tools

About brush styles


Shape Draw Tool

The Shape Draw tool lets you draw rectangular or elliptical shapes on your image.

This tool can be used to set off text or provide a background for an image (a drop shadow, for example).

Note

Click ? on the toolbar, and then click the ribbon item you want information about. You can also right-click the item you want information about, and then click the What's This? command.


To draw a rectangle or ellipse

To edit a brush style

To delete a brush style

To add a custom brush

To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command

To reset a brush style


Lets you draw rectangular or elliptical shapes on your image.

This tool can be used to set off text or provide a background for an image (a drop shadow, for example).

Notes

Because this tool draws directly onto the image and drawings are not vector-based, they cannot be selected and moved after they are drawn. For this reason, it is best to work in the Manual Apply mode while experimenting, so several changes can be undone until you get the desired result.

Press Esc before releasing the left mouse button to cancel a drawing.


To draw a rectangle or ellipse

1	In the toolbar, click the Draw tool.

2	Click the Shape Draw tool.

3	Click the Brush Styles button in the ribbon area, and select the desired brush style.

4	Change the options in the ribbon area. Be sure to choose the appropriate Fill Style for rectangle or ellipse.

5	Select the active and alternate colors in the Color Swatch.

6	Point where you want to begin the shape.

7	Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer to draw the shape.

8	Release the left mouse button when the shape is the size you want.

Notes

Press and hold Ctrl while drawing a shape to create a square or circle.

Press and hold Shift while drawing a shape to draw outward from the starting point.

Press and hold both Ctrl and Shift to draw a square or circle outward from the starting point.


About the Shape Draw tool

About the Draw tools

About brush styles


Freehand Draw Tool

The Freehand Draw tool lets you draw closed, irregular shapes.

Use the Freehand Draw tool just as you would draw with a pencil. The freehand shape closes when you double-click the left mouse button.

Note

Click ? on the toolbar, and then click the ribbon item you want information about. You can also right-click the item you want information about, and then click the What's This? command.


To draw a freehand shape

To edit a brush style

To delete a brush style

To add a custom brush

To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command

To reset a brush style


Lets you draw closed, irregular shapes.

Draw just as you would with a pencil. The freehand shape closes when you double-click the left mouse button.

Notes

Because this tool draws directly onto the image and drawings are not vector-based, they cannot be selected and moved after they are drawn. For this reason, it is best to work in the Manual Apply mode while experimenting, so several changes can be undone until you get the desired result.

Press Esc before releasing the left mouse button to cancel a drawing.


To draw freehand shapes

1	Click the Draw tool in the toolbar.

2	Click the Freehand Draw tool.

3	Click the Brush Styles button in the ribbon area, and select the desired brush style.

4	Change the options in the ribbon area.

5	Point where you want to begin drawing.

6	Click the left mouse button at each point that you want to connect with a straight line.

Note

To avoid an unwanted line, make sure the ending point is the same as the beginning point.


About the Freehand Draw tool

About the Draw tools

About brush styles


Fill Tools

The Fill tools in Picture Publisher let you fill masked areas of images with colors or patterns.

Click an icon below to read more information about the tool.

Click the Gradient Fill tool to create a special effect in which one color gradually changes into another.

Click the Texture Fill tool to fill an area with a texture or pattern.

Click the Color Tint Fill tool to fill a masked portion of an image with color.

Click the Smart Fill tool to change a specific color in a specific area of an image.

Fills are particularly useful if you want to add color or texture to your image. Fills can be applied as opaque colors, or you can choose a percentage of transparency in the ribbon area. Fills can be applied to an entire image or to a section of an image defined by a mask.

Notes

Smart Fill is the exception. It fills areas within a specified color range.

To add a fill to the image, click anywhere in the image. If you do not have an area masked, the entire image is filled.

To remove a fill from an image, click Undo on the Edit menu.


Opens the Fill toolset to let you choose a tool to fill masked areas of images with colors or patterns.


Gradient Fill

The Gradient Fill tool lets you create a special effect in which one color gradually changes into another.

Gradients, also known as blends or vignettes, are graduated color or gray sweeps that can be used to create a background or add shading. The gradient types are linear, radial, circular, elliptical, square, and rectangular.

Linear and radial gradients form a gradual fade of one color to another in a specified direction. Shape gradients (all types except linear) fade from a start color at the center of the shape to an end color at the shape's outer edge.

Gradient fills use the Color Swatch's active and alternate colors as the start and end colors, respectively. The active color is where the gradient begins; the alternate color is where the gradient ends. In other words, gradients change from the active color to the alternate color.

Note

Click ? on the toolbar, and then click the ribbon item you want information about. You can also right-click the item you want information about, and then click the What's This? command.


To create a gradient


Lets you create a special effect in which one color gradually changes into another.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you select the type of gradient you want. Linear gradients are made up of successive straight lines at any angle, changing from the active color at the start of the gradient to the alternate color at the end of the gradient.

Radial gradients are formed by circular arcs radiating out from a starting point and growing progressively larger toward an ending point (like ripples when a pebble is tossed into a pond). Circular gradients are similar to radial gradients but are formed by complete circles. Elliptical gradients are formed by ovals.

A square or rectangular gradient is formed by increasingly larger squares or rectangles.


Lets you set the number of transitions (1 to 99) between the starting and ending points for the gradient. This option is set in the Color Sweep box in the ribbon area.

Multiple color sweeps give the effect of a striped color blend with one to 99 bands (or rings). Whether the stripes are linear, circular, or rectangular depends upon the gradient type.


Lets you choose either the Hard Transition or Soft Transition option. If you choose the Hard Transition option, each successive sweep goes from the active color to the alternate color. For example, the first fade is from red to yellow and the second is also from red to yellow.

The Soft Transition option creates a soft edge at the transition to the next sweep by reversing the color order in each successive sweep. For example, the first fade is from red to yellow, and the second is from yellow to red. This feature lets you create interesting repeating patterns.


Lets you determine where the transition between colors takes place. Setting this to 10 makes the transitions take place at the point that is 10 percent of the distance between the start and the end of the gradient area. A setting of 50 makes the transition happen at the halfway point.


To create a gradient

1	Choose the active and alternate colors (using the Color Probe, Color Palette, or Color Picker).

2	Click the Fill tool in the Main toolbar.

3	Click the Gradient Fill tool.

4	In the Gradient Type box in the ribbon, select the gradient type.

5	Set the options in the ribbon.

6	Move the pointer where you want to begin the sweep (for linear and radial gradients), then press and hold the left mouse button. To create a definition line, drag the pointer the distance and direction you want the gradient to go. The line can extend outside the image area so that you can sweep to the corners of the image.

or

Press and hold the left mouse button (for other gradient types), and drag the pointer until the bounding box surrounds the image area in which you want to add the gradient. The gradient begins at the center of the shape and extends out.

7	Release the left mouse button. The gradient appears on the screen. The image area beyond the starting point redraws with the solid starting color, and the image area beyond the ending point redraws with the solid ending color.

Notes

Press Esc before releasing the left mouse button to cancel a definition line or bounding box.

To move the definition line or bounding box while you are drawing it, press and hold the right mouse button (do not release the left mouse button) and drag the bounding box to a new position. Release the right mouse button when you have finished moving.

Large gradient areas change color gradually; small gradient areas change color more quickly.


About the Gradient Fill tool

About the Fill tools


Texture Fill

The Texture Fill tool lets you flood an area with a texture or pattern.

Use the Texture Fill tool to apply a pattern to your image. Textures can be selected from a texture library, or you can add your own.

Textures are bitmap images that can be added to your image. Textures can improve your image by adding depth or variety. A common use of textures is background effects. For example, you can add a crushed velvet texture behind the image of a diamond ring.

Each texture is stored and used as a square tile. These tiles are laid side by side as you add the texture. In some textures, like velvet or crushed paper, the "seam" between the tiles may not be noticeable; other textures, like a mountain scene, may produce detectable seams.

Note

Click ? on the toolbar, and then click the ribbon item you want information about. You can also right-click the item you want information about, and then click the What's This? command.


To create a texture fill


Lets you flood an area with a texture or pattern.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you flip the texture horizontally.


Lets you flip the texture vertically.


Lets you select the texture or pattern to use.


To create a texture fill

1	Click the Fill tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Texture Fill tool.

3	Click the Texture button in the ribbon.

4	Drag the scroll box and choose the texture you want from the list of textures.

5	Set the options in the ribbon.

6	Point where you want to apply the texture fill and click the left mouse button.

Note

You can use the Texture tool or the Copy To command on the Edit menu to create and add your own textures.


About the Texture Fill tool

About the Fill tools


Color Tint Fill

The Color Tint Fill tool lets you fill in masked portions of your image (or the entire image) with color.

This tool lets you apply color to large areas of your image. The Color Swatch's active color can be applied to the whole image or sections of it by using masks and color shields.

Note

Click ? on the toolbar, and then click the ribbon item you want information about. You can also right-click the item you want information about, and then click the What's This? command.


To create a tint fill


Lets you fill in masked portions of your image (or the entire image) with color.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


To create a tint fill

1	Choose the active color in the Color Swatch at the bottom of the toolbar. The active color will be the tint fill color.

2	Click the Fill tool in the Main toolbar.

3	Click the Color Tint Fill tool.

4	Set the options in the ribbon.

5	Point to where you want to apply the tint fill and click the left mouse button.


About the Color Tint Fill tool

About the Fill tools


Smart Fill

The Smart Fill tool lets you change a specific color on a specific place on your image without drawing a mask.

Use the Smart Fill tool to fill a color or range of colors with the Color Swatch's active color. The Fill Range area in the ribbon area determines how large an area is filled. It is helpful when you want to fill a localized area of similar colors with a different color. Smart Fill tracks the adjacent color pixels and works within masked areas.

Note

Click ? on the toolbar, and then click the ribbon item you want information about. You can also right-click the item you want information about, and then click the What's This? command.


To create a smart fill


Lets you change a specific color on a specific place on your image without drawing a mask.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Determines how selective the Smart Fill is when searching for adjacent colors to replace with a new fill.

A low percentage is very selective. A high percentage includes more colors.

For example, if the Fill Range is 0% and you click a blue patch, only the blue is filled with the new color. If the Fill Range is 10%, the blue patch and all adjacent colors that are within a 10% variant of the selected blue are affected.

Note

The percentage range is based upon the RGB (red, green, and blue) color model. It defines the percent deviation from the RGB values of the color defined in the shield. A 100% setting protects or selects all color values in the image. A 5% setting allows a tolerance of plus or minus 5% from the defined RGB values. A 0% setting limits the range to a single RGB value.


Lets you create a soft edge for the fill. As you increase the Fill Fade percentage, the edge of the fill becomes softer. As you decrease the Fill Fade percentage, the edge of the fill becomes more defined.


To create a Smart Fill

1	Choose the active color in the Color Swatch at the bottom of the toolbar. The active color will be the Smart Fill color.

2	Click the Fill tool in the Main toolbar.

3	Click the Smart Fill tool.

4	Set the options in the ribbon.

5	Point where you want to apply the Smart Fill color and click the left mouse button. The chosen color and all adjacent colors within the specified fill range are filled.


About the Smart Fill tool

About the Fill tools


Filter Tools

The Filter tools in Picture Publisher let you add a filter effect to a small area of the image using brush strokes.

Click an icon below to read more information about the tool.

Click the Sharpen tool to make edges in an image appear more distinct.

Click the Smooth tool to make edges in an image appear less distinct.

Click the Lighten tool to increase the amount of lightness in selected areas in an image.

Click the Darken tool to increase the amount of darkness in selected areas in an image.

When photographers want to create a special photographic effect, they might use a filter on their camera lens. For example, a photographer might use a soft-focus filter to give the subject a soft, misty quality.

The Filter tools offer several options to enhance your image, but instead of using a lens filter, you use a brush. This gives you greater control over the placement of filtering effects.


About brush styles

About the Edit Brush command

About the Delete Brush command

About the Add Brush command

About the Reset Brush command


Opens the Filter toolset to let you add a filter effect to a small area of the image using brush strokes.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Opens a menu that lets you manage files.


Lets you determine the amount of pressure for the stroke. Zero percent equals no pressure, while 100% equals full pressure.


Sharpen Tool

The Sharpen tool lets you sharpen the edges within an image. This makes the edges in an image appear more distinct.

The Sharpen tool increases contrast by making dark edges darker and surrounding light edges lighter. For example, if you sharpen a light-blue edge against a yellow background, the light blue changes to dark blue and the yellow becomes white.

You can use the Sharpen tool to increase the readability of type in an image.

Note

Click ? on the toolbar, and then click the ribbon item you want information about. You can also right-click the item you want information about, and then click the What's This? command.


To sharpen an image

To edit a brush style

To delete a brush style

To add a custom brush

To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command

To reset a brush style


Lets you sharpen the edges within an image. This makes the edges in an image appear more distinct.


To sharpen an image

1	Click the Filter tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Sharpen tool.

3	Click the Brush Styles button in the ribbon area.

4	Select the desired brush style.

5	Set the options in the ribbon area.

6	Press and hold the left mouse button, and move the pointer over the edges you want to sharpen.

7	Release the left mouse button when you finish.

8	Repeat steps 6 and 7 to sharpen additional areas of the image.

Note

You can change the brush options while you apply special effects. Ctrl+Up Arrow and Ctrl+Down Arrow control the size of the brush, and Ctrl+Left Arrow and Ctrl+Right Arrow change the brush shape.


About the Sharpen tool

About the Filter tools

About brush styles


Smooth Tool

The Smooth tool lets you dull the edges within an image. This makes the edges in an image appear less distinct.

The Smooth tool decreases contrast by making dark edges lighter and light edges darker, resulting in softer, somewhat blurred edges.

Note

Click ? on the toolbar, and then click the ribbon item you want information about. You can also right-click the item you want information about, and then click the What's This? command.


To smooth an image

To edit a brush style

To delete a brush style

To add a custom brush

To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command

To reset a brush style


Lets you dull the edges within an image. This makes the edges in an image appear less distinct. The Smooth tool decreases contrast by making dark edges lighter and light edges darker, resulting in softer, somewhat blurred edges.


To smooth an image

1	Click the Filter tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Smooth tool.

3	Click the Brush Styles button in the ribbon area.

4	Select the desired brush style.

5	Change the options in the ribbon area.

6	Press and hold the left mouse button, and move the pointer over the edges you want to smooth.

7	Release the left mouse button when you finish.

8	Repeat steps 6 and 7 to smooth additional areas of the image.

Note

You can change the brush options while you apply special effects. Ctrl+Up Arrow and Ctrl+Down Arrow control the size of the brush, and Ctrl+Left Arrow and Ctrl+Right Arrow change the brush shape.


About the Smooth tool

About the Filter tools

About brush styles


Lighten Tool

The Lighten tool lets you lighten (dodge) selected areas in an image. This tool is used most often to show detail in the midtones or shadows of an image.

Note

Click ? on the toolbar, and then click the ribbon item you want information about. You can also right-click the item you want information about, and then click the What's This? command.


To lighten an image

To edit a brush style

To delete a brush style

To add a custom brush

To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command

To reset a brush style


Lets you lighten (dodge) selected areas in an image. This tool is used most often to show detail in the midtones or shadows of an image.


To lighten an image

1	Click the Filter tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Lighten tool.

3	Click the Brush Styles button in the ribbon area.

4	Select the desired brush style.

5	Set the options in the ribbon area.

6	Press and hold the left mouse button, and move the pointer over the area you want to lighten.

7	Release the left mouse button when you finish.

8	Repeat steps 6 and 7 to lighten additional areas of the image.

Note

You can change the brush options while you apply special effects. Ctrl+Up Arrow and Ctrl+Down Arrow control the size of the brush, and Ctrl+Left Arrow and Ctrl+Right Arrow change the brush shape.


About the Lighten tool

About the Filter tools

About brush styles


Darken Tool

The Darken tool lets you darken (burn) selected areas of an image. This tool is used most often to show detail in the shadows of an image.

Note

Click ? on the toolbar, and then click the ribbon item you want information about. You can also right-click the item you want information about, and then click the What's This? command.


To darken an image

To edit a brush style

To delete a brush style

To add a custom brush

To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command

To reset a brush style


Lets you darken (burn) areas in an image. This tool is used most often to reduce detail in the highlights of an image.


To darken an image

1	Click the Filter tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Darken tool.

3	Click the Brush Styles button in the ribbon area.

4	Select the desired brush style.

5	Set the options in the ribbon area.

6	Press and hold the left mouse button, and move the pointer over the area you want to darken.

7	Release the left mouse button when you complete the task.

8	Repeat steps 6 and 7 to darken additional areas of the image.

Note

You can change the brush options while you apply special effects. Ctrl+Up Arrow and Ctrl+Down Arrow control the size of the brush, and Ctrl+Left Arrow and Ctrl+Right Arrow change the brush shape.


About the Darken tool

About the Filter tools

About brush styles


Picture Publisher Glossary
Glossary

A

Active window

Apply changes

Aspect ratio

B

Back up

Bitmap

Black printer

Bleed

Blend

Bounding box

Branch

Burning

Button

C

Calibration

Cancel

Cascade windows

Check box

Chrome

Chroma Mask

Click

Client program

Clipboard

CMYK

Color correction

Color management system

Color model

Color Palette

Color Shield

Color Swatch

Color value

Compound document

Command

Continuous tone

Control menu

Control menu icon

Control Panel

Copy

Copy To

Crop

Crosshair

Cursor

Custom Toolbar

Cut

D

Darken

Default settings

Dialog box

Disabled

Dithered

Direction keys

Dodging

Dot gain

Double click

DPI

Drag

Driver

Duplicate window

E

Embedded object

Embossing

Encapsulated PostScript format

Erase

Extension

F

File type

Filter

Flip

Folder

Font

Frisket

G

Gamma

Grab

Gradient

Gray value

Grayscale

Group

H

Halftone

Handles

Highlight

Hint line

Hourglass cursor

Hue

I

Image cache

Image window

Ink correction

Invert

J

JPEG

K

K

Kilobyte (K byte)

L

Lighten

Lightness

Line art

Line screen

Linked object

List box

LZW compression

M

Main Toolbar

Map

Mask

Matrix

Menu

Menu bar

Midtones

Minimize and maximize boxes

Mirror (Flip)

Mode

Moiré patterns

Monochrome

Montage

Mouse

N

Named Clipboard

O

Object

Offset printing

Original file

P

Page orientation

Palette

Paper size

Paste

Paste From

Paste Link

Pivot point

Pixel

Plugging

Point size

Pointer

Posterize

PPF

Prescan

Press

Printing plate

Print spooler

Print area

Process color

R

Registration marks

Resize

Resolution

RGB

Ribbon

S

Saturation

Scanner

ScatterPrint

Screen angle

Scroll bars and scroll arrows

Select

Server program

Shadow value

Shortcut keys

Slider

Spool

Step scales

Submenu

Swatch

T

Texture

Threshold

TIFF

Title bar

Toggle

Toolbar

Tool set

Trim marks

Type style

Typeface

U

UCR

V

Value

Vignette

W

Window

Windows Clipboard


Active window

The window in which you work is the active window. The active window receives the next action.


Apply changes

Sets into memory any changes and edits you have made to the image. Once edits have been applied, they can be removed only by using the Revert to Saved command or by reloading the file. Manual or Auto Apply modes can be used. You can also use the Command List to edit changes, if the file is saved as PPF or PP5.


Aspect ratio

The relationship between the height and width of a mask or image. A 2X2 image and a 10X10 image have the same aspect ratio. A proportional resize of an image changes its size but not its aspect ratio. Changing the height and width independently distorts the aspect ratio.


Back up

To duplicate files (usually) onto a different medium such as a diskette. For example, backed-up files ensure that information is not lost if your hard disk fails.


Bitmap

An image made of individual pixels (dots) on the screen. All Picture Publisher images are bitmaps.


Black printer

Also called the key printer, this is the plate used for the black ink portion of four-color printing. Its purpose is to emphasize the neutral tones and detail in the shadow areas and enhance the overall contrast by forming a truer black than can be made by the combination of the three ink colors: cyan, magenta, and yellow.


Bleed

An image that extends beyond the edge of the paper (bleeds off) after the final trim.


Blend

Smooths the hard edges of an image when it is pasted onto another. Blending helps minimize the seam that commonly appears between the original and the pasted image.


Bounding box

The invisible rectangle that encloses a mask. When you move, resize, or duplicate a mask, a dotted rectangle representing the bounding box appears around the actual mask.


Branch

A tool in the Command List Manager dialog box that lets you isolate a set of alternative commands so that you can select one of the commands to execute for a version of an image. Branch is also the type of folder in which the alternative commands are stored.


Burning

A procedure used by photographers in traditional darkrooms to darken colors. Use the Darken tool in the Retouch tool set to darken color values.


Calibration

The process used to correct and adjust for variations which might occur during the scanning, displaying, or printing of an image.


Cancel

A command button used to close a dialog box without making changes. The Esc key also closes a dialog box.


Cascade windows

A Window menu command that diagonally stacks windows so that the title bars show.


Check box

A small box inside a dialog box that can be toggled on or off. Check boxes usually set several options.


Chrome

Slang for an original color transparency.


Chroma Mask

A Picture Publisher feature that lets you create a mask in an image based on its color.


Click

To quickly press and release the left mouse button. When you click the mouse button, you should hear and feel a click.


Client program

A program capable of accepting objects from OLE-compatible server programs.


Compound document

A document containing multiple objects created with different OLE-compatible server programs.


Embedded object

An object containing a graphic representation of the object and all the information required by the server program to re-create the original object.


Folder

In the Command List Manager dialog box, a tool that lets you organize a group of commands into a single element in the Command List.


Gamma

Adjustments that let you compensate for how your monitor displays images to provide you with accurate image editing. Several factors affect accurate viewing of an image file. Different monitors, various lighting conditions in your work area, and varying human perceptions of color affect the accuracy of the image display. You can also make gamma adjustments to compensate for how your printer prints images.


Linked object

An object containing a graphic representation of the object and information identifying the original server data file and program.


Original file

A file containing the source (original) object created with the server program. The original object can be linked to or embedded into a compound document.


Paste Link

A command used by the client program to link an object. The Paste Link command is similar to the Paste command.


Server program

A program capable of copying OLE-compatible objects to the Clipboard.


Clipboard

 (See Named Clipboard or Windows Clipboard.)


CMYK

Cyan, magenta, yellow, black. See also Color model.


Color correction

Any process that compensates for deficiencies in the color separation process and process inks.


Color management system

A system that automatically adjusts colors for accuracy when you move an image from one device to another. For example, when you scan an image and print it, a color management system makes sure that the color that is printed is the same as the color that was scanned. Picture Publisher uses the Kodak Color Management System (KCMS).


Color model

A method of representing the color spectrum. Two of the most common primary color models are the RGB (additive model where 100% R+G+B = white) and CMYK (subtractive model where 0% C+M+Y+K = white) models.


Color Palette

A collection of commonly used colors, similar to an artist's palette.


Color Shield

A type of mask that affects colors instead of a bordered region. Like any mask, the shielded colors can be either protected from or the object of the edits.


Color Swatch

Samples of the active and alternate colors in the toolbar. The top swatch is the active color and the bottom swatch is the alternate color.


Color value

Numbers (values) assigned to a color based on the color model in use. For example, in the RGB model, red has a color value of (100%, 0%, 0% RGB); purple might have a value of (45%, 0%, 56% RGB). Using the CMYK color model, red has a color value of (0%, 100%, 100%, 0% CMYK); purple might have a value of (53%, 98%, 42%, 3% CMYK).


Command

A word or phrase usually found in a menu that opens a dialog box, enters a mode, or carries out an action.


Continuous tone

Images, such as color or black-and-white photographs, where the colors and shades flow continuously from one to another. Continuous-tone images cannot be printed via conventional offset printing; they must first be converted to halftones or some other black-and-white only format.


Control menu

A menu in the upper left corner of the window, common to all windows. You use the Control menu to resize, move, minimize, maximize, or close Picture Publisher's windows.


Control menu button

The button located in the upper left corner of a window that opens the Control menu.


Control Panel

A Windows accessory containing commands for installing printers and other hardware, for installing and removing software programs, for setting up printers and ports, and for choosing program options.


Copy

An Edit menu command that copies a selected portion of an image into memory in the Windows Clipboard. (If no area is masked, the entire image is copied.) The Copy command does not change the appearance of the image.


Copy To

An Edit menu command that stores a masked area of an image as a Named Clipboard, new image, texture, or custom brush. (If no area is masked, the entire image is selected.)


Crop

To define a portion of an image you want to retain and remove the excess.


Crosshair

A controller, also referred to as a joystick, for two interactive settings (for example, Contrast/Brightness). You change settings by moving the crosshair.


Cursor

The entry point for placing text.


Custom Toolbar

A toolbar that you can create and fill with the tools, commands, and macros you use most. You can create as many custom toolbars as you want.


Cut

A command that removes a masked portion of your image and places it into memory in the Windows Clipboard.


Darken

To darken color values. This is similar to the "burning" procedure used by photographers in traditional darkrooms.


Default settings

The preset options built into a program. Use the Options command on the Tools menu to change most of Picture Publisher's defaults.


Dialog box

A window that appears when the program needs information from you before it can carry out an action.


Disabled

An option or command that appears in gray type and is not available.


Dithered

A continuous-tone (high resolution) image converted to single-bit halftones (low resolution). Colors are dithered when the video graphics card and display adapter are not of a high enough resolution to support all colors. Dithering creates the illusion of a color by placing dots of other colors very close together.


Direction keys

The arrow keys (Up, Down, Right, and Left) and the Home, End, Page Up, and Page Down keys. When used alone, the arrow keys scroll across the image on the screen in the direction indicated.

The Home key returns the image to its original size, and the End key returns the image to its previous view.

The Page Down and Page Up keys zoom in and out, respectively, in set increments.


Dodging

A procedure used by photographers in traditional darkrooms to lighten colors.


Dot gain

An increase in the size of halftone dots when they print. Dot gain produces unwanted shadows and colors.


Double click

To press and release the left mouse button twice rapidly without moving the mouse.


DPI

The number of dots (pixels) per inch on the display or hard copy. Most laser printers print at 300 or 600 dpi. High-resolution phototypesetters provide 1270 and 2540 dpi.


Drag

To point to a mask or image with the mouse, press and hold the left mouse button, and move the mouse so that the mask or image moves across the screen.


Driver

A program that translates data from software for use with a specific hardware device. For example, the Micrografx Picture Publisher printer driver allows your printer to understand the printing signals being sent to it from Picture Publisher.


Duplicate window

A window that contains a copy of an image from another window. If you edit the duplicate image, the original is also affected.


Embossing

Raising an image above the surface, as if it is indented from the rear.


Encapsulated PostScript format

An image file output format that is used in many page layout programs. Picture Publisher can store files in this format (EPSF or EPS) but cannot import them for editing because EPSF is designed to be passed on to a PostScript printer.


Erase

To selectively remove sections of image edits that have not yet been applied.


Extension

The period and one to three characters at the end of a filename that identify the kind of information in the file. For example, .TIF is the extension for many Picture Publisher image files.


File type

A format used to define a file. Picture Publisher recognizes different file types such as TIFF, BMP, Targa (TGA), GIF, and EPS.


Filter

Traditionally, a special lens used by a photographer or developer to enhance a photograph (using a softening lens to give an image a misty quality, for example). Picture Publisher's filters provide many of the same effects offered by expensive filtering lenses.


Font

A specific set of characters in a specific typeface design.


Frisket

A protective mask, usually within another mask.


Grab

Capturing a frame onto your computer screen from a live video or video cassette for editing.


Gradient

A gradual fade in color intensity or a gradual fade from one color to another.


Gray value

The amount of gray in an image, where a gray value of 100% is black and a gray value of 0% is white.


Grayscale

An image having multiple shades of gray. Also, the ability of a scanner to capture more than just the gray values of white and black.


Group

A collection of commands in the Command List Manager dialog box contained in a folder. Also an option button that lets you select a group of commands and place them into a folder.


Halftone

An image made of tiny dots of different sizes (like a photograph in a newspaper). The dots in a halftone are equally spaced, so larger dots compose the shadows and smaller dots create the highlights. Halftones can be color or black and white.


Handles

Square boxes that appear on the corners and sides of the bounding box of a symbol when the symbol is selected. You use handles to resize a symbol.


Highlight

The brightest value in a continuous-tone or halftone image.


Hint line

A one-line message at the bottom of the main Picture Publisher window that provides information about a feature.


Hourglass cursor

The pointer changes to an hourglass symbol to indicate that the program is performing an operation, such as saving a file. When the cursor returns to a pointer, you can continue working.


Hue

The quality of a color that makes it different from other colors. For example, an apple's hue is red even though its color value might not be 100% red. The color you use to describe an object is its hue (you would never say the apple is blue or orange). Lightness and saturation, the two other components of color, do not affect the hue (for example, a light yellow banana has a hue of yellow).


Button

A small graphic symbol that represents a command, an option, or a tool. You activate the command, option, or tool by clicking the button.


Image cache

A temporary RAM-like scratchpad area on the hard disk.


Image window

A window that displays your image. Image windows are displayed in the working area of the Picture Publisher window and are manipulated like any window.


Ink correction

Modifies print styles to compensate for tainted inks.


Invert

Reverses colors in an image.


JPEG

An international image file compression standard for continuous tone color and monochrome images.


K

An abbreviation for black, as in CMYK, where K stands for the black printer or black separation.


Kilobyte (K byte)

1024 bytes. This term is often used as a measure of memory capacity.


Lighten

To lighten color values. This is similar to the "dodging" procedure used by photographers in traditional darkrooms.


Lightness

The amount of white or black in a color. Lightness of 100% and 0% creates white and black, respectively. Lightness is one of the three components of perceived color. Hue and saturation are the others.


Line art

Images with only two gray values: black and white. If you save a continuous-tone image as line art, the colors in the image will be reduced to black and white.


Line screen

Also known as screen ruling. This is a measure of the distance between the centers of halftone dots as they repeat along the screen angle. For example, in a 65-line screen at a 45° angle (a typical line screen, or screen ruling, for a black-and-white halftone in a newspaper), there are 65 halftone dots in an inch. Low (coarse) line screens, such as 65 and 85, do not produce an illusion of grayscale as successfully as medium screens,  such as 100 or 120, or high screens, such as 133 or 150.


List box

An element of a dialog box containing a list of names.


LZW compression

A compression function that compresses bitmap files (TIFF files, for example) to a fraction of their original size.


Main Toolbar

The area of the main Picture Publisher window containing the nine Picture Publisher tools: Selector, Mask, Retouch, Filter, Fill, Draw, View, Text, and Color Probe. The main toolbar also displays the Color Swatch.


Map

A graph representing the mapping of color values in an image. A map changes the input values to new output values. Unedited, it represents a mapping of 1:1 (an input of 50% gray is output at 50% gray, for example). You can alter values by manipulating points on the curve (so that an input of 50% gray is output at 75% gray, for example).


Mask

An outline placed around an area to indicate that the area is protected from edits or that edits only occur within it. Masks can also be used to copy or cut out areas of an image so they can be saved and used later. See also Color Shield.


Matrix

The square grid that forms each halftone dot in electronic halftoning. The larger the matrix, the more possible variations of dot size and shape, which creates a better illusion of continuous tone because the transitions from shade to shade can be more subtle. However, when you raise the spots on a single matrix, reduce the line screen.


Menu

A list of commands organized under a title in the menu bar. For example, the Help menu lists commands that provide online help.


Menu bar

The bar at the top of the Picture Publisher window (under the title bar) containing menu titles.


Midtones

The middle values, between the highlights and the shadows, in an image.


Minimize and maximize boxes

The boxes located in the upper right corner of each window that are used to reduce or enlarge the window. The frame around the window also is used to resize the window.


Flip

Flips the masked part of an image vertically, horizontally, or diagonally. Also called mirror.


Mode

A subset of program features specific to a certain task or set of tasks. For example, when you select the Text tool in the toolbar, you are in Text mode. Generally, you can only perform actions related to the mode you are in (for example, you can't draw masks in Text mode).


Moiré patterns

Undesirable and distracting screen patterns created when two or more screens are used to create a halftone.


Monochrome

A single color. Typically, monochrome refers to the color black on a white background.


Montage

A single image created by cutting and pasting other images together.


Mouse

A pointing device that you move across a flat surface to move the pointer on your screen. A mouse can have two or more buttons, which you press to carry out various actions.


Named Clipboard

A file used to store or retrieve pasted images.


Object

An object consists of anything you create in Picture Publisher and transfer through the Clipboard. You can also create objects from masked areas.


Offset printing

The process that prints by transferring ink from a flat plate or cylinder to a rubber blanket. The blanket then transfers the ink to the paper.


Page orientation

The position of an image on paper. Portrait (vertical) orientation displays a page taller than it is wide. Landscape (horizontal) orientation displays a page wider than it is tall.


Palette

See Color Palette.


Paper size

The physical size of the paper in a printing device.


Paste

To insert an image stored in the Clipboard into another image.


Paste From

Inserts an image from a named Clipboard into the working image.


Pivot point

The point around which an object is rotated. In Picture Publisher, the pivot point is the center of a masked or pasted image.


Pixel

A picture element. The smallest unit (dot) of a bitmapped image.


Plugging

A kind of dot gain where areas between dots that should remain open get filled in and become solid.


Point size

A measurement of the height of characters in a font. There are approximately 72 points in an inch.


Pointer

A graphic symbol used to show the current screen location of the mouse. You move the pointer by moving the mouse. The pointer changes shape to reflect the tool you chose.


Posterize

Posterizing gives a "paint by number" effect by reducing the number of color values in an image.


PPF

Picture Publisher Format, a file type, similar to PP5, that uses a compound storage technique to save the Command List and Objects into the same physical file.


Prescan

To take a low-resolution, quick scan of the entire scanning bed.


Press

To press and hold the mouse button momentarily.


Printing plate

The media containing an image that is used to create an impression.


Print spooler

A Windows accessory that creates a print file before printing begins.


Print area

The area, as defined either by a printer driver or by a printer, that can be printed using a specific printer driver or printer.


Process color

Also called full color. The type of printing that uses four printing plates (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) which, when combined, produce a color image.


Registration marks

Registration marks are used to align the separations during printing. Picture Publisher uses the industry-standard circle and crosshairs. The marks appear in the same place outside the printed image on the four sides of each separation or composite print.


Resize

To change the size of a mask or window. Dragging a handle into the mask or window makes it smaller; dragging a handle outward makes it larger.


Resolution

A measurement of data for monitors (usually expressed as pixels per square inch) and printers (dots per square inch).


RGB

Red, green, blue. See also Color model.


Ribbon

The area at the top of the window that displays options associated with the current tool.


Saturation

The intensity or purity of a color. For example, a "reddish" apple is not as saturated as a "red" apple. Zero saturation means that the color has been replaced by its corresponding gray value (black-and-white television images are good examples of colors with zero saturation). Pure saturation (100%) means the color contains no gray. Saturation is one of the three components of color; hue and lightness are the others.


Scanner

A device that transfers images from video or paper into the digital format used by computers.


ScatterPrint

Picture Publisher's dithering program that produces an edge-enhanced line art image from a continuous-tone image.


Screen angle

The angle at which halftone dots repeat, typically 45°, 75°, 90°, and 105°. The most typical in black-and-white reproduction is 45°, since this is the angle in a single halftone pattern that most easily fools the human eye and brain into seeing continuous tone where there is really only line art. For process color printing, each image has four halftones, each with a separate screen angle. The most typical angles used for process color separations are 90° for yellow, 105° for cyan, 45° for black, and 75° for magenta.


Scroll bars and scroll arrows

The bars and arrows at the right side and bottom of windows that allow you to travel vertically and horizontally across the window to see parts of the image that lie beyond the editing window.


Select

To choose a button, command, check box or option, or symbol or part of a symbol.


Shadow value

Typically, the darkest value in a continuous-tone or halftone image.


Shortcut keys

A function key or a mnemonic key, used with the Alt, Ctrl, or Shift key, that executes a command quickly. Shortcut keys appear in the hint line at the bottom of the Picture Publisher window.


Slider

A bar that changes a setting when the wedge underneath it is moved.


Spool

To send a page to a file before printing. When spooling is complete, the page goes into a queue To be printed and you may work in the drawing window again or select another print operation.


Step scales

Bars with different values of gray, printed on the page to monitor the printer's output.


Submenu

Opens when you choose a command with an arrow opposite it. Submenus provide additional commands related to the task you want to accomplish.


Swatch

Traditionally, a sample strip of cloth used to verify the accuracy of a material's color.  See Color Swatch.


Texture

A pattern (rather than a color) such as crushed velvet or woodgrain that can be added to an image.


Threshold

The cutoff point at which the overall color values are either shown or deleted.


TIFF

An image file format. Picture Publisher accepts TIFF files and can save images in this format. TIFF is an abbreviation for Tagged Image File Format, whose specifications were developed by Aldus and Microsoft. There are line art, grayscale, and color TIFFs.


Title bar

The bar across the top of a window that contains the program name (Picture Publisher) or the filename. The title bar also contains the window's Control menu box and maximize and minimize boxes.


Toggle

To alternately turn a function on and off.


Tool set

A group of similar tools that can be used to edit an image and are accessed from the main toolbar.


Trim marks

Marks on your film or paper that indicate to the professional printshop your page size and trim boundaries.


Type style

A standard variation within a typeface family. Common styles include roman (also called plain, normal, or regular), italic, bold, and bold italic. Each style within a typeface family is a unique typeface design of its own. For example, the design of Bitstream Dutch Bold is separate from Bitstream Dutch Roman.


Typeface

The design of a set of characters. Bitstream Charter Roman and Bitstream Charter Italic are examples of typefaces. They share a common typeface family: Bitstream Charter; and they each have a particular style: roman (also called plain, normal, or regular) and italic.


UCR

Undercolor removal. An option used when equal amounts of CMY values appear together, creating a brown hue. UCR replaces the brown with black to reduce the amount of ink used in printing and increase details in shadows.


Value

See Color value.


Vignette

See Gradient.


Window

A rectangular area on the screen that displays a program. The Picture Publisher window can contain several image windows within its working area.


Windows Clipboard

A data exchange storage area for an image area that has been masked and then cut or copied from a parent image.


Error Messages

Are you sure you want to delete (filename)?

Can't initialize the compressed image.

Can't initialize the scanner: (scanner driver name).

Can't open the scanner driver: (scanner driver name).

Cannot write file (filename).

Could not open the Image Cache file in directory (path name).

Error writing to the Clipboard.

Extended name (extended filename) already exists. Do you want to overwrite it?

Input points must be in ascending order.

(Map name) is not a valid map file.

(Mask name) is not a valid mask file.

Not enough memory to continue scanning.

(Print style name) is not a valid print style.

Unable to get video or frame grab hardware error.

Unable to open the Clipboard.

Undo will not work on some operations.

Write failed on cache file directory (path name).


Are you sure you want to delete (filename)?

This is to confirm your decision to delete the selected file.

Click OK to delete the file, click Cancel if you don't want to delete the file.


Can't initialize the compressed image

Picture Publisher discovered an improperly compressed TIFF image.

Open the file in a compatible program and save it in one of the following formats: BMP, TIF, TGA, PCX, or GIF. Use LZW Compression, if available.


Can't initialize the scanner: (scanner driver name)

Picture Publisher cannot communicate with the scanner.

Make sure the scanner is turned on, has the proper cables, and is in a ready state. Make sure that the correct scanner driver has been selected in the Setup Scanner dialog box. Confirm the proper setting for the I/O address. If necessary, reinstall the scanner driver from the original Picture Publisher installation disks.


Can't open the scanner driver: (scanner driver name)

Picture Publisher cannot initialize the scanner hardware.

Make sure that the correct driver has been selected in the Setup Scanner dialog box. Identify proper I/O address for hardware. Reinstall the scanner driver, if necessary.


Cannot write file (file name). The new file requires (file size) bytes of unused disk space. Your disk has only (disk space) bytes of unused space.

There is not enough space on the current disk drive to work with the file.

Locate a hard drive with sufficient space and change the Cache Path in the Options dialog box to read the new Path name, then click OK.


Could not open the Image Cache file in directory (path name)

Either the filename is not a valid DOS file name, you are trying to write over a protected DOS file, or the directory you specified does not exist.

Check the filename being entered and, if protected, unprotect it with the Windows File Manager.


Error writing to the Clipboard

File size is too large to be managed by the Windows Clipboard.

Copy the file to a Picture Publisher Clipboard using the Copy To command on the Edit menu, or create a smaller file and try again to copy it to the Windows Clipboard.


Extended name (extended filename) already exists. Do you want to overwrite it?

The name chosen for your file already exists in the file PPNAMES.INI.

Select a different name for your file, or click OK to overwrite the existing file.


Input points must be in ascending order.

Input values are incorrectly ordered when modifying a color map or a calibration map. Values must be input in the 11 data boxes from 0 to 100.

Determine which data box contains the incorrectly placed value and enter a number that is in ascending order.


(Map name) is not a valid map file.

The map file is not recognized by Picture Publisher.

Confirm the proper file type for your map file. Correct the extension of the file name if it has been incorrectly identified. If an updated file type is necessary, load it using the installation program.


(Mask name) is not a valid mask file.

The mask file is not recognized by Picture Publisher.

Confirm the proper file type for your mask file. Correct the extension of the file name if it has been incorrectly identified. Recreate the mask file and save it using the Save Mask command on the Mask menu.


Not enough memory to continue scanning.

Scanner input requires more room than available on the current disk drive.

Locate a disk drive that has enough room for the memory input of the scanner. Change the Cache Path in the Options dialog box, then click OK.

Not enough space on the current disk drive to manipulate complex edits.

Choose the Manual Apply command on the Edit menu or the Save or Save As command on the File menu to free additional memory. Or locate a disk drive with sufficient memory and change the Cache Path in the Options dialog box, then click OK.


(Print style name) is not a valid print style.

The Print Style file is not recognized by Picture Publisher.

Confirm the proper file type for your Print Style file. Correct the extension of the file name if it has been incorrectly identified. Redefine a print style in the Print Style dialog box, then click Save to save the Print Style.


Unable to get video or frame. Grab hardware error.

Picture Publisher cannot initialize the hardware configuration.

Make sure the hardware is turned on and operating properly. Select the correct device driver in the Setup Grabber dialog box. Identify the proper I/O address for hardware. Reinstall the device driver, if necessary.


Unable to open the Clipboard

Picture Publisher does not recognize the file type contained in the Windows Clipboard.

Copy a bitmap image to the Clipboard and paste it into Picture Publisher.


Undo will not work on some operations.

There is not enough space on the current disk drive to open an undo buffer.

Choose the Manual Apply command on the Edit menu or the Save or Save As command on the File menu to free additional memory. Or locate a disk drive with sufficient memory and change the Cache Path in the Options dialog box, then click OK.


Write failed on cache file directory (path name)

You have run out of disk space on the specified drive.

Close any images that are not essential to immediate editing, or locate a disk drive with sufficient memory and change the Cache Path in the Options dialog box, then click OK.


To define a style for halftone screening

1	On the File menu, click Setup.

2	Click Printer.

3	Highlight the print style to edit.

4	Click Setup Print Style.

5	Click the Halftone tab.

6	Deselect the Use Printer Halftone option, if necessary. This bypasses Picture Publisher's halftone values.

7	Define the shape of dot (traditional halftone dots) by selecting one of the three choices in the drop-down list box.

8	Enter the desired screen frequency in the Frequency lines/inch column to the right of each color swatch.

9	Enter the desired screen angle for each color (in degrees or tenths of a degree) in the data box to the right of the screen frequency.

10	Click OK.


To set up your printer


Lets you type a name for the halftone style, then click OK.


Lets you select the color channel you want to change:  Master, Cyan, Magenta, or Black.


Lets you choose an editing method: Visual or Numeric.


Lets you change the color map visually by dragging the graph points from one place to another.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Restores the currently selected channel colors to their original setttings.


Restores all channels to their original settings.


Opens the Options dialog box to let you specify the number of points on the graph, choose whether to use a grid on the graph, or choose whether to use percentages when specifying the numeric values.


Lets you adjust the gamma of the print style to compensate for inaccuracies in printing images on your printer. Slide this control to the left or right to adjust the gamma. Observe the changes to the curve as the gamma changes.


To edit a print calibration style

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Printer.

2	Click Setup Print Style.

3	Click the File Options button.

4	Click Edit.

5	Choose a color button and adjust the map as necessary.

6	Click OK to close the dialog box.


To set up your printer


Lets you type a name for the printer calibration style.


To add a scanner calibration style

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Scanner.

2	Click the File Options button.

3	Click Add.

4	Choose a directory and the filename for the scanner map file.

5	Click OK to close the dialog box.


To set up a TWAIN device

To set up a scanner


Lets you select the name of a calibration map.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an input value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


Lets you enter an output value for the calibration style.


To edit a scanner calibration style

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Scanner.

2	Click the File Options button.

3	Click Edit.

4	Choose a color button and adjust the map as necessary.

5	Click OK to close the dialog box.


To set up a TWAIN device

To set up a scanner


Opens a menu that contains commands for managing files.


To define options for ink correction

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Printer.

2	In the Select Print Style box, select the print style you want to edit.

3	Click Setup Print Style.

4	Select the Separation tab if necessary.

5	Change the percentages of magenta and yellow inks used to print red.

6	Change the percentages of yellow and cyan inks used to print green.

7	Change the percentages of cyan and magenta inks used to print blue.

To make a change, place the pointer inside the color band between the two colors. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag it one way or the other to reduce the intensity of one of the component colors. The data boxes below are interactive and represent the color shift as a percentage. For specific values, type the percentage directly into the data box.


To set up your printer


To define options for black generation and GCR

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Printer.

2	In the Select Print Style box, select the print style you want to edit.

3	Click Setup Print Style.

4	Select the Separation tab if necessary.

5	Click the Black Generation Map box, and select the name of the map to use. The map area changes to display the CMYK values.

6	Change the percentage settings for Black Removal (GCR), Black Limit,Total Ink Limit, and Saturation Boost, if desired.

7	Note the changes on the map area.

8	Click OK.


To set up your printer


Retouch Tools

Picture Publisher's Retouch tools provide a variety of tools that let you edit images. The Paint tool, for example, mimics the effects achieved when a conventional artist uses a paintbrush to stroke on oil-based paint. The Paint tool has several brush styles and sizes that you can use to perform other tasks such as airbrushing, smudging, and erasing.

Picture Publisher's Retouch tools also provide other tools that are not accessible to the traditional artist, such as the Clone, Texture, and Image Spray tools.

Click an icon below to read more information about the individual tools.

The Paint tool lets you apply a color or shade of gray to an image.

The Clone tool lets you copy a portion of an image to another part of the image.

The Texture tool lets you add a texture to an image.

The Image Spray tool lets you spray stored images onto a base image.

Tip

You can use Retouch tools with masks and color shields, like a conventional artist uses friskets (masks) to protect selected areas during retouching.


About brush styles

About the Edit Brush command

About the Delete Brush command

About the Add Brush command

About the Reset Brush command


Opens the Retouch toolset to let you enhance an image by retouching only the areas that need improvement.

The Retouch tools achieve results like the effects achieved when using several different paint brushes, airbrushes, spray cans, markers, and pastels in traditional artwork. The Paint tool simulates the painting of conventional art or paint on canvas. The Clone tool lets you paint a copy of one part of an image onto another part. The Texture tool lets you paint on a selected texture on the image. The Image Spray tool lets you point and click to paint a series of predefined objects on an image.


Lets you control the rate at which paint is applied. Choose a low pressure setting for light coverage or a high pressure setting for high coverage.


Lets you clone a portion of the image and paint it on another part of the image. Click the source button and then move the mouse to position the source marker to the location on the image from which you want to clone and click the image. Move the mouse to position the destination marker in the location where you want the cloned portion to appear, and click the image again. Click and drag the two markers to paint the cloned image. Press Shift to change the relative positions of the two markers.


When you open the Retouch, Filter or Draw tool sets, click this button to open the Brush Styles dialog box.

You can scroll through the list of categories, collapsing or expanding the categories by clicking the + or - signs. When you find the brush style you want to use, click the brush style name. A red check mark indicates this is the active brush style.


Lets you select the shape of the brush tip.


Lets you define the dimensions of the tool tip. You can increase and decrease the values in small increments by clicking the spin control next to the edit box.


Lets you set the size of the smoothing transition between the line and surrounding image. You define the size as a percent of the drawing tip size. Feathering applies to both sides of the line.


Paint Tool

The Paint tool lets you apply a color or shade of gray to an image like paint on a canvas. Picture Publisher provides different brush styles and modes that combine to create many variations of the Paint tool. If you have the skills, you can actually create (paint) new images from scratch using this tool.

To choose a color for painting, set the active Color Swatch to the color you want. You can use the Color Probe, Color Palette, or Color Picker to do this. If you are painting on an image to remove imperfections, you will probably want to use the Color Probe tool to pick a color out of the image. If you are creating a new image, or adding colors that are not in an image, you can use the Color Palette to choose a color. Of course, you can always use the Color Picker to mix your own color.

After the Color Swatch shows the color you want, you are ready to paint.


To paint on an image

To edit a brush style

To delete a brush style

To add a custom brush

To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command

To reset a brush style


Lets you apply a color or shade of gray to an image like paint to a canvas. You can also use this tool to paint or retouch portions of an image.


To paint on an image

1	In the toolbar, click the Retouch tool.

2	Click the Paint tool.

3	Click the Brush Styles button in the ribbon, and select the desired brush style.

4	Change the options in the ribbon.

5	Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer across the image. The speed with which you drag the pointer affects the appearance of the paint.

6	Release the left mouse button when you complete painting.

7	Repeat steps 5 and 6 to apply additional paint to the image.

Tip

You can add color gradually to an image if you keep the brush size small, use transparency and feathering, and move the pointer in slow brush-like movements.

Note

Press Shift and hold the right mouse button, then drag the pointer to erase your most recent edit.


About the Paint tool!JumpID(>concept, PAINT)

About the Retouch tools

About brush styles


Clone Tool

The Clone tool lets you paint a portion of an image to another location on the same image. You can also clone from one image to another.

The most common use for cloning is removing imperfections or blemishes in an image by using adjacent areas to match variable colors and textures. For example, if a photograph is scratched, you can use the surrounding areas to clone away the scratch marks. This is especially useful if you are retouching an old photograph. Cloning is also useful if you want to duplicate areas in an image.

Picture Publisher's Clone tool consists of two brushes: the source brush and the destination brush. You place the source brush (indicated by an X) on the part of the image to clone. The destination brush copies whatever is under the source brush. The Source button in the ribbon lets you position the source brush precisely.

During cloning, the source and destination brushes move together as a pair. To move only the destination brush, press and hold Shift and move the destination brush where you want to paint the copied image. When using the brush style Mirror Horizontal, Mirror Vertical, or Mirror Both, use Ctrl+Shift to move the source and destination brushes at the same time.


To use the Clone tool

To clone between two images

To edit a brush style

To delete a brush style

To add a custom brush

To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command

To reset a brush style


Lets you easily copy a portion of an image to another part of the image.


To use the Clone tool

1	In the toolbar, click the Retouch tool.

2	Click the Clone tool.

3	Click the Brush Styles button in the ribbon, and select the desired brush style.

4	Change the options in the ribbon.

5	Move the source brush where you want to start cloning from and click the left mouse button.

6	Move the destination brush where you want the clone to go.

7	Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the destination brush to paint the clone.

8	Release the left mouse button to end cloning.

9	Repeat steps 7 and 8 to continue cloning.

Tip

To change the destination and keep the source, press and hold Shift and move the destination brush where you want to paint the copied image.


To clone between two images

About the Clone tool

About the Retouch tools

About brush styles


To clone between two images

1	Open the images that you want to use.

2	Click the Retouch tool in the Main toolbar.

3	Click the Clone tool.

4	Click the Brush Styles button in the ribbon, and select the desired brush style.

5	Change the options in the ribbon.

6	Position the source brush and click and hold to set its position.

7	Drag the destination brush to its position and release the mouse button.

8	Drag the source brush across the image to clone parts of the image.


To use the Clone tool

About the Clone tool

About the Retouch tools

About brush styles


Texture Tool

The Texture tool lets you paint with a texture instead of a color. The effect is similar to stenciling.

Texturing is one of the many ways you can "spice up" an image by adding a pattern or texture to specified parts of an image.

A texture is merely another image that is loaded in the texture library. Any file that can be opened or imported can be used as a texture, but the default format is TIF. You can also add a texture by opening a texture image, masking a portion of it, choosing the Copy To on the Edit menu, and choosing the Texture option.

Each texture is stored and used as a square tile. These tiles are laid side by side as you add the texture. In some textures, like velvet or crushed paper, the "seam" between the tiles may not be noticeable; other textures, like a mountain scene, may produce detectable seams. You can use the merge modes, in some cases, to make the seam less detectable.


To add texture to an image using the Texture tool

To add a texture to the Texture Library using the Copy To command

To edit a brush style

To delete a brush style

To add a custom brush

To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command

To reset a brush style


Lets you paint with a texture instead of a color.


 To add texture to an image using the Texture tool

1	Click the Retouch tool in the toolbox.

2	Click the Texture tool.

3	Click the Brush Styles button in the ribbon, and select the desired brush style.

4	Change the options in the ribbon.

5	Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer across the image to apply the texture.

6	Release the left mouse button when you are finished.

7	Repeat steps 5 and 6 to apply texture to additional areas of the image.


To add a texture to the Texture Library using the Copy To command

About the Texture tool

About the Retouch tools

About brush styles


To add a texture to the Texture Library using the Copy To command

1	Mask the area you want to use as a texture.

2	On the Edit menu, choose Copy To. The Copy To dialog box opens.

3	Click Texture.

4	In the Texture Name box, type a name for the texture.

5	Click Copy. The masked area is copied to a new texture.


To add texture to an image using the Texture tool

About the Texture tool

About the Retouch tools

About brush styles


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Image Spray Tool

The Image Spray tool lets you paint with images instead of a color. You can choose from predefined collections of images included with Picture Publisher or you can create your own image collections.

The Image Spray tool sprays the selected collection of images directly on the current base image. You can point and click to paint a single image at a time, or you can press the left mouse button and drag the pointer across the base image, spraying images as you go.

The images sprayed onto the base image do not become objects that can be manipulated using the Object Manager. Rather, each sprayed image becomes a part of the base image.

Collections of images are stored in the Image Spray Gallery. You can open the Gallery by clicking on the Image Spray Selector button in the tool ribbon. Image spray sets are actually files that contain objects. These files are arranged in categories (folders) within the Image Spray Gallery to let you quickly access the collection you want. You can also add a custom image spray collection by creating an image file in PPF format containing objects, and then adding it to the Custom category in the Image Spray Gallery.

Note

When you add an image spray to the Gallery, Picture Publisher places a copy of the original in the Imgspray folder. Although image sprays collections are PPF files, you cannot open an image spray PPF located in the Imgspray folder. However, if you want to re-edit your custom image spray files, keep the original in a separate folder.


To spray images onto an image

To add a collection to the Image Spray Gallery

To create a custom image spray collection

To delete an image spray collection


Lets you paint with images instead of a color.


Click to open the Image Spray Gallery.


Choose either to spray the collection in Sequential or Random order.


Click this button to overlap the images you are spraying onto the base image.


Lets you define the size of the image you are spraying. You can scale an image spray from one percent to 500 percent. You can increase and decrease the percentage in small increments by clicking the spin control next to the edit box.


Add Image Spray Dialog Box

The Add Image Spray dialog box lets you add a collection to the Image Spray gallery.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Enter the path and name for the file containing the custom images. You can click Browse to help you.


Click Browse to find the path and name of the file containing the custom images.


Type a name for the collection. Descriptive long names containing letters, spaces, numbers, and special characters are permitted.


To add a collection to the Image Spray Gallery


 To spray images onto an image

1	Click the Retouch tool in the toolbox.

2	Click the Image Spray tool.

3	Click the Image Spray Gallery button in the ribbon.

4	Select the Image Spray from the Gallery list. Thumbnails of the images to be sprayed are shown on the right.

5	Click the Image Shown button [image] for an image to remove it from the image collection for this session

or

Click the Image Hidden button [image] for an image to restore it to the image collection for this session.

7	Set the Image Spray options in the ribbon, if necessary.

8	Click the title bar for the base image onto which the images are to be sprayed.

9	Click the base image in the location where you want to paint a single image

or

Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer across the base image to spray images where you move the mouse. Release the left mouse button when you are finished.

10	Repeat step 3 through 7 to spray additional images onto the base image.


To add a collection to the Image Spray Gallery

To create a custom image spray collection

To delete an image spray collection

About the Image Spray tool

About the Retouch tools


To create a custom image spray collection

1	Create a new file.

2	On the File menu, click Save.

3	Type a name for the new file, adding the .PPF extension (for example, SNOWFLAKES.PPF), and then click Save.

The PPF Options dialog box appears.

4	Make sure the Command List box is not selected. Make sure the Save Mask Channel box is selected.

5	Click OK.

6	Open the image file that contains an image you want to include in the image spray collection.

7	Mask the area you want to use as an image.

8	On the Edit menu, choose Copy.

9	Click the title bar of the new file window to bring it to the front.

10	On the Edit menu, choose Paste. The image is pasted in the window as an object.

11	Repeat steps 6 through 10 for additional images.

12	Close and save the file.

Note

When you add an image spray to the Gallery, Picture Publisher places a copy of the original in the Imgspray folder. Although image sprays collections are PPF files, you cannot open an image spray PPF located in the Imgspray folder. However, if you want to re-edit your custom image spray files, keep the original in a separate folder.


To add a collection to the Image Spray Gallery

To delete an image spray collection

About the Image Spray tool

About the Retouch tools


To add a collection to the Image Spray Gallery

1	Click the Retouch tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Image Spray tool.

3	Click the Image Spray Gallery button In the ribbon.

4	Click Add Custom. The Add Image Spray dialog box appears.

5	In the Spray File Name and Location box, enter the path and name for the file containing the custom images. You can click Browse to help you.

6	In the Image Spray Name box, type a name for the collection. Descriptive long names containing letters, spaces, numbers, and special characters are permitted.

7	Click OK. The collection is added to the Custom category in the Spray Image Gallery.

Note

When you add an image spray to the Gallery, Picture Publisher places a copy of the original in the Imgspray folder. Although image sprays collections are PPF files, you cannot open an image spray PPF located in the Imgspray folder. However, if you want to re-edit your custom image spray files, keep the original in a separate folder.


To create a custom image spray collection

About the Image Spray tool

About the Retouch tools


To delete an image spray collection

1	Click the Retouch tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Image Spray tool.

3	Click the Image Spray Gallery button In the ribbon.

4	In the Custom category, select the Image Spray Collection to be deleted.

5	Click Delete Custom. A confirmation dialog box appears.

6	Click Yes. The collection is deleted from the Spray Image Gallery.


To create a custom image spray collection

To add a collection to the Image Spray Gallery

About the Image Spray tool

About the Retouch tools


Shortcut Keys

Key	Action
F1	Opens context-sensitive help.
Shift+F1	Converts pointer to question mark. Click on an item to open help for the item.
F2	Selects all objects.
Shift+F2	Inverts the current selection.
F3	Choose Full Workspace View on the View menu.
Shift+F3	Chooses Acquire on the File menu.
F4	Shows and hides the Main toolbar.
Shift+F4	Chooses the Selector tool in the Main toolbar.
Ctrl+F4	Chooses Close on the File menu.
Alt+F4	Chooses Exit on the File menu.
F5	Switches to the tool last used.
Shift+F5	Chooses the Smart Fill tool in the toolbar.
Ctrl+F5	Chooses Command Center on the Edit menu.
F6	Opens the View tool in the toolbar.
Shift+F6	Chooses the Draw Shape tool in the toolbar.
Ctrl+F6	Chooses the next image if there is more than one image open.
Ctrl+Alt+F6	Chooses Rotate Arbitrary Angle on the Image menu.
F7	Shows or hides the Color Palette.
Shift+F7	Chooses the Draw Freehand tool in the toolbar.
Ctrl+F7	Chooses Flip Horizontal on the Image menu.
Ctrl+Alt+F7	Chooses Rotate Arbitrary Angle on the Object menu.
F8	Shows or hides the Status bar.
Shift+F8	Chooses the Draw Polyline tool in the toolbar.
Ctrl+F8	Chooses Flip Vertical on the Image menu.
F9	Shows or hides the rulers.
Shift+F9	Chooses Expand on the Image menu.
Ctrl+F9	Chooses Flip Diagonal on the Image menu.
F10	Shows and hides the QuickZoom window.
Shift+F10	Accesses the Color Probe tool in the toolbar.
Ctrl+F10	Chooses Rotate 90 Clockwise on the Image menu.
Ctrl+Alt+F10	Chooses Rotate 90 Clockwise on the Object menu.
F11	Shows and hides the Info window.
Shift+F11	Enables and disables the Ruby Overlay in the status toolbar.
Ctrl+F11	Chooses Rotate 90 Counterclockwise on the Image menu.
Ctrl+Alt+F11	Chooses Rotate 90 Counterclockwise on the Object menu.
F12	Shows and hides the Object List.
Shift+F12	Enables and disables direct Mask Channel editing.
Ctrl+F12	Chooses Rotate 180 on the Image menu.
Ctrl+Alt+F12	Chooses Rotate 180 on the Object menu.
Pause	Chooses Stop Macro on the Tools menu.
PgDn	Zooms out of the active image
PgUp	Zooms in on the active image.
Home	Chooses the View Entire Image tool in the View toolset.
Insert	Chooses Invert Mask on the Mask menu.
End	Chooses the Previous View tool in the View toolset.
Ctrl+A	Selects all objects.
Ctrl+B	Chooses Feather Object on the Object menu.
Ctrl+C	Chooses Copy on the Edit menu.
Ctrl+D	Chooses Remove Holes on the Mask menu.
Ctrl+E	Chooses Effects on the Image menu.
Ctrl+F	Chooses Color Balance Joystick on the Map menu.
Ctrl+G	Chooses Color Balance Visual on the Map menu.
Ctrl+H	Chooses Hue Map on the Map menu.
Ctrl+I	Chooses Invert on the Image menu.
Ctrl+J	Chooses Contrast/Brightness Joystick on the Map menu.
Ctrl+K	Chooses Contrast/Brightness Visual on the Map menu.
Ctrl+L	Chooses Posterize on the Map menu.
Ctrl+M	Chooses Modify Color Maps on the Map menu.
Ctrl+N	Chooses New on the File menu.
Ctrl+O	Chooses Open on the File menu.
Ctrl+P	Chooses Print on the File menu.
Ctrl+Q	Chooses Tone Balance on the Map menu.
Ctrl+R	Chooses Remove Mask on the Mask menu.
Ctrl+S	Chooses Save on the File menu.
Ctrl+T	Chooses the Text tool.
Ctrl+U	Chooses Hue Shift on the Map menu.
Ctrl+V	Chooses Paste on the Edit menu.
Ctrl+W	Chooses Create Object From Mask on the Object menu.
Ctrl+X	Chooses Cut on the Edit menu.
Ctrl+Y	Chooses Crop To Mask on the Mask menu.
Ctrl+Z	Chooses Undo on the Edit menu.
Ctrl+Home	Chooses Revert To Saved on the File menu.
Alt+Back	Chooses Undo/Redo on the Edit menu.
Ctrl+Delete	Chooses Clear on the Edit menu.
Shift+Delete	Chooses Cut on the Edit menu.
Ctrl+Insert	Chooses Copy on the Edit menu.
Shift+Insert	Chooses Paste on the Edit menu.
Shift+Space	Chooses Additive Mask Mode.
Ctrl+Space	Chooses the Subtractive Mask mode.
Ctrl+Tab	Toggles between active and alternate colors.
Insert	Chooses Invert Mask on the Mask menu.
Ctrl+Up	Increases brush size.
Ctrl+Down	Decreases brush size.
Shift+Up	Nudges a selected object up.
Shift+Down	Nudges a selected object down.
Shift+Right	Nudges a selected object right.
Shift+Left	Nudges a selected object left.
Ctrl+Shift+Left	Chooses Bring Object To Front on the Object menu.
Ctrl+Shift+Up	Chooses Bring Object Forward on the Object menu.
Ctrl+Shift+Right	Chooses Send Object To Back on the Object menu.
Ctrl+Shift+Down	Chooses Send Object Backward on the Object menu.
Ctrl+Shift+Tab	Makes the Color Swatch black and white.
Escape	Cancels the current action.
Shift+End	Shows and hides the Mask marquee.
Ctrl+End	Shows and hides the Object marquee.
Ctrl+1	Chooses the Rectangular/Elliptical Mask tool.
Ctrl+Shift+1	Chooses the Texture Paint tool.
Ctrl+2	Chooses the Freehand Mask tool.
Ctrl+3	Chooses the Paint On Mask tool.
Ctrl+4	Chooses the Smart Mask tool.
Ctrl+Shift+4	Chooses the Sharpen Filter tool.
Ctrl+5	Chooses the Mask Transform tool.
Ctrl+Shift+5	Chooses the Smooth Filter tool.
Ctrl+6	Chooses the Point Edit Mask tool.
Ctrl+Shift+6	Chooses the Lighten Filter tool.
Ctrl+7	Chooses the Crop tool.
Ctrl+Shift+7	Chooses the Darken Filter tool.
Ctrl+8	Chooses the Paint Retouch tool.
Ctrl+Shift+8	Chooses the Gradient Fill tool.
Ctrl+Shift+9	Chooses the Texture Fill tool.
Ctrl+0	Chooses the Clone Retouch tool.
Ctrl+Shift+0	Chooses the Tint Fill tool.
Ctrl+Shift+A	Chooses Auto Apply on the Edit menu.
Ctrl+Alt+A	Chooses Save As on the File menu.
Ctrl+Shift+B	Chooses Feather Mask on the Mask menu.
Ctrl+Alt+C	Choose Copy HTML on the Edit menu.
Ctrl+Shift+C	Chooses Copy To on the Edit menu.
Ctrl+Shift+E	Chooses Edit Macro on the Tools menu.
Ctrl+Shift+G	Chooses Mask Smoother on the Mask menu.
Ctrl+Shift+H	Chooses Histogram on the Map menu.
Ctrl+Shift+J	Chooses Stroke Mask on the Mask menu.
Ctrl+Shift+K	Chooses Chroma Mask on the Mask menu.
Ctrl+Shift+L	Chooses Load Mask on the Mask menu.
Ctrl+Shift+M	Chooses Merge Mask on the Object menu.
Ctrl+Shift+N	Chooses Paste As New Image on the Edit menu.
Ctrl+Shift+O	Chooses Align on the Object menu.
Ctrl+Shift+P	Chooses Play Macro on the Tools menu.
Ctrl+Shift+Q	Chooses Position on the Object menu.
Ctrl+Shift+R	Chooses Record Macro on the Tools menu.
Ctrl+Shift+S	Chooses Save Mask on the Mask menu.
Ctrl+Shift+T	Chooses Threshold on the Map menu.
Ctrl+Shift+V	Chooses ClipboardBrowser on the Edit menu.
Ctrl+Shift+W	Chooses Play Batch Macro on the Tools menu.
Ctrl+Shift+X	Chooses Create Mask From Object on the Mask menu.
Ctrl+Shift+Y	Chooses Size on the Image menu.
Ctrl+Shift+Z	Chooses Undo on the Mask menu.
Ctrl+Shift+F2	Chooses Print Preview on the File menu.
Ctrl+Shift+F3	Chooses Properties on the File menu.
Ctrl+Shift+F4	Chooses Close All on the File menu.
Ctrl+Shift+F5	Chooses Save Positions on the Tools menu.
Ctrl+Shift+F6	Chooses Arrange Group on the Object menu.
Ctrl+Shift+F7	Chooses Arrange Ungroup on the Object menu.
Ctrl+Shift+F8	Chooses Arrange Lock on the Object menu.
Ctrl+Shift+F9	Chooses Arrange Unlock on the Object menu.
Ctrl+Shift+F10	Chooses Create Scratchpad on the Tools menu.
Tips

To open a FastBits(TM) version of an image in the recall list, press and hold Shift while selecting the image from the recall list.

To open a Low Resolution version of an image in the recall list, press and hold Shift and CTRL while selecting the image from the recently opened files list on the File menu.

To relocate text without leaving edit mode, press and hold Shift and click the left mouse button on the new location.

To move selected objects precisely with the keyboard, press and hold Shift while pressing the arrow keys.

To move an object to the top layer or bottom layer, press and hold Shift while clicking the up or down Layer button, respectively, in the Selector ribbon.

Zoom Tips

To Zoom In, click the View tool in the toolbar, click the Zoom In tool, and then:

Click on the image window for Normal Zoom In.

Press and hold Ctrl, and then click on the image window for Zoom In with Sizable Window.

Drag a rectangle on the image window for a Rectanglar Area Zoom In.

Press and hold Ctrl, and then drag a square on the image window for a Square Area Zoom In.

Press and hold Shift, and then drag a rectangle on the image window for a Draw Rectangle From Center Zoom In.

Press and hold Shift+Ctrl, and then drag a square on the image window for a Draw Square From Center Zoom In.


Specialized How To's

To reduce the rainbow effect on a scanned photo

To reduce the checkerboard pattern on a scanned photo

To create great line art

To duplicate objects

To create a good anti-aliased edge

To make an object fade

To clip an object

To erase parts of an object

To add (unerase) from an object

To create a drop shadow for an object

To merge two images together

To make buffering effects for painting or airbrushing

To create a soft cameo

To create a multi-level threshold

To use masks to fade (graduate) effects

To create an anti-aliased edge for cutting, copying, and pasting

To create a wood grain texture

To create a brushed steel texture


To reduce the rainbow effect on a scanned photo

The rainbow effect is a common problem for anyone who scans in glossy photos rather than matte-finished photos. You can dampen this effect by putting diffusing film on the photo before scanning. Diffusing film is available at most photography stores.


Specialized how to's


To reduce a checkerboard pattern on a scanned photo

1	Scan in the desired image.

2	On the Image menu, click Effects.

3	Select Remove Pattern from the list of Photographic effects.

4	Choose the desired setting.

5	Select Unsharp Mask from the list of Photographic effects.

6	Choose the desired settings.

7	Click Apply.

8	Click OK.

This is a common problem for anyone who scans magazine and newspaper photos. It is called "moiré" and it comes from scanning in a halftone pattern.


Specialized how to's


To create great line art

One of the potential problems with scanning in line art is that it either comes out too light or too dark. The reason is that the computer is deciding to threshold at 50% every time, and that may or may not be right for your particular scan. The following procedure lets you create line art that you will like every time.

This procedure allows you to choose where to threshold the image, rather than relying on the computer to make that decision. You can also do a multi-level threshold to grab up more or fewer levels.

1	Scan your image as a grayscale.

2	On the Image menu, click Effects.

3	Click Unsharp Mask from the list of Photographic effects.

4	Choose the desired settings.

5	Click Apply.

6	Click OK.

7	On the Map menu, click Select Threshold.

8	Adjust the threshold slider, previewing until the desired image is achieved.

9	Click OK.

10	On the Image menu, point to Convert To, and click Line Art.

Note

This procedure requires more memory than a standard line art scan, but once the procedure is complete, it takes up the same memory as a standard line art image.


Specialized how to's


To duplicate objects

1	On the Edit menu, click Copy.

2	On the Edit menu, click Paste.

Tip

Press and hold Ctrl, and press the left mouse button and drag to create a copy of the object or objects.


Specialized how to's


To create a good anti-aliased edge

1	Select the object to be feathered.

2	On the Object menu, click Feather Object.

3	In the Amount box, type 1.

4	In the Edge box, select Soft.

5	Click Feather.

When an edge is aliased, it has jagged edges, or a stair-step effect. Anti-Aliasing removes jagged edges by blending the edges of an object with the surrounding pixels. The resulting object looks as if it belongs in the image in which it is pasted. Picture Publisher makes this process easy with the Feather Object command on the Object menu.

More anti-aliasing may be necessary, depending on how rough the edge is. To anti-alias the object more, increase the feather amount.


Specialized how to's


To make an object fade

1	Select the object(s) to fade.

2	Click the Mask Channel button to turn it on.

3	Click the Ruby Overlay button to turn it on.

Note

You turn on the Ruby Overlay mode so that you can see the image, but it only affects the Alpha (Mask) Channel. This allows you to start and end the effect precisely where you want.

4	Click the Fill tool in the Main toolbar.

5	Click the Gradient Fill tool.

6	Set the Gradient Type to Linear, Color Model to Normal, Sweep to 1, Midpoint to 50%, Transparency to 0%, and Merge Mode to (Normal) in the ribbon.

6	Make sure the active color is white, and the alternate color is black. Then draw the gradient from where you want the effect to start, and to where you want it to end.

7	Click the Ruby Overlay button to turn it off.

8	Click the Mask Channel button to turn it off.

9	On the Object menu, click Merge Mask. The current mask merges with all selected objects, giving them the properties of the mask. In this example, the objects graduate or fade.

The Merge Mask command on the Object menu makes an object look as if it is blending in with the base image or fading away.

You can take this further by varying the options in the Gradient Fill ribbon, such as Gradient Type, and Midpoint.


Specialized how to's


To clip an object

You can use the Merge Mask command to clip objects and put them "behind" pieces of the base image. For example, if you have a picture of a person, and you want the object to be behind the person, you draw a mask around the person, invert the mask, place the object in the desired location, and choose Merge Mask on the Object menu. Any areas outside the mask will be clipped, giving the illusion that the object is behind the person.

Note

To soften the edges of the clipped areas, feather the mask before selecting the Merge Mask command.


Specialized how to's


To erase parts of an object

1	Select the desired object.

2	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

3	Click the Paint On Mask tool.

4	Click the Subtractive Mode button in the ribbon.

5	In the Paint On box in the ribbon, select Object Alpha.

6	Paint on the desired location on the object.

Picture Publisher uses the Paint On Mask tool to erase part of an object, or even restore part of an object that has been clipped in the past. The Paint On Mask tool has two different Paint On modes, Image Mask and Object Alpha. Image mode allows you to draw a mask on your screen by painting. The Object Alpha mode allows you to add or subtract from an object's Mask Channel.

Painting erases the object, allowing whatever is below the object to show through. Set the feathering to a higher number to create a smoother edge.

Note

This tool works on only one object at a time.


Specialized how to's


To add (unerase) from an object

1	Select the desired object.

2	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

3	Click the Paint On Mask tool.

4	Click the Additive Mode button in the ribbon.

5	In the Paint On box in the ribbon, select Object Alpha.

6	Paint on the desired location on the object.

Wherever you paint, hidden portions of the object are revealed. Setting the feathering to a higher number creates a smoother edge.

Note

This tool works on only one object at a time.


Specialized how to's


To create a drop shadow for an object

Note

You can also use the Drop Shadow command on the Object menu to create a drop shadow.

1	Select the desired object.

Note

A blue and black marquee surrounds the selected object. If it does not, then it is not an object, or the Hide Marquee command on the Object menu is chosen.

2	Press Ctrl and click and drag to create a copy of the object.

3	Double-click the Active Color in the Color Swatch in the Main toolbar, and change the active color to black, if necessary.

4	Click the Fill tool in the Main toolbar.

5	Click the Tint Fill tool.

6	Click the copy of the object to fill it with black.

7	Click the Selector tool in the Main toolbar.

8	Move the Transparency slider to 50 in the ribbon.

9	On the Object menu, point to Order, and click Move To Back.

10	Move the shadow into the desired position.

Note

You can use the transform options to shrink, enlarge, and distort the shadow's appearance. The transform options become available when you click on the Transform tool on the Selector ribbon.

11	On the Object menu, click Feather Object.

12	In the Amount box, type 5.

13	In the Edge box, select Soft.

14	Click Feather.

Note

The amount of feathering varies with size of object. The larger the object, the greater the amount you should use, while the smaller the object, the lower the amount you should use.


Specialized how to's


To merge two images together

1	Select an image to be the base image.

2	Click the Mask Channel button to turn it on.

3	On the Mask Channel, draw a linear gradient from the top left corner to the bottom right corner.

4	Return to the base image by turning off the Mask Channel.

5	Open the image to be merged.

6	On the Edit menu, click Copy.

7	Switch back to the original image.

8	On the Edit menu, click Paste to paste the image into the Mask channel of the base image.

9	Position the merged image.

10	On the Object menu, click Merge Mask.


Specialized how to's


To make buffering effects for painting or airbrushing

1	Open the desired image.

2	On the Image menu, click Effects.

3	Select the desired effect.

4	Click Apply.

5	Click OK.

6	On the Edit menu, click Undo.

7	Click the Retouch tool on the Main toolbar.

8	Click the Paint tool.

9	Click the Brush Styles button on the ribbon.

10	Select the Eraser brush from the list.

11	Select the Undo brush from the Eraser list.

12	Carefully paint the effect back onto your image.

Notes

Because you are painting from your undo, there is no way to undo the eraser changes that you are painting onto the image.

You must use auto apply mode for this technique to work.

An interesting creative retouching technique is to paint or airbrush an effect, such as charcoal, onto your image. This effect can be accomplished in Picture Publisher by running an effect on the image, and then using one of the eraser undo brush styles to paint the effect back on the image.


Specialized how to's


To create a soft cameo

1	Open the desired image.

2	Draw an elliptical mask around the desired subject.

3	On the Mask menu, click Feather Mask.

4	In the Amount box, type 20.

5	In the Edge box, select Soft.

6	In the Direction box, select Outside.

7	Click Feather.

8	On the Mask menu, click Invert Mask.

9	Click the Fill tool in the Main toolbar.

10	Click the Tint Fill tool.

11	Double-click the Active Color in the Color Swatch in the Main toolbar, and change the active color to white, if necessary.

12	Click on the image to fill in the area around the selected subject with white.

Soft cameos are used by photographers for effect. These effects are easily reproducible using Picture Publisher's 8-bit masks. They are similar to the filters that photographers use to develop the film to create the cameos on the darkroom.

The higher the feathering you use, the softer the cameo effect. Try different amount, edge, and hardness settings for different effects.


Specialized how to's


To create a multi-level threshold

1	Open the desired image to be thresholded.

2	On the Map menu, click Modify Color Maps.

3	Set the Editing to Numeric.

4	Type on the following values:

Input: 0, 20, 20, 30, 30, 70, 70, 80, 80, 100, 100.

Output: 0, 0, 100, 100, 0, 0, 100, 100, 0, 0, 0.

5	Now switch the Editing to Visual to view the map.

Notice the shape of the map. You can use this technique for any level of thresholding you care to create. All that is necessary is that the first values be 0, 0 and then follow the pattern, outlined above.

Notes

Sometimes it is necessary to threshold more than just a standard binary threshold. For example, if you want your image to be thresholded at 20-30% and 70-80%, then the standard tools will not help you. Instead, you can use the Modify Color Maps command on the Maps menu to create a threshold map.

This technique can also be used with the calibration maps and the black generation maps to create strange scans and prints.


Specialized how to's


To use masks to fade (graduate) effects

1	Click the Mask Channel button to turn it on.

2	Click the Fill tool in the Main toolbar.

3	Click the Gradient Fill tool.

4	Double-click the Active Color in the Color Swatch in the Main toolbar, and change the active color to white.

5	Double-click the Alternate Color in the Color Swatch in the Main toolbar, and change the alternate color to black, if necessary.

6	Draw the desired gradient on the Mask Channel.

7	Click the Mask Channel button to turn it off.

8	On the Image menu, click Effects.

9	Choose the desired effect from the list of effects.

10	Click Apply.

11	Click OK.

Notes

Sometimes there is a desire to have an effect blend into the image, so part of your image looks normal, part of your image looks like the effect, and the middle part is a transition. Picture Publisher can accomplish this task easily with its 8-bit masking capabilities.

You can vary this effect by using different types of gradients, changing the sweep and transition, and changing the transparency of the gradient.


Specialized how to's


To create an anti-aliased edge for cutting, copying, and pasting

Normally when you cut out an object and paste it, it has a rough or aliased edge. Picture Publisher allows you to eliminate this edge by using the Feather Mask command on the Mask menu.

The options for feathering are relatively simple:

Amount--How many pixels wide to make the feather.

Edge--How the transition along the edge will be handled.

Direction--Where the feathering will occur.

The last option is possibly the most important option available on the Feather Mask dialog box. For example, if you have just masked off an area, and outside that mask is an undesired green background, you would not want to Feather Outside or Center, because it would pick up that green area. Instead, you would Feather Inside, giving you a smooth anti-aliased edge. Feather Outside, and Center are more useful for special effects rather than for creating an anti-aliased edge.


Specialized how to's


To create a wood grain texture

1	On the File menu, click New.

2	In the Image Type box, select RGB Color. Change the image size to 3 inches wide by 3 inches high, and set the resolution at 150 ppi.

3	On the Image menu, click Effects.

4	From the list of Distortion effects, click Add Noise.

5	Set the settings to 30% darker.

6	Click Apply.

7	From the list of Distortion effects, click Motion Blur.

8	Set the direction to the left and the distance to 12.

9	Click Apply.

10	Click OK.

11	On the Map menu, click Hue Shift.

12	Move the Hue Shift slider until it has an orange tint.

13	Move the Saturation Shift slider to 25%.

14	Move the Lightness Shift slider to -25%.

15	Click OK.

You can experiment further with wood grain by varying the Hue, Saturation, and Lightness values apply to the texture. You can preview your changes before applying them by using the preview button. You can further modify the wood grain by changing the distance of the blur and the darkness of the Add Noise.


Specialized how to's


To create a brushed steel texture

1	On the File menu, click New.

2	In the Image Type box, select RGB Color. Change the image size to 3 inches wide by 3 inches high, and set the resolution at 150 ppi.

3	On the Image menu, click Effects.

4	From the list of Distortion effects, click Add Noise.

5	Set the settings to 30% darker.

6	Click Apply.

7	From the list of Distortion effects, click Motion Blur.

8	Set the direction to the left and the distance to 12.

9	Click Apply.

10	Click OK.

You can further modify the brushed steel texture by changing the distance of the blur and the darkness of the Add Noise.


Specialized how to's


Color Swatch

The Color Swatch displays two colors: the active color (in front) and the alternate color (in back). You can quickly switch between the active color and the alternate color by clicking the alternate color in the Color Swatch. To change the active color, double-click the active color to open the Color Picker, click a color in the Color Palette, or use the Color Probe tool.

The active color is used when you perform an action. But when two colors are needed, such as to create a gradient fill, the alternate color is also used.

The main purpose of the alternate color is to let you move easily between two different colors.


About the Color Picker

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe


Displays the active and alternate colors that are used when you add or change a color in an image.

The active color appears on top of the alternate color (though it may be right or left). The active color is used when you perform an action.

You can also double click on this tool to open the Color Picker dialog box and choose a different color for the swatch.


Color Probe

The Color Probe tool lets you set the active color in the Color Swatch by choosing a color from an image. The Color Probe tool is useful when you want to select colors that exactly match those in the image.

When you choose the Color Probe tool, you have two choices to set the active color:

The Point Sample tool lets you "browse" the tool over the image, updating the active color in the Color Swatch as you click on colors in an image.

The Rectangular Average tool lets you draw a rectangle over the image. The color sampled is one averaged from all the colors within the rectangle.


To select a color using the Color Probe tool


About the Color Picker

About the Color Palette

About the Color Swatch


Lets you select a tool to sample a color in an image to become the active color in the Color Swatch.


Lets you "browse" the tool over the image, updating the active color in the Color Swatch as you click on colors in an image.


Lets you draw a rectangle over an area of the image to sample colors. The sampled colors are averaged and the resultant color becomes the active color in the Color Swatch.


To select a color using the Color Probe

1	Click the Color Probe tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click either the Point Sample tool or Rectangular Average tool.

3	For the Point Sample tool, click on the image color you want to sample.

or

For the Rectangular Average tool, drag a rectangle around the area containing the colors you want to average.

The sample or average color appears in the Color Swatch as the active color.

4	To select a second color, click the alternate color in the Color Swatch to make it the active color, and repeat steps 1 and 2.


About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Palette

About the Color Swatch


Color Palette

The Color Palette is a collection of colors grouped together for easy access. Picture Publisher comes with many different palettes. You can also create your own. The default palette, called "Default Palette," contains many of the common colors such as red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and white.

The Color Palette contains two menus: File and Edit. You access the menus by clicking the Palette Options button in the Palette dialog box. The commands in the File menu let you choose another palette to open (only one palette can be open at a time), save the current palette, merge the current palette with another, and reset the current palette to the way it was the last time it was saved. The Edit menu lets you perform various functions on the current palette, such as add or delete a color, label a color, or fill the palette with a range of colors.

One common practice is to create one or more palettes for an image you are editing. These palettes contain colors taken from the image (using the Color Probe, for example) so you can easily reach them for touch-up work.

You can create palettes that contain more than one palette. For example, you might create a palette called "Waterfall" that contains common colors found in a picture of a waterfall. If you want, you can create a palette under Waterfall. For example, if the mist contains 10 colors, you might create a palette called "Mist under Waterfall".


To open the Color Palette

To create a custom color palette

To add image colors to the Color Palette

To save a palette

To save a palette with a new name

To merge two palettes

To reset the palette

To undo the last color change to the palette

To delete a color from the palette

To name a color

To find a color in a palette

To fill a range of colors


About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker


To open the Color Palette

1	On the View menu, click Color Palette.

or

Click the Color Palette button on the Standard toolbar.

2	Click the Palette Options button.

3	On the File menu, click Load.

4	In the Select Palette Name box, select the palette containing the colors with which you want to work.

Note

The Color Palette lets you load different color palettes; change existing colors; add, delete, and rename palettes; and insert new colors into existing palettes.


To create a custom color palette

To add image colors to the Color Palette

To save a palette

To save a palette with a new name

To merge two palettes

To reset the palette

To undo the last color change to the palette

To delete a color from the palette

To name a color

To find a color in a palette

To fill a range of colors

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Swatch


To create a custom color palette

1	On the View menu, click Color Palette.

or

Click the Color Palette button on the Standard toolbar.

2	Click the Palette Options button.

3	On the File menu, click New.

4	In the Entries to Fill box, enter the number of colors.

5	Click Set Colors from the Image option, if you want. (This option is available only if an image is open.)

6	Click OK.

Note

After a new color palette is created, you can create new palettes to be added to that set.


To open the Color Palette

To add image colors to the Color Palette

To save a palette

To save a palette with a new name

To merge two palettes

To reset the palette

To undo the last color change to the palette

To delete a color from the palette

To name a color

To find a color in a palette

To fill a range of colors

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Swatch


To add image colors to the Color Palette

1	On the View menu, click Color Palette.

or

Click the Color Palette button on the Standard toolbar.

2	Click the Palette Options button.

3	On the Edit menu, click Insert. The active color in the Color Swatch is added to the palette.


To open the Color Palette

To create a custom color palette

To save a palette

To save a palette with a new name

To merge two palettes

To reset the palette

To undo the last color change to the palette

To delete a color from the palette

To name a color

To find a color in a palette

To fill a range of colors

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Swatch


To save a palette

1	On the View menu, click Color Palette.

or

Click the Color Palette button on the Standard toolbar.

2	Click the Palette Options button.

3	On the File menu, click Save.


To open the Color Palette

To create a custom color palette

To add image colors to the Color Palette

To save a palette with a new name

To merge two palettes

To reset the palette

To undo the last color change to the palette

To delete a color from the palette

To name a color

To find a color in a palette

To fill a range of colors

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Swatch


To save a palette with a new name

1	On the View menu, click Color Palette.

or

Click the Color Palette button on the Standard toolbar.

2	Click the Palette Options button.

3	On the File menu, click Save As.

4	Type a new name for the palette.

5	Click OK. The palette is saved as a PAL file.


To open the Color Palette

To create a custom color palette

To add image colors to the Color Palette

To save a palette

To merge two palettes

To reset the palette

To undo the last color change to the palette

To delete a color from the palette

To name a color

To find a color in a palette

To fill a range of colors

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Swatch


To merge two palettes

1	On the View menu, click Color Palette.

or

Click the Color Palette button on the Standard toolbar.

2	Click the Palette Options button.

3	On the File menu, click Merge.

4	In the Merge Palettes dialog box, click the palette that contains the colors to add to the current palette.

5	Click OK.


To open the Color Palette

To create a custom color palette

To add image colors to the Color Palette

To save a palette

To save a palette with a new name

To reset the palette

To undo the last color change to the palette

To delete a color from the palette

To name a color

To find a color in a palette

To fill a range of colors

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Swatch


To reset the palette

1	On the View menu, click Color Palette.

or

Click the Color Palette button on the Standard toolbar.

2	Click the Palette Options button.

3	On the File menu, click Reset. The Picture Publisher default color palette is restored to the program.


To open the Color Palette

To create a custom color palette

To add image colors to the Color Palette

To save a palette

To save a palette with a new name

To merge two palettes

To undo the last color change to the palette

To delete a color from the palette

To name a color

To find a color in a palette

To fill a range of colors

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Swatch


To undo the last color change to the palette

1	On the View menu, click Color Palette.

or

Click the Color Palette button on the Standard toolbar.

2	Click the Palette Options button.

3	On the Edit menu, click Undo.


To open the Color Palette

To create a custom color palette

To add image colors to the Color Palette

To save a palette

To save a palette with a new name

To merge two palettes

To reset the palette

To delete a color from the palette

To name a color

To find a color in a palette

To fill a range of colors

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Swatch


To delete a color from the palette

1	On the View menu, click Color Palette.

or

Click the Color Palette button on the Standard toolbar.

2	In the Color Palette, click the color you want to delete.

3	Click the Palette Options button.

4	On the Edit menu, click Delete.


To open the Color Palette

To create a custom color palette

To add image colors to the Color Palette

To save a palette

To save a palette with a new name

To merge two palettes

To reset the palette

To undo the last color change to the palette

To name a color

To find a color in a palette

To fill a range of colors

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Swatch


To name a color

1	On the View menu, click Color Palette.

or

Click the Color Palette button on the Standard toolbar.

2	Click the Palette Options button.

3	Click the color to label.

4	On the Edit menu, click Label.

5	In the Enter Color Label box, type a name for the color.

6	Click OK.


To open the Color Palette

To create a custom color palette

To add image colors to the Color Palette

To save a palette

To save a palette with a new name

To merge two palettes

To reset the palette

To undo the last color change to the palette

To delete a color from the palette

To find a color in a palette

To fill a range of colors

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Swatch


To find a color in a palette

1	On the View menu, click Color Palette.

or

Click the Color Palette button on the Standard toolbar.

2	Click the Palette Options button.

3	On the Edit menu, click Find.

4	Type the color's label. Use wildcard characters, if necessary.

5	Click Next to view more found colors.

6	Click Select to choose the highlighted color.


To open the Color Palette

To create a custom color palette

To add image colors to the Color Palette

To save a palette

To save a palette with a new name

To merge two palettes

To reset the palette

To undo the last color change to the palette

To delete a color from the palette

To name a color

To fill a range of colors

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Swatch


To fill a range of colors

1	On the View menu, click Color Palette.

or

Click the Color Palette button on the Standard toolbar.

2	Click the color from which to begin the fill. The fill progresses from the highlighted color to the adjacent color on the right.

3	Click the Palette Options button.

4	On the Edit menu, click Fill.

5	Type the number of colors you want. A higher number gives a wider range of colors.

or

To automatically generate the largest number possible between two colors, click Fill Maximum Entries. Colors that are closer together on the color model (yellow and light yellow, for example) produce a smaller range of colors spaced further apart (red and green, for example).

6	Click a color model (RGB Fill or HSL Fill). If you are not sure which one to use, click RGB Fill.

7	Click OK.


To open the Color Palette

To create a custom color palette

To add image colors to the Color Palette

To save a palette

To save a palette with a new name

To merge two palettes

To reset the palette

To undo the last color change to the palette

To delete a color from the palette

To name a color

To find a color in a palette

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Swatch


New Palette Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you create a new color palette. A custom color palette can help you when you are retouching an image.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To open the Color Palette

To create a custom color palette

To add image colors to the Color Palette

To save a palette

To save a palette with a new name

To merge two palettes

To reset the palette

To undo the last color change to the palette

To delete a color from the palette

To name a color

To find a color in a palette

To fill a range of colors


About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Swatch


Lets you specify the number of colors that you want in the new palette, from 1 to 99.


Lets you create the new palette based on the colors in the current image.


Load Palette Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify the name of a palette to open. It also lets you add, delete, and rename palettes.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Save Palette Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you enter a name under which to save the current color palette.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Merge Palettes Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you select a second palette to merge with the current palette.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Label Color Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you enter a name for a specific color in a color palette.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Lets you give a name to a specific color in the color palette.


Find Color Dialog Box

The Find Color dialog box lets you search for a color by its label (name) in a palette. You can type the label or use wild card characters. An asterisk (*) represents any number of characters, and a question mark (?) represents a single character.

For example, if you type B*, Picture Publisher finds black and blue, but not purple. (Case, upper and lower, is ignored).

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Lets you type the name of a color you want to locate in the current color palette. When the color is located, the name displays in the text window, and the color displays below the text window.


Displays the number of colors associated with a given name.


Lets you go backward in the list of colors found to view the previous color in the list.


Lets you go forward in the list of colors found to view the next color in the list.


Fill Palette Dialog Box

The Fill Palette dialog box lets you add colors to the palette by inserting a range of colors between two color choices. For example, a fill between black and white displays black, increasingly lighter shades of gray, then white.

You can choose the number of color gradients and the color model (RGB or HSL). The RGB model produces intuitive gradients (blue to purple to red, for example). The HSL model creates rainbows between colors (blue to green to red, for example).

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Displays the first color chosen for the beginning point. Click the button to open the Color Picker dialog box and choose another color.


Displays the last color chosen for the beginning point. Click the button to open the Color Picker dialog box and choose another color.


Defines a range with the greatest number of gradients between two colors.


Fills the palette using the RGB model (blue to purple to red) to produce intuitive color values.


Fills the palette using the HSL model to create a rainbow effect (blue to green to red).


Color Picker

The Picture Publisher Color Picker lets you use any of the color models when selecting a color.

You can select a color in the Color Picker by pointing to it with the mouse or by entering values for the specific components of one or more models.

You can use the Color Picker dialog box to choose exact shades or colors by defining HSL, RGB, or CMYK values. You can also intuitively select colors by moving the pointer over hue variations. All the color models are active at the same time. You can work with them simultaneously; if you change a value in one model, the corresponding values change in all other models.

Use the Color Picker when you need to match your colors to a particular program or output format: like RGB for film recording, HSL for matching another program, or CMYK for process color printing.


To select a color with the Color Picker


About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Swatch


Lets you choose the color component you want to adjust. Choices are Hue, Saturation, Lightness, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black.


Lets you quickly change the color select area to show the hues you want to select from.


Lets you intuitively select colors by moving the pointer over hue variations and clicking on the hue you want. The color of the chosen point is shown in the New Color area.


Lets you set the Hue value. As you change a value in one area, the other areas change value also. You can also change the values by moving the cursor inside the visual color select area.


Lets you set the Saturation value. As you change a value in one area, the other areas change value also. You can also change the values by moving the cursor inside the visual color select area.


Lets you set the Lightness value. As you change a value in one area, the other areas change value also. You can also change the values by moving the cursor inside the visual color select area.


Lets you set the Red value. As you change a value in one area, the other areas change value also. You can also change the values by moving the cursor inside the visual color select area.


Lets you set the Green values. As you change a value in one area, the other areas change value also. You can also change the values by moving the cursor inside the visual color select area.


Lets you set the Blue value. As you change a value in one area, the other areas change value also. You can also change the values by moving the cursor inside the visual color select area.


Lets you set the Cyan value. As you change a value in one area, the other areas change value also. You can also change the values by moving the cursor inside the visual color select area.


Lets you set the HSL (Hue, Saturation, and Lightness), RGB (Red, Green, and Blue), and CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black) values. As you change a value in one area, the other areas change value also. You can also change the values by moving the slider inside the cursor color select area.


Lets you set the Yellow value. As you change a value in one area, the other areas change value also. You can also change the values by moving the cursor inside the visual color select area.


Lets you set the Black value. As you change a value in one area, the other areas change value also. You can also change the values by moving the cursor inside the visual color select area.


Shows the original color. Click inside the Original color area to make the New Color area the same as the original color.


Shows the changed color.


To select a color with the Color Picker

1	Double-click the Color Swatch in the toolbar.

2	Select the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) or CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) values.

3	Click OK.


About the Color Picker

About the Color Palette

About the Color Probe

About the Color Swatch


Palette Picker Dialog Box

The Palette Picker dialog box lets you choose colors for 256-color images. You can select a color in the Palette Picker by pointing to it with the mouse.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Shows the original color. Click inside the Original color area to make the New Color area the same as the original color.


Shows the changed color.


Lets you choose the active color to be changed.


Lets you choose the alternate color to be changed.


Text Tool

The Text tool lets you add text to an image, select typefaces and point sizes, and choose text attributes.

Use the Text tool to add short captions or annotations to an image. Text added in this way is useful for producing comprehensives (concepts) or for printing on relatively low-resolution printers (less than 600 dpi). When you apply the text, it becomes a floating object that you can move, edit, and transform.

Tip

Text added to an image takes on the resolution of the image. Because images almost always have lower resolution than your printer, you might want to replace Picture Publisher's text with high-resolution vector based fonts when an image is offset printed or used for presentation graphics.

One way to add high-resolution vector fonts is to export an image to a vector-based graphics program such as Micrografx Designer.


To add text to an image

To move text

To edit text


Lets you add text to an image, select typefaces and point sizes, and choose text attributes.

Use this tool to add short captions or annotations to an image. Text added in this way is great for producing comprehensives (concepts) or for printing on relatively low-resolution printers (less than 600 dpi). When you apply the text, it becomes a floating object that you can move, edit, and transform.


Lets you save your preferences for this tool.


Lets you choose which font to use. You can select from any available Windows font, whether it is a vector or an outline font, including Adobe Type Manager fonts.


Lets you choose the size of your text.


Lets you specify the bold style.


Lets you specify the italic style.


Lets you specify the underline style.


Lets you specify the anti-aliased style. Anti-aliased (feathered) text usually appears smoother than text that is not anti-aliased.


Lets you choose the left justification styles for the text.


Lets you choose the center justification styles for the text.


Lets you choose the right justification styles for the text.


This button is enabled if you choose a font with a corresponding @font which supports vertical text. This is typically available only on far east systems.


Lets you enter a clockwise rotation in degrees for the text. You can enter values from 0 to 360.


To add text to an image

1	Click the Text tool in the Main toolbar.

2	In the Font box, select the font you want.

3	In the Points box, enter the point size.

4	Set any other options in the ribbon.

4	Move the pointer to where you want to insert the text.

5	Click the left mouse button to insert the text cursor.

6	Type the text.

7	Double-click the left mouse button when you finish placing the text.


To move text

To edit text

About the Text tool


To move text

1	Click the Selector tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Place the cursor over the text until the cursor changes to a four-header arrow.

3	Drag the text where you want it.


To add text to an image

To edit text

About the Text tool


To edit text

1	Click the Text tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the text to edit.

3	Double-click the text when you are finished editing.


To add text to an image

To move text

About the Text tool


The Picture Publisher Toolbar

The Main Toolbar gives you easy access to the tools you use most to change and enhance an image.

Click an icon below to read more information about the tool.

Click the Selector tool to select individual or multiple objects for transforming, grouping, or deleting.

Click the Selector Transform tool to resize, reshape, rotate, flip, or move a selected object.

Click the View tool to change the view of an image.

Click the Mask tool to open the Mask tool set.

Click the Crop tool to cut out unwanted portions of an image.

Click the Retouch tool to open the Retouch tool set.

Click the Filter tool to open the Filter tool set.

Click the Fill tool to open the Fill tool set.

Click the Draw tool to open the Draw tool set.

Click the Text tool to select the Text tool.

Click the Color Probe tool to select an active color in the Color Swatch.

Click the active or alternate color to select a color.

The toolbar puts your most frequently used tools at your fingertips. For example, to zoom in on an image, just click the View tool, click the Zoom In tool (marked with +), and then click anywhere within the image. That area of the image is magnified.

Tool options determine how a tool behaves. For example, while using a Draw tool you may decide to draw thick lines instead of thin. You would go to the ribbon area at the top of the window to increase the tip size of the Draw tool.

The tool options you choose remain active until you close Picture Publisher. If you want your new options to be the default for a particular tool, you will need to save them.

You can create custom toolbars and fill them with the tools, commands, and macros you use most. You can create, hide, or display as many toolbars as you want.


To hide the toolbar

To show the toolbar

To move the toolbar

To save tool settings


Choosing a tool

About the power keys


Choosing a Tool

Some tools display a row of more specific tools when selected. This row is called a tool set. For example, clicking the Draw tool lets you choose from three different kinds of drawing tools (rectangle and ellipse, freehand lines and polylines).

Clicking the tool you want activates the tool automatically or displays the toolset. For example, if you click the Text tool, you are ready to enter text in an image. If you click the Draw tool, you then must choose which type of drawing tool you want.

The pointer changes to reflect the tool you have chosen when you move it over an active image. For example, the pointer changes to a magnifying glass when you select the View tool and move it over the image.


About the Picture Publisher toolbar


To move the toolbar

1	Move the pointer over the toolbar.

2	Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the toolbar to another edge of the window.

3	Release the left mouse button.


About the Picture Publisher toolbar


To hide the toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Click the box next to the toolbar name to remove the X.


About the Picture Publisher toolbar


To show the toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Click the box next to the toolbar name to place a checkmark in it.


About the Picture Publisher toolbar


To save tool settings

1	Click the tool and change the settings in the ribbon.

2	Click the Tool button at the left side of the ribbon to save your settings. The next time you use this tool, the saved settings will display in the ribbon.


About the Picture Publisher toolbar


Merge Modes

The Merge Mode list box used in many tool ribbons contains various editing options. When used in conjunction with editing tools, such as Paint or Fill, these options let you combine, or mix, colors using additive or subtractive color theory. You also can selectively change an image according to hue, saturation, or lightness and make modifications to the red, green, or blue channel of an image.


Merge Modes--Normal

Merge Modes--Additive

Merge Modes--Subtractive

Merge Modes--If Lighter

Merge Modes--If Darker

Merge Modes--Filter

Merge Modes--Multiply

Merge Modes--Difference

Merge Modes--Texturize

Merge Modes--Color

Merge Modes--Hue

Merge Modes--Saturation

Merge Modes--Luminance

Merge Modes--Red

Merge Modes--Green

Merge Modes--Blue

Merge Modes--Invert


Merge modes, normal
Merge Modes--Normal

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Normal option is the default setting in the Merge Mode list box. When Normal is selected, Picture Publisher behaves as if Merge Mode is off, and no editing effects are possible.


Merge Modes


Merge modes, additive
Merge Modes--Additive

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Additive option lets you mix colors according to the additive color model. If you paint a red image with a blue brush, magenta appears in the image as a result of the additive mixing of red and blue. If you paint with a green brush on a red background, you get yellow. To calculate the resultant color, simply add the RGB values of the colors together and round down any number over 100 to 100.

An example of additive mixing using green and blue is shown below.

Green	R(0)	G(100)	B(0)

Blue	R(0)	G(0)	B(100)

------------------------------------

Cyan	R(0)	G(100)	B(100)

Adding the R column results in 0, adding the G column results in 100, and adding the B column results in 100. These values represent a color (cyan) that has the value of R(0), G(100), B(100).

Note

Be sure to adjust all numbers so they do not exceed 100. For example, if the total of the B column adds to 140, round the value down to 100.


Merge modes, subtractive
Merge Modes--Subtractive

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Subtractive option lets you mix colors according to the subtractive color model. If you paint on a cyan image with a magenta brush, blue appears in the image as a result of the subtractive mixing of cyan and magenta. If you paint with a yellow brush on a magenta background, you get red. To calculate the resultant color, add the RGB values of the colors together, subtract 100 from the answer, round any negative value to 0, and round any number over 100 to 100.

An example of subtractive mixing using cyan and magenta is shown below.

Cyan	R(0)	G(100)	B(100)

Magenta	R(100)	G(0)	B(100)

------------------------------------

R(100)	G(100)	B(200)

-100	-100	-100

------------------------------------

Blue	R(0)	G(0)	B(100)

Adding the R column results in 100, adding the G column results in 100, and adding the B column results in 200. Subtract 100 from the resultant R, G, and B values. These ending values represent a color (blue) that has the value of R(0), G(0), B(100). Be sure to adjust all numbers so there are no negative numbers and no values over 100. For example, if the B column is -20, round the value to 0; if the B column is 140, round the value down to 100.


Merge modes, if lighter
Merge Modes--If Lighter

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The If Lighter option lets you edit an image based on the lightness values of the image and the lightness value of the editing tool, or source, used. Lightness refers to the "L," or lightness value, in the HSL color model. If the editing tool you are using has a lightness value equal to or higher than that of the image, the color of the editing tool is transferred to the image. If the lightness value is less than that of the image, no change occurs. For example, if you are painting with white (white has a lightness value of 100), all of the colors in the image are affected. If you paint with black (black has a lightness value of 0), none of the colors in the image are affected. Notice that any primary color will paint over any other primary color (except white) because all primary colors have the same lightness value (except black, which has the lowest lightness value, and white, which has the highest lightness value).


Merge modes, if darker
Merge Modes--If Darker

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The If Darker option lets you edit an image based on the lightness values of the image and the lightness value of the editing tool, or source, used. Lightness refers to the "L," or lightness value, in the HSL color model. If the editing tool you are using has a lightness value lower than that of the image, the color of the editing tool is transferred to the image. If the lightness value is not lower than the image, no change occurs. For example, if you paint with white (white has a lightness value of 100), none of the colors in the image are affected. If you are painting with black (black has a lightness value of 0), all of the colors in the image are affected.


Merge modes, filter
Merge Modes--Filter

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Filter option uses a combination of Additive and Multiply to create a filtered effect.


Merge modes, multiply
Merge Modes--Multiply

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Multiply option multiplies the value of the image and the editing tool colors.


Merge modes, difference
Merge Modes--Difference

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Difference option subtracts the value of the editing tool from the value of the existing color to obtain a new color.


Merge modes, texturize
Merge Modes--Texturize

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Texturize option uses the editing tool as a texture surface on which the image is painted.


Merge modes, color
Merge Modes--Color

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Color option lets you replace the color of an image with the color of the editing tool, or source, used. Color is composed of the "H," or hue value, and the "S," or saturation value, in the HSL color model. For example, if you are painting with blue (H=240, S=100), all of the painted colors take on the same H and S values of blue. This results in a color change; however, the lightness values remain the same.

Note

Hue and saturation values have no effect on black or white because the lightness value of black is 0 and the lightness value of white is 100. Any color with the lightness value of 0 is black regardless of the hue and saturation values. Any color with the lightness value of 100 is white regardless of the hue and saturation values.


Merge modes, hue
Merge Modes--Hue

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Hue option lets you replace the hue value of an image with the hue value of the editing tool, or source, used. For example, if you are painting with green (H=120), all colors (except white and black) that are painted become green. Notice that if you paint with red, white, or black, you get the same results because all three of these colors have the same hue value (H=0).


Merge modes, saturation
Merge Modes--Saturation

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Saturation option lets you replace the saturation value of an image with the saturation value of the editing tool, or source, used. For example, if you are painting with any primary color (except white or black) onto any other primary color, only white and black are affected; the other colors remain the same because all primary colors have the same saturation value (S=100), except for white (S=0) and black (S=0). If you are painting with white or black, the colors become grayscale values; remember that grayscale images have no saturation.


Merge modes, luminance
Merge Modes--Luminance

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Luminance option lets you replace the luminance value of an image with the lightness value of the editing tool, or source, used.


Merge modes, red
Merge Modes--Red

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Red option lets you replace the red channel (using the RGB color model) of an image with the value of the red channel source. Only the red channel is affected. The results of using the Red Only option are the same as if you were to split the RGB channels using the Channels command, make changes to the red channel image, and then combine the channels.

To determine the resultant value of mixing the source and image, replace the image value of the red channel with the source value. For example, if you are painting with a cyan brush (RGB value = 0, 100, 100) over a magenta image (RGB value = 100, 0, 100), the result is a color that has an RGB value of 0, 0, 100 (blue). The red value from the brush (0) replaces the red value in the image (100) to create blue.


Merge modes, greed
Merge Modes--Green

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Green option lets you replace the green channel (using the RGB color model) of an image with the value of the green channel source. Only the green channel is affected. The results of using the Green option are the same as if you were to split the RGB channels using the Channels command, make changes to the green channel image, and then combine the channels.

To determine the resultant value of mixing the source and image, replace the image value of the green channel with the source value. For example, if you are painting with a cyan brush (RGB value = 0, 100, 100) over a red image (RGB value = 100, 0, 0), the result is a color that has an RGB value of 100,100, 0 (yellow). The green value from the brush (100) replaces the green value in the image (0) to create yellow.


Merge modes, blue
Merge Modes--Blue

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Blue option lets you replace the blue channel (using the RGB color model) of an image with the value of the blue channel source. Only the blue channel is affected. The results of using the Blue option are the same as if you were to split the RGB channels using the Channels command, make changes to the blue channel image, and then combine the channels.

To determine the resulting value of mixing the source and image, replace the image value of the blue channel with the source value. For example, if you are painting with a green brush (RGB value = 0, 100, 0) over a magenta image (RGB value = 100, 0, 100), the result is a color that has an RGB value of 100, 0, 0 (red). The blue value from the brush (0) replaces the blue value in the image (100) to create red.


Merge modes, invert
Merge Modes--Invert

The Merge Mode list box lets you choose options that define the way colors in an object relate to the colors in the base image and any overlapping objects. Merge modes always operate within the boundaries of other options, such as transparency.

The Invert option lets you reverse the colors of an image. A black-and-white image reverses to look like a photo negative. A color image reverses using additive colors.


Power kKeys
Power Keys

Power keys can speed up an image-editing session. Power keys let you change tool settings without moving to the ribbon area; they can be used with any applicable tool.

Ctrl Keys

Press Ctrl+Left Arrow or Ctrl+Right Arrow to change the tip or brush styles without using the ribbon area.

Press Ctrl+Up Arrow to increase or Ctrl+Down Arrow to decrease the size of the tip or brush styles without using the ribbon area.

Press and hold Ctrl while drawing to force a horizontal or vertical line.

Esc Key

Press ESC while you are drawing shapes to undo what you have drawn. You must press ESC before releasing the left mouse button.

Shift Key

Press and hold Shift to constrain a shape during drawing. For example, press and hold Shift while drawing a rectangle to force a square. Press and hold Shift while drawing an ellipse to force a circle.


About the Picture Publisher toolbar


Color Shield

The Color Shield command on the View menu, and the Color Shield button on the Image Tools toolbar, open the Color Shields dialog box.

You can choose which selected or nonselected colors you want to edit. You can choose to edit selected or nonselected colors (Select Colors) or protect selected colors and edit all others (Protect Colors).

If, for example, you want to change the color blue in an image to green, choose Select Colors from the Shield Mode box in the Color Shields dialog box, click a Probe tool, and then click on blue in the image. You can then use the Paint tool to paint green over the blue in the image. Picture Publisher only paints green on the blue color you probed.

Following the above example, you can also select Protect Colors from the Shield Mode box if you want to affect all parts of an image except for the parts colored blue. Picture Publisher only affects the colors you did not probe.


To use the Color Shield


Opens the Color Shields dialog box to let you choose which selected or nonselected colors you want to edit.


Color Shield dialog box
Color Shields Dialog Box

The Color Shields dialog box lets you choose which selected or nonselected colors you want to edit. You can choose to edit selected or nonselected colors (Select Colors) or protect selected colors and edit all others (Protect Colors).

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Color Shield


Lets you choose whether to edit selected or nonselected colors (Select Colors) or protect selected colors and edit all others (Protect Colors).


Lets you specify whether you want Color Shields to be active at all times.


To use the Color Shield

1	On the Image Tools toolbar, click the Color Shield button. The Color Shields dialog box shows only the colors selected with the Color Shield tool.

or

On the View menu, click Color Shield.

2	Click a Color Select button. Eight shields are available in the dialog box.

3	Drag the pointer over the image to define the color to shield.

4	Click the left mouse button. The color is displayed in the selected Color Select button.

5	Type a range percentage to define how close the shielded color will be to the chosen color. A 0% setting selects or shields only an exact color match; a 100% setting selects or shields all colors. The default setting is 10%.

Notes

A high-range percentage includes many colors similar to the selected color; a lower percentage restricts the colors to only those closest to the selected color.

The percent range is based upon the RGB color model. It defines the deviation from the RGB values of the color defined in the shield. A 100% setting protects or selects all color values in the image. A 5% setting allows a tolerance of plus or minus 5% from the defined RGB value. A 0% setting limits the shield to a single RGB value.

6	Repeat steps 2 through 5 to define additional shields.

7	In the Shield Mode box, select Protect Colors or Select Colors.

The Protect Colors option protects the selected color ranges from edits; the Select Colors option targets the color ranges for edits.

8	Click the On/Off boxes in the dialog box to activate each color shield. The color values are selected or protected for use with all editing tools.


About the Color Shield


Information Button

The Information button on the Status toolbar lets you open the Image Properties dialog box. This dialog box shows information about the image type, size, number of objects, and color management.

Note

You can also display the Image Properties dialog box by choosing Properties on the File menu.


To display the image properties


Enter your name or the name of the person who created the image.


Enter any applicable keywords associated with the image.


Enter any applicable comments associated with the image. For example, you could enter information about effect parameters you used creating the image.


Enter the title of the image.


Enter a subject name for the image.


Ruby Overlay

The Ruby Overlay button on the Image Tools toolbar, and the Ruby Overlay command on the View menu, simulate the thin plastic sheets used to cut overlays on artwork.

Click the Ruby Overlay button to display the overlay on your base image. The color of the overlay is red by default. You can change the color with the Mask Tint Color option in the General section of the Options dialog box.

The color of the Ruby Overlay shows the areas of an image not masked. If you have a complex mask, the Ruby Overlay makes it easier to see what is masked and what is not.

When working with mask channel, you can see how your mask fits on the image by turning on the Ruby Overlay. By working with the Ruby Overlay on, you can make sure the mask you are creating matches an image.


What is a mask?

Using the mask tools


Shows the areas of an image not masked. If you have a complex mask, the Ruby Overlay makes it easier to see what is masked and what is not.


Mask Channel

To display the mask channel, on the View menu, click Mask Channel, or on the Image Tools toolbar, click the Mask Channel button.

The mask channel contains a grayscale image of any mask you create with the Mask tools from the toolbar. You can work directly on the mask channel and edit the mask directly.

With the mask channel displayed, you can use any of the toolbar tools, plus most of the commands in the menus to create and manipulate a mask.

For example, you can paste images into the mask channel and use any of the Mask Transform tool options to manipulate the image.

When working with the mask channel, you cannot see the base image unless you click the Ruby Overlay button in the status toolbar to turn it on.

Whatever you draw or place into the mask channel will become a mask on the image. For example, if you were to fill the mask channel with a brick texture, the brick texture will be a brick texture mask on the image.

The first image below shows a sunset. The second image shows the mask channel filled with a brick texture. The third image shows the brick texture mask on the image after turning off the mask channel. The fourth image shows the brick texture after filling the mask with black.


To create and edit masks as grayscale images on the mask channel


Displays the mask channel. The mask channel contains a grayscale image of any mask you create with the Mask tools from the toolbar. Lets you work directly on the mask channel and edit the mask directly.


To create and edit masks as grayscale images on the mask channel

1	Click the Mask Channel button.

2	Choose any of the toolbar tools to edit the image in grayscale only.

3	Paste an image and manipulate it using the options in the Mask Transform ribbon.

4	View how the mask fits on the base image by turning on the Ruby Overlay mode.

5	Click the Mask Channel button.


About the Mask Channel

About the Ruby Overlay


Standard Toolbar

The Standard toolbar gives you easy access to the tools you prefer to use. You simple click on the tool you want and its associated command is executed.

It is dockable at the top, bottom, left, or right sides of the main window. It can also be made to float on the main window. To move the Standard toolbar, drag it to a location on the window and release the mouse button.


To customize the Standard toolbar


About the Customize command


Displays the current magnification of the active image. Lets you set the magnification by choosing a size from the drop-down list.


Lets you undo the last action taken or you can choose an undo action from the drop-down list.


Lets you redo the previously undone action or you can choose a redo action from the drop-down list.


Opens the Micrografx Media Manager window.


Lets you get help on a window element. Click on this button and the pointer changes to include a question mark (?). Then click on a window element to see a brief description of what that element does.


Opens the Micrografx Designer program.


Opens the Micrografx ABC FlowCharter program.


Undoes the previous mask operation.


Redoes the previously undone mask operation.


View Tools

The View tools let you change how your image is displayed by adjusting the magnification and the parts of the image that are visible.

The View tools let you zoom in and out, and change views.


To create a custom view

To zoom in

To zoom out

To view an image in its actual size

To view the entire image

To use the Previous View tool

To view the image full screen


About the Zoom In tool

About the Zoom Out tool

About the Previous View tool

About the View Actual Size tool

About the View Entire Image tool

About the View Full Screen tool

About the View menu


Opens the View toolset to let you choose a tool to change how your image is displayed by adjusting the magnification and the parts of the image that are visible.

The View tools let you zoom in and out, and change views.


To create a custom view

1	Click the View tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Zoom In tool.

3	Move the pointer to one corner of the area to magnify.

4	Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer diagonally to the opposite corner of the area you want to view.

5	Release the left mouse button.

6	Repeat steps 3 through 5 until you have achieved the magnification you want.

Notes

Use the View tool to choose the magnification and the portion of an image you want to view.

The magnification percentage and the name of the image file are displayed in the title bar of the image window.


 To zoom in

To zoom out

To view an image in its actual size

To view the entire image

To use the Previous View tool

To view the image full screen

About the View tools


Zoom Out Tool

The Zoom Out tool lets you zoom out of the image in controlled steps. It allows you to see more of the overall image with each successive use by decreasing magnification to the nearest 100% increment.


To zoom out


About the View tools


Lets you zoom out of the image in controlled steps. It allows you to see more of the overall image with each successive use by decreasing magnification to the nearest 100% increment.


Zoom In Tool

The Zoom In tool lets you zoom in on the image in controlled steps. It allows you to see more detail with each successive use by increasing magnification to the nearest 100% increment.


To zoom in


About the View tools


Lets you zoom in on the image in controlled steps. It allows you to see more detail with each successive use by increasing magnification to the nearest 100% increment.


To zoom in

1	Click the View tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Zoom In tool.

3	Move the pointer on the image where you want the zoom center to be, and then click the left mouse button.

Note

The image repaints to the next higher 100% increment of magnification.


About the Zoom In tool

About the View tools


To zoom out

1	Click the View tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Zoom Out tool.

3	Move the pointer on the image and click the left mouse button.

The image repaints to the next lower 100% increment of magnification.

4	Repeat the steps to reach the magnification you want.

Note

The Zoom Out tool decreases the magnification by one-half when the magnification goes below 100%.


About the Zoom Out tool

About the View tools


View Actual Size Tool

The View Actual Size tool displays an image at the actual physical size of the captured data.

The View Actual Size tool makes it easy to view the image on screen at its actual finished size when you are visualizing concepts. You might also discover that some detail at higher magnification does not adequately show how the image will look when printed.

Note

For the image to be truly 1:1, you must set the Screen Width in the Units tab in the Options dialog box to your screen width.


To view an image in its actual size


About the View tools


To view an image in its actual size

1	Click the View tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the View Actual Size tool.

or

On the View menu, click 1:1 View.

The image repaints to its actual size.

Note

For the image to be truly 1:1, you must set the Screen Width in the Units tab of the Options dialog box to your screen width.


About the View Actual Size tool

About the View tools


View Entire Image Tool

The View Entire Image tool shows the entire image as large as possible in the window.

Use the View Entire Image button to see the whole image. The image displays at the maximum magnification that fits in the window and maintains the original proportions of the image.


 To view the entire image


 About the View tools


To view the entire image

1	Click the View tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the View Entire Image tool.

or

On the View menu, click Fit In Window.

The image resizes to fill the window.

Note

Press Home at any time with any tool selected to show your entire image in the window.


About the View Entire Image tool

About the View tools


Previous View Tool

The Previous View tool lets you toggle between the current view and the previous view.

The Previous View tool is particularly useful when you want to zoom in to retouch at a higher magnification, but want to return to the larger view (last) to review your changes. The current view and the previous view exchange places when the Previous View tool is used.


To use the Previous View tool


About the View tools


Lets you toggle between the current view and the previous view.


To use the Previous View tool

1	Click the View tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Previous View tool.

The image repaints to the previous magnification.

Note

Press End at any time with any tool selected to revert to the previous view.


About the Previous View tool

About the View tools


View Full Screen Tool

The View Full Screen tool displays the image with nothing else on the screen.

The View Full Screen tool is particularly useful when you want to display an on-screen image as part of a presentation. You also can use this option to isolate an image for a screen capture.


To view the image full screen


About the View tools


To view the image full screen

1	Click the View tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the View Full Screen tool.

or

On the View menu, click Full View.

Note

To return to the main window, press Esc.


About the View Full Screen tool

About the View tools


Getting Acquainted with the Picture Publisher Window

Click an area of the graphic below to learn more about it.


Control Menu Box

The icon, located in the upper left corner of a window, that opens the Control menu. This menu lets you restore, move, size, minimize, maximize and close the main window.


Menu Bar

The menus are in the menu bar at the top of the window, under the title bar. The menus are grouped by category. For example, the Mask menu contains commands that let you load, save, edit, and remove masks.


Minimize, Maximize, and Close Buttons

The buttons located in the upper right corner of each window that are used to reduce or enlarge the window. The left button minimizes Picture Publisher. The center button maximizes the Picture Publisher main window. The right button, which contains an X, lets you exit from Picture Publisher.


Standard Toolbar

The area that displays various tools used with Picture Publisher. The standard toolbar is dockable at the top, bottom, left, or right sides of the main window. It can also be made to float on the main window. To move the Standard toolbar, drag it to a location on the window and release the mouse button.


Ribbon

When you click a tool in the Main toolbar, the ribbon under the Standard toolbar changes to show options that let you specify how you want to use the tool. For example, if you want to change the mode for freehand masking, click the Mask tool on the Main toolbar, then click the Freehand Mask tool. The ribbon displays options for masking, including modes.

The ribbon is dockable at the top, bottom, left, or right sides of the main window. It can also be allowed to float in the main window. To move the ribbon, drag it to the location on the window and release the mouse button.


Main Toolbar

The Main toolbar contains tools that let you edit images. The toolbar contains the following tools: Selector, Selector Transform, View, Mask, Crop, Retouch, Filter, Fill, Draw, Text, Color Probe, and Color Swatch. The toolbar is dockable at the top, bottom, left, or right sides of the main window. It can also be allowed to float in the main window. To move the toolbar, drag it to the location on the window and release the mouse button.

You can also create customized toolbars that contain the tools you use frequently.


Title Bar

The bar across the top of a window that contains the program name (Picture Publisher) or the filename. The title bar also contains the window’s Control menu box, Minimize, Maximize and Close buttons.


Image Window

Different images appear in separate windows within the Picture Publisher main window. You can display more than one image at a time, but only the active window receives the action. For example, when you save an image, only the one in the active window is saved.


Status Bar

The Status bar at the bottom of the main window gives a brief description of the object under the pointer. You can also determine the status of Picture Publisher operations.


ToolTips

ToolTips display the name or function of the tool or button the pointer is over.


Object Manager

All objects that have been created on a base image are listed in the Object Manager window that floats on the image window. You use the Show Object Manager command on the View menu to show the Object Manager.

The Object Manager contains small image buttons for selecting or deselecting each object. An object that is selected appears with a highlighted background. Using the Object Manager, selected objects can be hidden, grouped, deleted, and moved forward or backward (in layers) on top of the base image. Objects can also be cropped, and they can have their alpha channels edited.


Color Palette Window

The Color Palette is a collection of colors grouped together for easy access. Picture Publisher comes with many different palettes. You can also create your own. The default palette, called "Default Palette," contains many of the common colors such as red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and white.


Image Info Window

This window displays information that helps you perform precise operations, such as aligning pixels and measuring sizes of areas within an image. The Info window also provides color (RGB or CMYK) values or grayscale values of the area under the mouse pointer, depending on the image type.


Image Properties Button

Opens the Image Properties dialog box. This dialog box shows information about the image type, size, number of objects, and color management.


Image Tools Toolbar

This toolbar displays buttons that let you quickly open a dialog box or enter a mode. For example, clicking the Ruby Overlay button enters Ruby Overlay mode. This toolbar includes the Mask Channel button, the Ruby Overlay button, the Show Object Manager button, the Color Shields button, and the Edit Object Alpha button.


Layout Tools Toolbar

This toolbar displays buttons that let you quickly open a dialog box or enter a mode. For example, clicking the Show Rulers button displays rulers on the active image. This toolbar includes the Show Rulers button, the Show Grid button, the Snap to Grid button, the Show Guides button, the Snap to Guides button, and the Lock Guides button.


What's New in Picture Publisher 7

You can read a brief description of the new features and upgrades in Picture Publisher 7 below. For more information, click on the feature to read a detailed description.

Selector Transform tool	The Selector Transform tool on the Main toolbar lets you copy, move and transform a selected object or objects.
Image Spray	A new tool of the Retouch tool set, the Image Spray lets you spray stored images onto a base image.
Brush Styles	Picture Publisher has a new metaphor for choosing brush styles when you open the Retouch, Filter or Draw tool sets. This collapsible "tree-view" lets you scroll through the list of categories, collapsing or expanding the categories, and choosing brush styles "on the fly."
Import	The Import command on the File menu lets you import an image file as an object into the active image.
Export	The Export command on the File menu lets you export an object, or group of objects, into a new file.
Page Setup	The Page Setup command on the File menu lets you choose the way you lay out your printed image.
Command Center	The Command Center command on the Edit menu opens the Command Center dialog box to let you edit the Command list.
Copy HTML	The Copy HTML command on the Edit menu saves the image area defined by a mask as an Internet-formatted image to a folder of your choice, and copies HTML-source information to the Clipboard.
Full Workspace View	The Full Workspace View on the View menu hides the title bar and the command menu so that an image can be edited using the maximum available screen.
Object Manager	The Object Manager command on the View menu shows or hides the Object Manager window, which contains object thumbnails and command buttons for manipulating objects.
Web Pattern Viewer	The Web Pattern Viewer command on the View menu lets you view the image as it would appear on an Internet web page as a background pattern.
Grids	The Grids command on the View menu lets you snap to grids, show grids, and setup grids on your image files.
Guidelines	The Guidelines command on the View menu lets you snap to guidelines, show guidelines, lock guidelines, and setup guidelines on your image files.
Wizard Browser	The Wizard Browser command on the Tools menu opens the Wizard Browser dialog box where you can choose one of Picture Publisher's 13 wizards.
Rotate	The Rotate command on the Object menu lets you rotate an object clockwise or counterclockwise by fixed or arbitrary amounts and directions.
Crop	The Crop command on the Object menu lets you crop the currently selected object.
Drop Shadow	The Drop Shadow command on the Object menu lets you create a drop shadow on the currently selected object or on a masked area.
Edit Object Alpha	The Edit Object Alpha command on the Object menu lets you work directly on the alpha channel and edit the object directly.
Wizards	The Wizards command on the Image menu lets you choose one of Picture Publisher's 13 wizards.
Macros	The Macros command on the Image menu lets you choose one of Picture Publishers 18 pre-defined macros.


Web Favorites

Use this command on the Help menu to access Micrografx's home page on the Web using your default Web browser. In addition, Micrografx has provided links and pointers to other Internet sites maintained by third parties relating to image editing. Highlight the home page you want to visit and click Go to Site.

To change an existing URL, click Edit. To add a new URL, click New. To remove an existing URL permanently, click Delete.


What is Color?

The color you see around you is electromagnetic energy, commonly known as light, which radiates at different electromagnetic frequencies. Just as your ear is sensitive to different audio frequencies that you hear as different "pitches," your eye senses different electromagnetic frequencies as colors.

The eye is sensitive to only a narrow band of electromagnetic frequencies. The highest frequency color that we can see is violet. Above violet is the invisible ultraviolet spectrum. The lowest frequency color we can see is red. Below red is the invisible infrared spectrum. Night vision devices often work in this range proving that there is light around us that we cannot see.

Even though our eyes can see only a narrow slice of the electromagnetic spectrum, this slice consists of millions of colors. Your computer monitor may be able to reproduce these colors, but if you look closely at your monitor, you will see that it actually emits only three colors: red, green, and blue. Also, if you look closely at a color photograph in any book, you will see that it is made up of tiny dots in three colors: cyan, magenta, and yellow. It is the mixing of these three colors that creates the millions of colors we see.


Additive Color Model

The Additive color model is built on three colors called the additive primaries. The additive primary colors are red (R), green (G), and blue (B). By mixing these colors in different percentages, any other color can be created. When blue and green are mixed, the resulting color is cyan. When blue and red are mixed, the resulting color is magenta. If all three primary colors are mixed together, the resulting color is white. The Additive color model is best depicted in computer monitors and television screens. Both are composed of tiny red, green, and blue illuminating dots.

Overlapping circles of blue, red, and green light create white at the center and three secondary colors: cyan, magenta, and yellow.

The Additive color model can be illustrated further by looking at Picture Publisher’s Color Picker. Double-click the Color Swatch or any color in the Color Palette to open the Color Picker.

By changing the RGB values in the Color Picker, you can immediately see the resulting color. Set blue (B) and green (G) to 100% and the color is cyan. Set blue (B) and red (R) to 100% and the color is magenta. Notice that if all RGB values are the same, the resulting color is a shade of gray.

The Additive color model is sometimes known as the RGB color model or the Emittive color model.


Subtractive Color Model

The Subtractive color model is built on the subtractive primary colors. The subtractive primary colors are cyan, magenta, and yellow. The colors created by the mixing equal amounts of subtractive primary colors create the additive primary colors. The opposite is also true; the mixing of equal amounts of additive primary colors creates the subtractive primary colors.

Printers use combinations of the subtractive primaries to produce practically every color in the spectrum. Notice when cyan, magenta, and yellow are combined, black results.

The Subtractive color model is implemented in the printing industry. Cyan, magenta, and yellow are three of the four ink colors used in four-color, or process, printing. Printers combine these three colors to produce virtually every color in the spectrum. A fourth color, black, is usually added because ink impurities make it difficult to create a true "black." (When pure cyan, yellow, and magenta colors are mixed together, black is the resulting color.)

The Subtractive color model is sometimes known as the CMYK model or the Reflective color model.


HSL Color Model

The Hue, Saturation, and Lightness (HSL) color model defines a color based on its hue (color), saturation (purity of the color), and lightness (brightness).

Hue

Hue is what we usually define as the color of an object. The hue of the sky is blue, the hue of a banana is yellow, and the hue of an apple is red.

The color wheel is a useful tool in understanding hue and the numeric values assigned to hues.

The lightness axis adds a third dimension to a color wheel, which produces the HSL color model.

The hue of a color is assigned a number from 0° to 360°. Red is defined at the 0° point, blue is 120°, cyan is 180°, green is 240°, and so on. Change the hue (H) values on Picture Publisher’s Color Picker to see the hue change. Also, look at the Hue Shift slider in Picture Publisher’s Hue Map dialog box for another way to change the hue of an image. Open the Hue Map dialog box by clicking Hue Map on the Map menu.

Saturation

The saturation of a color describes the purity of the color. The range of saturation is defined in value percentages from 100% (full color intensity) to 0% (no color intensity). A black-and-white photograph has a color saturation value of 0%. Look at the Saturation Shift slider in the Hue Map dialog box to see how changes in saturation affect an image.

Lightness

Lightness refers to the amount of white or black in a color and is defined in percentages from 100% (totally white) to 0% (totally black). Fifty percent lightness is the pure hue. Look at the Lightness Shift slider in the Hue Map dialog box to see how changes in lightness affect an image.


Understanding Color Correction

For many different reasons, the colors in a photograph may not be the ones you want. Perhaps the lighting was incorrect when the picture was shot, or maybe there was a problem during the development of the photograph. Many old photographs develop an undesirable green hue as they age. Whatever the problem, you can use Picture Publisher to correct it.

To correct an image with color problems, you must first decide what is wrong with the image and then decide which Picture Publisher feature to use to correct the problem. Using the example of a photograph that is too green, you could remove some green color from the image. However, you could also add a contrasting color (magenta) to neutralize the excessive green. Color channels are useful when changing a primary color throughout the image.

Using Color Channels

Many Picture Publisher dialog boxes, such as the Modify Color Maps dialog box and the Color Balance dialog box, offer color channel options. A color channel is an information layer of a color model. The RGB model has three channels: red, green, and blue. The CMYK model channels are cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (K). The HSL model channels are hue, saturation, and lightness. Picture Publisher lets you selectively work on each channel separately or you can use the Master channel to affect all channels equally. To use a color channel, decide which color channel you want to use, select the channel from the list box, and adjust the color until it is correct. You can also split channels into separate images, edit each image individually, and recombine the channels using the Channels command on the Image menu.

Using the Correct Feature

It’s sometimes difficult to know which Picture Publisher feature to use to correct a color problem. Many features seem to perform the same function. For example, you can reduce a specific color in an image by using either the Modify Color Maps command or the Color Balance command. Generally, use the Modify Color Maps command if you want to change many attributes of an image at the same time, such as brightness and color balance. If you want to change just one attribute in an image, use a command other than the Modify Color Maps command, such as the Color Balance command.


Working with Service Bureaus

For the final output of your images, you may want to use the services of a commercial specialist in the type of output you want. For example, you may want to make photographic slides or high-resolution imagesetter prints.

Service bureaus, including slide services, printers, and prepress service bureaus, provide many valuable services. They have the expensive equipment required and extensive training and skills needed to do a professional job.

Primary considerations when transferring files to a service bureau are:

Methods of transfer--Because image files tend to be large, you and the service bureau need to decide how to best transfer the image files. The choices include diskettes, removable hard drives, streaming tape systems, backup tape systems, and electronic transfer (typically by modem connection). Consult with the service bureau to learn what media they can work with. Some service bureaus may be set up for electronic transfers only; others may be set up for diskettes.

Acceptable file formats--The service bureau must have your files in a format it can use. Picture Publisher supports all common file formats such as TIFF, Scitex CT, and DCS.


Opens a submenu containing these management commands: Add, Delete, and Rename.


Opens a submenu containing these management commands: Delete, and Rename.


Lets you set the scaling percentage in the Scale area. For example, if you want the shape to be one-half its original size, set the Scale percentage to 50%.


Opens the Load Shape dialog box to let you load, or add, the selected shape.


Opens the Save Shape dialog box to let you save the selected shape.


Load Shape Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you select a shape to load, add, delete, and lets you rename shapes and determine the size of the loaded shape.


To load a shape


To load a shape

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Mask Point Editing tool.

3	Click the Load Shape button in the ribbon.

4	In the Select Shape Name box, select a shape.

or

Click the File Options button and choose Add to add a shape to the list box.

5	In the Scale box, set the scaling percentage. For example, if you want the shape to be one-half its original size, set the Scale percentage to 50%.

6	Click Load.


To save a shape

To create a clipping path

To create a clipping path from an existing mask


Save Shape Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you save a shape for use later. It also lets you delete and rename shapes.


To save a shape

To create a clipping path

To create a clipping path from an existing mask


To save a shape

1	Make sure there is a mask on the active image.

2	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

3	Click the Mask Point Editing tool.

4	Click once on the base image.

5	Click the Save Shape button in the ribbon.

6	In the Enter Shape Name box, enter a name for the shape.

7	Click Save.


To create a clipping path

To create a clipping path from an existing mask


To create a clipping path

1	Make sure there is a mask on the active image.

2	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

3	Click the Mask Point Editing tool.

4	Click once on the base image.

5	Click the Save Shape button in the ribbon.

6	In the Enter Shape Name box, type a name for the shape.

7	Click Save.

8	On the File menu, click Save As.

9	In the File Type list box, click EPS or DCS.

10	Click the Options button.

11	In the Clipping Path box, click the name of the shape you previously created.

12	Click OK.

13	Click Save.


To save a shape

To create a clipping path from an existing mask


To create a clipping path from an existing mask

1	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Mask Point Editing tool.

3	In the Method box in the ribbon, select Curves.

4	Click the image. The mask is converted to Bézier curves.

5	Adjust the curves to the shape you want.

6	Click the Save Shape button in the ribbon.

7	In the Enter Shape Name box, type a name for the shape.

8	Click Save.

9	On the File menu, click Save As.

10	In the File Type list box, click EPS or DCS.

11	Click the Options button.

12	In the Clipping Path list box, click the name of the shape you previously created.

13	Click OK.

14	Click Save.


To save a shape

To create a clipping path


Edit Menu

The commands on the Edit menu let you undo operations and transfer data to and from the Clipboard. The Edit menu commands also let you specify paste options.

Undo	Reverses the last edit or change to an image.
Redo	Restores the most recent edit that has been undone.
Manual Apply	Manually applies changes to an image.
Auto Apply	Automatically applies changes to an image when you are editing.
Command Center	Lets you edit the Command Center.
Cut	Cuts the image area defined by a mask to the Clipboard.
Copy	Copies the image area defined by a mask to the Clipboard.
Copy To	Copies the image area defined by a mask to a user-defined Clipboard.
Copy HTML	Saves the image area defined by a mask as an Internet-formatted image to a folder of your choice, and copies HTML-source information to the Clipboard.
Paste	Pastes the Clipboard contents into the image.
Paste As New Image	Pastes the Clipboard contents into a new image.
Select All	Selects all the objects in the active image.
Clear	Clears the masked portion of an image from the window.
ClipboardBrowser	Lets you manage and paste saved Clipboard images.
Replace Image	Used during "in-place" editing, lets you replace the current image with a different image.


Undo/Redo

The Undo command removes all changes made to an image since the last time changes were applied. In Auto Apply mode, changes are applied as you proceed to the next edit, so the Undo command removes only the last change. In Manual Apply mode, you control when changes are applied.

The Redo command replaces the Undo command on the Edit menu after the Undo command is clicked. Redo restores the most recent edit that has been undone. You can toggle between Undo and Redo to see an image before and after the latest change.


To undo a change

To redo changes to an image


To undo a change

On the Edit menu, click Undo. The image appears as it did before the last edit.


To redo changes to an image

About the Undo/Redo command


To redo changes to an image

On the Edit menu, click Redo. The image appears as it did before you chose the Undo command.


To undo changes to an image

About the Undo/Redo command


Manual Apply

The Manual Apply command is available only when the Manual Apply option is selected in the Undo panel of the Options dialog box. This command lets you control when changes become a permanent part of the image. After changes are applied, they cannot be removed with the Eraser tool or the Undo command.

Note

The changes are not applied to the permanent image file until you use the Save command.


About the Options command


To manually apply changes to an image


To manually apply changes to an image

On the Edit menu, click Manual Apply.


About the Manual Apply command


Auto Apply

The Auto Apply command appears when the Auto Apply option is selected in the Undo panel of the Options dialog box. Choosing the Auto Apply option means changes are automatically applied; you cannot undo them. It also frees up memory.


About the Manual Apply Command

About the Options command


Cut

The Cut command cuts an area of the image (defined by a mask) to the Windows Clipboard. The cutout area appears as a white hole in the image. The contents of the Clipboard then can be pasted back into a Picture Publisher image or any other Windows program that accepts a bitmap format, such as a page layout or graphics presentation program.

The Clipboard retains the most recently cut or copied image. Each subsequent cut or copy from any Windows program replaces the contents of the Clipboard.


To cut an area of an image to the Clipboard


To cut an area of an image to the Clipboard

1	Mask the area you want to cut out of the image.

2	On the Edit menu, click Cut.

Note

To remove an area of the image without overwriting the contents of the Windows Clipboard, click Clear on the Edit menu.


About the Cut command


Copy

The Copy command sends a duplicate copy of the image area defined by a mask to the Windows Clipboard. The working image is unaffected when using the Copy command. The contents of the Clipboard can be pasted back into a Picture Publisher image or any other Windows program that accepts a bitmap format, such as a page layout or graphics presentation program.

The Clipboard retains the most recently cut or copied image. Each subsequent cut or copy from any Window program replaces the contents of the Clipboard.


To copy an area of an image to the Clipboard


To copy an area of an image to the Clipboard

1	Mask the area you want to copy to the Clipboard.

2	On the Edit menu, click Copy.


About the Copy command

To create a mask using Mask tools


Copy To

The Copy To command is similar to the Copy command, except that the Copy To command copies the image area defined by a mask to a file instead of to the Clipboard. The Copy To command gives you the flexibility to copy to a named file, a new image, a texture, or a custom brush.


To copy a masked area to a file

To delete or rename a file


About the Copy To dialog box


Copy to
Copy To Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify where you want the image to be copied. You can copy the image to the Clipboard, to a new image window, to a texture file, or to a custom brush file.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Copy To command


To copy a masked area to a file

To delete or rename a file!JumpID(>Procedur, Deleting_or_renaming_a_file);CW(concept)


Lets you save a masked area to a Clipboard file.


Lets you copy a masked area to a new image window.


Lets you save a masked area to a texture file.


Lets you save a masked area to a custom brush file.


To copy a masked area to a file

1	Mask the area you want to copy to a file.

2	On the Edit menu, click Copy To.

3	Click a file type. You can choose from Named Clipboard, New Image, Texture, or Custom Brush.

4	In the Clipboard Name box, type a filename.

5	Click Copy.

Notes

When you choose the New Image option, the mask is automatically copied to a new image window.

You can also delete or rename a file using the Copy To command.


About the Copy To command

About the Copy To dialog box

Deleting or renaming a file


To delete or rename a file

1	On the Edit menu, click Copy To.

2	Click the down arrow to the left of the file icon.

3	Click the file you want to delete or rename.

4	Click File Options.

5	Click Delete or Rename, as appropriate. Clicking Delete deletes the name as well as the file from the Clipboard directory.

Note

You can also copy a masked area to a file using the Copy To command.


About the Copy To command

About the Copy To dialog box

Copying a masked area to a file


Name Dialog Box

The Name dialog box lets you enter the name for the item.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Copy HTML

The Copy HTML command opens the Copy To HTML dialog box. This dialog box lets you save an image area defined by a mask (or the entire image if there is no mask) as an Internet-formatted image to a folder of your choice. You can also enter HTML image-source information which is copied to the Clipboard. You can then paste this information into your HTML editor for your image tag.


To copy an image to HTML


To copy an image to HTML

1	Mask the area you want to copy to HTML, if necessary. If you do not mask an area, the entire image is copied to HTML.

2	On the Edit menu, click Copy HTML.

3	In the Image Name and Path box, enter the path and name of the file you are copying.

4	Enter the image size in pixels as you want the image to display in your Web browser.

5	In the Text Alignment box, choose how you want the text to align to the image.

6	In the Text String for Text Only Browsers box, enter an alternate description of the image for people using text-only browsers.

7	Choose your Image Link Options.

8	Click OK.


About the Copy HTML command


Copy To HTML Dialog Box

The Copy To HTML dialog box lets you save the image area defined by a mask as an Internet-formatted image to a folder of your choice, and copy HTML-source information to the Clipboard.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Enter the path and name of the file you are copying.


Enter the width of the image in pixels as you want it to display in your Web browser.


Enter the height of the image in pixels as you want it to display in your Web browser.


Enter the width of the image border in pixels as you want it to display in your Web browser. Type 0 if you want no border.


Choose how you want the text to align to the image on the Web page.


Enter an alternate description of the image for people using text-only browsers.


Click here if you do not want the image to be used as a link on the Web page.


Click here if you want to add a URL link to the image.


Enter the URL link you want attached to the image in this box.


Click here if you want to add a client-side image map name to the image.


Enter the client-side image map name you want attached to the image in this box.


Paste

The Paste command pastes the contents of the Windows Clipboard onto the current base image as an object. The pasted object appears on the base image with a Selector Transform box around it. The ribbon area displays options that you can use with the Selector Transform tool.

Note

When you click the Paste command, a Paste At dialog box may appear, depending on your options setting for pasting objects. The Paste At dialog box allows you to specify the precise location at which the object will be pasted. This option is set using the Enable Paste At Dialog option on the Objects tab of the Options dialog box. To open the Options dialog box, open the Tools menu and click Options.


To paste an image from the Clipboard

To set Picture Publisher options


To paste an image from the Clipboard

1	On the Edit menu, click Paste.

2	If the Paste At dialog box appears, set the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) coordinates to locate the object on the base image where you want it. If necessary, choose a unit of measurement for the coordinates.

Note

If the Paste At dialog does not appear, the object is pasted in the center of the base image. In either case, the pasted object appears in the image window with the Selector Transform tool active.

3	Use the transform tool as needed to move, skew, rotate, or flip the pasted object.

4	Double-click on the base image to release the transform box.


About the Paste command

Using the Paste Options

About the Selector Transform tool


Paste At
Paste At Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify the precise position where you want the object to be pasted on the base image.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Paste command

To set Picture Publisher options


Using the Paste Options

While using the Selector Transform tool, you can use the ribbon area to size, scale, rotate, and skew the pasted image. You can also change the quality and transparency of the pasted image, as well as choose a merge mode.


Lets you mirror the object horizontally. Selecting a button turns on mirroring; deselecting a button turns off mirroring.


Lets you mirror the object vertically. Selecting a button turns on mirroring; deselecting a button turns off mirroring.


Lets you improve the quality of the image. This is especially useful for rotated or skewed images. This option makes the image less jagged.

Most other programs discard pixels arithmetically, regardless of color value. With Picture Publisher, each pixel that remains is newly generated from the color values of the discarded neighboring pixels. Each of the pixels in the original image contributes to the pixels in the new image.


Lets you paste the copied object into a mask on the image.


Lets you set the degree of transparency: the higher the transparency percentage, the more the underlying image shows through.

If the pasted image is set to 99% transparency, it is almost invisible. If it is set to 0% transparency, it is opaque and the underlying image cannot be seen.


Lets you set the degree of transparency: the higher the transparency percentage, the more the underlying image shows through.

If the pasted image is set to 99% transparency, it is almost invisible. If it is set to 0% transparency, it is opaque and the underlying image cannot be seen.


Paste As New Image

The Paste As New Image command lets you create a new image based on the contents of the Clipboard. This is a great way to capture screen shots.


To paste the Clipboard contents as a new image

To capture a screen


To paste the Clipboard contents as a new image

On the Edit menu, click Paste As New Image.


About the Paste As New Image command

To capture a screen


To capture a screen

1	Create the screen you want to capture.

2	Press Print Screen. A screen shot of your window is copied to the Windows Clipboard.

3	Open Picture Publisher.

4	On the Edit menu, click Paste As New Image.


About the Paste As New Image command


Select All

The Select All command selects all objects on all layers. When all objects are selected, you can work on them as a group.

Tip

You can also select multiple objects by holding down Shift while clicking the objects one at a time.


To select all objects


To select all objects

On the Edit menu, click Select All.


About the Select All command


Clear

The Clear command removes masked portions of an image from the image window.

Note

You can restore an image that was removed with the Clear command by clicking the Undo command on the Edit menu immediately after clearing.


To clear an image area


To clear an image area

1	Mask the area of the image you want to clear.

2	On the Edit menu, click Clear.


About the Clear command


ClipboardBrowser

The ClipboardBrowser Command opens the ClipboardBrowser dialog box to let you manage and paste saved Clipboard images. You can create a saved Clipboard image by masking an area and using the Copy To command.


To use the ClipboardBrowser


About the ClipboardBrowser dialog box

About the ClipboardBrowser Options dialog box


ClipboardBrowser Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you view thumbnails or names of clip art images that have been added to the ClipboardBrowser. You can scroll through the Preview area using the scroll bars. You can select a ClipboardBrowser image and click Paste to paste it into your active image or you can simply drag a ClipboardBrowser image from the Preview area to your base image.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To use the ClipboardBrowser


About the ClipboardBrowser command

About the ClipboardBrowser Options dialog box

About the Clipboard Information dialog box


Displays the names of the selected Clipboard images. (If the View Thumbnails option in the ClipboardBrowser Options dialog box is selected, the Clipboard Name area displays thumbnails instead of names.)


If you select a single Clipboard image from the Preview area, you can use the Paste button to paste the selected Clipboard image.


Opens the Options dialog box to let you set options for this function.


To use the ClipboardBrowser

1	On the Edit menu, click ClipboardBrowser.

2	Select a Clipboard name to use and click Paste.

or

Drag the image you want from the Preview area and drop it on your active image. The Clipboard image is pasted to the active image.

3	Click Close.


About the ClipboardBrowser command

About the ClipboardBrowser dialog box

About the ClipboardBrowser Options dialog box

About the Clipboard Information dialog box


ClipboardBrowser Options Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you turn on or off the View Thumbnails, Auto Create Thumbnails, and Create Thumbnails on Copy To options.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Lets you choose whether you want to view thumbnails or file names of the images.


Automatically creates the thumbnails.


Clipboard Information Dialog Box

This dialog box provides detailed information concerning clipboard files. It also lets you update the information in the dialog box.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Shows the extended name, if any, of the file.


Shows the type of the file, for example: TIFF, JPEG, BMP, etc.


Shows the size of the file.


Shows the date the file was last saved.


Shows the time the file was last saved.


Shows the data type of the file, for example: RGB, CMYK, and 16-color.


Shows the width of the image.


Shows the height of the image.


Shows the resolution of the active image.


Indicates whether the image is using the Kodak Color Management System.


Lets you type a description of the file.


Lets you view the previous file information.


Lets you view the next file information.


Lets you update thumbnail information.


Replace Image

The Replace Image Command opens the ImageBrowser dialog box to let you replace an existing image in a program file with a different image.

Note

This command is shown on the Edit menu only when you are doing an "in-place" edit of an image in a container program such as Microsoft Word.


To replace an image during in-place editing


To replace an image during in-place editing

1	In the container program (such as Microsoft Word), double-click the image to be replaced.

2	On the Edit menu, click Replace Image.

3	In the File Type box, select the file format you want.

4	In the Drives box, select the drive you want.

5	Click the folder containing the file you want to open.

6	Select the file.

7	Click Open.


About the Replace Image command


View Menu

The commands on the View menu let you view the image at 1:1, fit the image to the window size, or view the entire image in full screen mode. Additional commands let you show or hide the title bar and menu bar, show or hide the toolbars, show or hide windows, and show or hide rulers.

1:1 View	Displays an image at the actual physical size of the captured data.
Fit in Window	Displays an image so that it all fits into the window.
Full View	Displays an image so that it all fits into the full screen.
QuickZoom	Displays the QuickZoom window, which lets you zoom in and out on the active image.
Full Workspace View	Hides the title bar and the command menu so that an image can be edited using the maximum available screen.
Color Palette	Displays or hides the color palette.
Color Shield	Lets you choose which selected or nonselected colors you want to edit.
Info	Displays or hides the Info window. Used for precise operations such as aligning pixels, measuring sizes of areas within an image, and providing RGB values.
Mask Channel	The mask channel contains a grayscale image of any mask you create with the Mask tools from the toolbar. You can work directly on the mask channel and edit the mask directly.
Object Manager	Shows or hides the Object Manager window, containing object thumbnails and command buttons for manipulating objects.
Ruby Overlay	Simulates the thin plastic sheets used to cut overlays on artwork.
Task Manager	Shows or hides the Task Manager.
Web Pattern Viewer	Lets you view the image as it would appear on an Internet web page as a background pattern.
Grids	Lets you snap to grids, show grids, and setup grids.
Guidelines	Lets you snap to guidelines, show guidelines, lock guidelines, and setup guidelines.
Toolbars	Displays the Toolbars dialog box, which lets you show or hide any of the toolbars, set toolbar options, create your own toolbars, and customize toolbars.


1:1 View

This command displays an image at the actual physical size of the captured data.

This makes it easy to view the image on screen at its actual finished size when you are visualizing concepts. You might also discover that some detail at higher magnification does not adequately show how the image will look when printed.

The 1:1 View command is the same as the View Actual Size tool.

Note

For the image to be truly 1:1, you must set the Screen Width in the Units tab in the Options dialog box to your screen width.


To display the image in its actual size


Fit in Window

This command displays an image so that the entire image fits in the window. Lets you see the whole image regardless of its size. The image displays at the maximum magnification that fits in the window and maintains the original proportions of the image.

The Fit in Window command is the same as the View Entire Image tool.


To fit an image to the window


Full View

This command displays an image so that the entire image fits into the full screen. It displays the image with nothing else on the screen. This command is particularly useful when you want to display an on-screen image as part of a presentation. You also can use this command to isolate an image for a screen capture.

The Full View command is the same as the View Full Screen tool.


To display an image on the full screen


About the View Full Screen tool


QuickZoom

The QuickZoom command opens the QuickZoom window, a view-only window of the image. When first opened, this window shows a miniature representation of the full image. You use the resizable viewing rectangles to zoom in and out on the image in the currently active window.

The QuickZoom window reflects the aspect ratio of the full image. The QuickZoom window maintains the aspect ratio of the full image in the selected image window.

The QuickZoom window also gives you easy and fast access to the functions of the Zoom tool. You use the tool in the QuickZoom window, but the resulting zoom in and zoom out takes place in the active image window. The functions are:

Click the left mouse button and draw a zooming rectangle to zoom in.

Press Page Up to zoom in.

Press Shift+Click to zoom out.

Press Page Down to zoom out.

Double-click the QuickZoom window for full view.

Press Home to fit the image to your screen.


To show or hide the QuickZoom window


To show or hide the QuickZoom window

On the View menu, click QuickZoom. A checkmark appears to the left of the QuickZoom command when the window is shown.


About the QuickZoom command


Full Workspace View

This command hides the Picture Publisher title bar and menu bar so that you can maximize the image editing area of the screen. Selected toolbars remain on the screen. All the menu commands for Picture Publisher are available using keyboard shortcuts and function keys.

This command can be canceled by pressing Esc.

The Full Workspace View command is particularly useful when you want to edit an image while viewing the maximum amount of the screen. When used in combination with other View menu commands, you can further enhance the available editing area of the screen. For example, you can use the Toolbars command to remove any toolbars that you do not need for the current editing session. Then you can use the Fit in Window command to display an image so that it all fits into the window.


To edit an image on the full screen


To view the full workspace

On the View menu, click Full Workspace View.

Note

To return to the main window, press Esc.


About the Full Workspace View command


Color Palette

The Color Palette command displays or hides the color palette. A checkmark appears to the left of the Color Palette command when the window is shown.

The Color Palette command is the same as the Color Palette tool.


To show the color palette


About the Color Probe

About the Color Picker

About the Color Palette


Information

The Information command lets you show or hide the Info window. A checkmark appears to the left of the Information command when the window is shown.

The Info window displays information that helps you perform precise operations, such as aligning pixels and measuring sizes of areas within an image. The Info window also provides color (RGB or CMYK) values or grayscale values of the area under the mouse pointer, depending on the image type.


To show or hide the Info window


To show or hide the Information window
To show or hide the Info window

On the View menu, click Information.


About the Info command


Object Manager

The Object Manager command lets you show or hide the Object Manager window, a moveable window containing a graphical list of the objects that are floating on the active image. A checkmark appears to the left of the Object Manager command when the window is shown.

The Object Manager contains small image thumbnails for selecting or deselecting each object. The thumbnail for a selected object appears with a highlighted background. You can select multiple objects by clicking another object while holding Shift.

Note

Many of the commands presented in the Object Manager window are available from the Object menu.

Using the Object Manager, you can hide, group, delete and crop selected objects. Command buttons are provided in the Object Manager window.

Using the Object Manager, you can move selected objects forward or backward (in layers) on top of the base image. Picture Publisher provides two methods to change the layer in which an object resides. Using the first method, you click a button to move an object up or down one layer. Using the second method, you drag the object to a different position on the Object Manager.

Objects can also be copied by dragging the selected thumbnail from the Object Manager to the image onto which the object is to be pasted.

Using the Object Manager, you can crop objects. Cropping lets you remove unwanted areas of the object by selecting a rectangular portion of the object that you want to keep and discarding the portion of the object outside the rectangle.

An object can also have its alpha channel edited. This lets you change the characteristics of the whole object or parts of it. Then, when you merge the edited alpha channel into the object, it changes the appearance of the object.


To show or hide the Object Manager

To select objects using the Object Manager

To hide or show objects using the Object Manager

To lock or unlock objects using the Object Manager

To group objects using the Object Manager

To ungroup objects using the Object Manager

To delete objects using the Object Manager

To crop objects using the Object Manager

To edit an object's alpha channel using the Object Manager

To move objects forward or backward using the Object Manager


Lets you select the base image.


Lets you select an object, name the object, show or hide the object, and lock or unlock the object. You can also drag this object to another position in the Object Manager window to change its relative layer.


Lets you group selected objects. Also lets you ungroup previously grouped objects.


Lets you delete selected objects.


Lets you crop selected objects.


Lets you edit the alpha channel of  selected objects.


To show or hide the Object Manager

On the View menu, click Object Manager.


About the Object Manager command

What is an object?

Using the Object Manager


To show or hide an object in the Object Manager
To show or hide objects in the Object Manager

Notes

This feature lets you temporarily remove an object from floating over the base image. Hidden objects do not appear on the base image. They also cannot be selected for additional operations within the Object Manager window.

Do not confuse this command with the Hide Marquee command on the Object menu.

1	If necessary, scroll the Object Manager window to display the image of the object you want.

2	Click the object to select it.

3	Click the Object Shown button [image] for the object to hide it

or

Click the Object Hidden button [image] for the object to show it.


To select or deselect an object in the Object Manager
To select or deselect objects in the Object Manager

Note

To select an object floating on the base image, you can also simply click the object. Selected objects show a highlighted background in the Object Manager regardless of the selection method used. Deselected objects show a white background.

1	If necessary, scroll the Object Manager window to display the image of the object you want.

2	Click the object that you want to select or deselect.

3	Press Enter and click any additional objects you want.


To lock or unlock an object in the Object Manager
To lock or unlock objects using the Object Manager

Note

This feature lets you lock/unlock an object on the base image. Locking an object prevents any inadvertent editing of the object. Locked objects cannot be moved, deleted, or cut. This command is also available in the Object menu.

1	If necessary, scroll the Object Manager window to display the images of the object you want.

2	Click the object to select it.

3	Click the Object Unlocked button [image] for the object to lock it

or

Click the Object Locked button [image] for the object to unlock it.


To group objects using the Object Manager

Note

This feature lets you group two or more objects. After the objects are grouped, Picture Publisher considers the objects to be one object. This command is also available in the Object menu.

1	If necessary, scroll the Object Manager window to display the images of the objects you want.

2	Click the first object to select it, press and hold Shift, and click the additional objects to be grouped.

3	Click the Group button [image].


To ungroup objects using the Object Manager
To ungroup objects in the Object Manager

Note

This feature lets you ungroup a previously grouped set of objects. This command is also available in the Object menu.

1	If necessary, scroll the Object Manager window to display the image of at least one of objects in the group you want.

2	Click the group.

3	Click the Group button [image].


To delete objects using the Object Manager
To delete objects in the Object Manager

Note

This feature lets you delete a selected object or group of objects.

1	If necessary, scroll the Object Manager window to display the images of the objects you want.

2	Click the first object to select it, press and hold Shift, and click the additional objects to be deleted.

3	Click the Delete button [image].


To crop objects using the Object Manager
To crop objects in the Object Manager

Note

This feature lets you crop a selected object or group of objects.

1	If necessary, scroll the Object Manager window to display the images of the objects you want.

2	Click the first object to select it, press and hold Shift, and click the additional objects to be cropped.

3	Click the Crop button [image].

4	In the Method list box in the ribbon, select a cropping method.

If you choose Constrain Aspect, type values for the Width and Height.

If you choose Constrain Size, type values for the Width and Height and select a unit of measure, if necessary.

5	Click where you want to start the cropping rectangle. Press the left mouse button to move the rectangle while you are drawing it.

In Freeform and Constrain Aspect, you drag a rectangle; in Constrain Size, you position a box.

6	When the rectangle is the size and location you want, release the left mouse button to crop the image.


To edit the alpha channel of objects using the Object Manager
To edit the alpha channel of objects in the Object Manager

Note

This feature lets you edit the alpha channel of an object or group of objects. This lets you change the characteristics of the whole object or parts of it. In this example, you select an object and edit its alpha channel to include a gradient subtractive mask. This makes the object transparent.

1	If necessary, scroll the Object Manager window to display the images of the objects you want.

2	Click an object to select it.

3	Click the Alpha Channel button [image].

4	Click the Mask tool in the Main toolbar.

5	Click the Shape Mask tool.

6	Click Subtractive Mode in the ribbon.

8	In the Shape box in the ribbon, select the circle.

9	Draw a circular mask on the object.

10	Click the Fill tool in the Main toolbar.

11	Click the Gradient Fill tool.

12	In the Gradient Type box in the ribbon, select Radial.

13	Move the mouse pointer over the center of the object mask and then drag from the center to the outside edge.

14	Click the Alpha Channel button [image].


To move objects forward or backward using the Object Manager

Note

This feature changes the layers in which objects float on the base image. You can also change the layer in which an object floats by dragging the object up or down within the Object Manager. Commands for this feature are also available in the Object menu.

1	If necessary, scroll the Object Manager window to display the images of the objects you want.

2	Click the first object to select it, press and hold Shift, and click the additional objects to be moved.

3	Click the Move Up button [image] to move the selected object up one layer

or

Click the Move Down button [image] to move the selected object down one layer.

Tip

To move the object to the front or back layer, press Shift while clicking the Up or Down button, respectively.


Task Manager

The Task Manager command lets you show or hide the Task Manager window, which lets you manage multiple threaded tasks by pausing, stopping, and resuming threaded operations. A checkmark appears to the left of the Image Task Manager command when the window is shown.

This window lets you manage multiple threaded tasks. It has three buttons that let you stop, pause, and resume threaded operations. A progress indicator shows the percentage of completion of each task.


To show or hide the Task Manager

To manage multiple tasks


To show or hide the Task Manager

On the View menu, click Task Manager.


To manage multiple threaded tasks

About the Task Manager


Lets you stop the selected operation.


Lets you pause a selected operation.


Lets you resume a selected paused operation.


Lets you select an operation to manage. Each operation's progress is shown by a bar indicator


To manage multiple tasks

1	On the View menu, click Image Task Manager, if necessary.

2	To stop a task, click on the task in the Image Task Manager window and then click the Stop button.

To pause a task, click on the task and then click the Pause button.

To resume a paused task, click on the task and then click the Resume button.


To show or hide the Task Manager

About the Task Manager


Web Pattern Viewer

The Pattern Window command lets you show or hide the Pattern Window, which lets you view the image as it would appear on an Internet web page as a background pattern. A checkmark appears to the left of the Pattern Window command on the View menu when the window is shown.

This window also lets you see how text in different colors appears when superimposed on the image. This can help you decide a good color to use for your text when developing pages for the Internet.

Note

For best results, maximize the Pattern window.

Most Picture Publisher editing tools and commands are unavailable when the Pattern window is at the front. Editing the image within the Pattern window is not permitted. There are some commands on the View menu that are available only when the Pattern Window is at the front. They include:

Zoom	Lets you zoom in and out on the Pattern window image in predetermined magnifications.
Show Text	Shows or hides the sample text in the Pattern window.
Pattern View Options	Lets you specify default settings for the Pattern window.


To show or hide the Web Pattern View window


Zoom (Web Pattern Viewer)

The Zoom command opens a submenu that lets you select a magnification at which you want to view the Pattern Window. By default the Pattern window is displayed at 100% magnification. You can zoom out to 10%, 25%, or 50% and you can zoom in to 200% or 300%.


To show or hide the Web Pattern View window

On the View menu, click Pattern Window.


Show Text (Web Pattern Viewer)

The Show Text command shows or hides the sample text on the Web Pattern View window.


To show or hide text on the Web Pattern View window

On the View menu, click Show Text.


About the Web Pattern Viewer command


Pattern View Options (Web Pattern Viewer)

Picture Publisher lets you set preferences for viewing the Pattern window. This command opens the Pattern Options dialog box which contains two options categories, Overlay Options and Background Tile.


To set Web Pattern View window options


To set Web Pattern View window options

1	On the View menu, click Pattern View Options.

2	Choose the Overlay Options.

3	Choose the Background Tile options.

4	Click OK.


Pattern View Options dialog box
Pattern Options Dialog Box

Picture Publisher lets you customize how you work with the Pattern window. You can set preferences with the Pattern View Options command on the View menu. The Pattern Options dialog box contains two options categories, Overlay Options and Background Tile.

Overlay Options

The Overlay Options let you choose defaults for overlays to be viewed on top of the background pattern. This can simplify the task of choosing an attractive combination of colors (for the background pattern) and any text or images that overlay the background on your Web page.

Background Tile

The Background Tile options let you specify the source of the tiled background image.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Pattern View Options command


Lets you overlay text of different colors on the background.


Lets you specify an image file to overlay the background. A Browse button is provided for your convenience, in case you don't remember the location or name of the source file.


Uses the current image as the source of the background.


Lets you specify an image file as the source of the background. A Browse button is provided for your convenience, in case you don't remember the location or name of the source file.


Rulers

The Rulers command lets you show and hide vertical and horizontal rulers in the active image window. A checkmark appears to the left of the Rulers command when the rulers are shown.


To show or hide rulers


To show or hide rulers

On the View menu, click Rulers.


About the Rulers command


Grids

The Grids command lets you snap to grids, show grids and setup grids. A grid is a series of horizontal and vertical dots that criss-cross the image area.


About the Snap To Grid command

About the Show Grid command

About the Grid Setup command


Snap To Grid

The Snap To Grid command lets you snap to the grid in the active image window. A checkmark appears to the left of the Snap To Grid command when this option is active.


About the Grid Setup command

About the Show Grid command


To snap to the grid


To snap to the grid

On the View menu, point to Grids, and click Snap To Grid.


About the Snap To Grid command


Show grid
Show Grid Command

The Show Grid command lets you show and hide the grid in the active image window. A checkmark appears to the left of the Show Grid command when the grid is shown.


About the Grid Setup command

About the Snap To Grid command


To show the grid


To show the grid

On the View menu, point to Grids, and click Show Grid.


About the Show Grid command


Grid Setup

The Grid Setup command lets you set the options for grids in the active image window. A grid is a series of horizontal and vertical dots that criss-cross the image area. You can snap to the grid for more exact placement.


About the Show Grid command

About the Snap To Grid command


To set grid options


To set grid options

1	On the View menu, point to Grids, and click Grid Setup.

2	Select any options you want.

3	Click Ok.


About the Grid Setup command


Grid Setup Dialog Box

The Grid Setup dialog box lets you set the options for grids in the active image window.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Grid Setup command


Displays the current unit of measurement: inches, millimeters (mm), centimeters (cm), or pixels. Lets you choose the units you want to use.


Lets you set the horizontal spacing between grid dots using the Grid Units.


Lets you set the vertical spacing between grid dots using the Grid Units.


If you check this option, changing the width automatically changes the height proportionally.


Lets lets you show and hide the grid in the active image window.


Lets you snap to the grid in the active image window.


Guidelines

A guideline is a non-printing line that provides an easy way to align objects. Guidelines can help organize the layout of your image by guiding the placement of your objects. You can use guidelines as visual cues for where to place objects, or you can snap objects to guidelines for more exact placement.

Using the mouse, you can quickly add, move, and delete guidelines. Using the Guides Manager, you can define precisely a guideline's location, add multiple guidelines, and set the color of guidelines.

You can lock guidelines to prevent them from being moved accidentally, and hide guidelines when you don't need to see them.

Guidelines appear on all images, and are saved with your image if you choose the PPF format.


To add a guide using the mouse

To delete a guide using the mouse


About the Snap To Guides command

About the Show Guides command

About the Lock Guides command

About the Guides Manager command


To add a guide using the mouse

1	Move the Selector tool to the top or side ruler (for a horizontal or vertical guideline, respectively).

2	Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag a guide to the desired position in the image.

3	Release the left mouse button.

Tips

You can add as many guidelines as you need.

If guides are not locked, you can move a guide by dragging it with the Selector tool.

To delete a guide, just drag and drop it onto the ruler with the Selector tool.


About the Guides command


To delete a guide using the mouse

1	Make sure the guides are unlocked. On the View menu, point to Guidelines, and click Lock Guides to deselect it, if necessary.

2	Move the Selector tool to the guide you want to delete.

3	Drag the guide onto the ruler.

Tip

You can also delete a guide, or delete all guides, using the Guides Manager.


Snap To Guides

The Snap To Guides command lets you snap to the guidelines in the active image window. A checkmark appears to the left of the Snap To Guides command when this option is active.


About the Show Guides command

About the Lock Guides command

About the Guides Manager command


To snap to the guides


To snap to the guides

On the View menu, point to Guidelines, and click Snap To Guides.


About the Snap To Guides command


Show Guides

The Show Guides command lets you show and hide the guides in the active image window. A checkmark appears to the left of the Show Guides command when guides are shown.


About the Snap To Guides command

About the Lock Guides command

About the Guides Manager command


To show the guides


To show the guides

On the View menu, point to Guidelines, and click Show Guides.


About the Show Guides command


Lock Guides

The Lock Guides command lets you lock and unlock the guides in the active image window. A checkmark appears to the left of the Lock Guides command when guides are locked.


About the Show Guides command

About the Snap To Guides command

About the Guides Manager command


To lock or unlock guides


To lock or unlock guides

To lock guides, on the View menu, point to Guidelines, and select Lock Guides.

To unlock guides, on the View menu, point to Guidelines, and deselect Lock Guides.

Tip

You can also lock or unlock guides using the Guides Manager


About the Lock Guides command


Guides Manager

The Guides Manager command lets you set the options for guidelines in the active image window. A guideline is a non-printing line that provides an easy way to align objects. You can snap to guides for more exact placement.


About the Snap To Guides command

About the Show Guides command

About the Lock Guides command


To set guide options


To set guide options

1	On the View menu, point to Guidelines, and click Guides Manager.

2	Select any options you want.

3	Click Ok.


About the Guides Manager command


Guides Manager Dialog Box

The Guides Manager dialog box lets you set the options for guidelines in the active image window.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Guides Manager command


Click to create horizontal guidelines.


Click to create vertical guidelines.


Click to create a single guideline.


Enter the position you want the single guideline placed in the active image window.


Click to create multiple guidelines.


Enter the starting position where you want the first of multiple guidelines placed in the active image window.


Enter the ending position where you want the last multiple guideline to be placed in the active image window.


Enter the increment between guidelines from the starting guideline and the ending guideline.


Lets lets you show and hide guidelines in the active image window.


Lets you lock and unlock guidelines in the active image window.


Lets you snap to guides in the active image window.


Displays the current color of the guidelines in the active image window.


Click to display the Color Picker dialog box.


Displays the current guides, including their position (horizontal or vertical), and their ruler positioning.


Click to add the currently defined ruler(s) to the Guides List.


Click to replace the currently selected ruler(s) in the Guides List.


Click to delete the currently selected ruler(s) in the Guides List.


Click to delete all the rulers in the Guides List.


Toolbars Command

The Toolbars command displays the Toolbars dialog box, which lets you show or hide any of the toolbars. You can also set various options for the toolbars, create custom toolbars, and customize existing toolbars.


To show or hide toolbars

To create a custom toolbar

To customize a toolbar


To show or hide toolbars

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Click the check box next to the toolbars that you want to show or hide.

A clear box means that the toolbar is hidden.

A box with a check in it means that the toolbar will be displayed.


About the Toolbars command

Customizing toolbars


To create a new toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Click New.

3	Type a name for the new toolbar and click OK.

A new toolbar appears in the Picture Publisher main window and the Customize dialog box opens.

4	Drag and drop the desired buttons from the Customize dialog box onto the new toolbar.

5	Drag the new toolbar to its new location on the screen. The toolbar can be left floating or it can be docked.


About the Toolbars command

Customizing toolbars


Toolbars Dialog Box

The Toolbars dialog box lets you display or hide toolbars. You can also set various options for the toolbars, create custom toolbars, and customize existing toolbars.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To show or hide toolbars

To create a custom toolbar

To customize a toolbar


About the Toolbars command

Customizing toolbars


Lets you display or hide toolbars. You can also create new toolbars or edit existing toolbars.


Lets you select a toolbar. Click the checkbox to the left of the toolbar name to show or hide the toolbar. A check shows the toolbar; no check hides the toolbar.


Lets you create a new toolbar.


Displays the Customize dialog box, allowing you to customize toolbars.


If Main, Status, or Standard is selected, resets that toolbar's settings. If a custom toolbar is selected, deletes the selected toolbar. You cannot delete toolbars provided with Picture Publisher.


Lets you show ToolTips. ToolTips are the yellow labels that you see when you rest the mouse pointer on a tool button or control for a moment.


Toggles colored buttons. When the check box is clear, the buttons appear in black and white.


Opens the Toolbar Properties dialog box to let you rename the toolbar.


Lets you type or edit the name of the toolbar.


Lets you define the size of the toolbar buttons. Set the checkmark to create large buttons on the toolbar.


Tools Menu

The Tools menu commands let you save positions of your open windows, open a scratchpad so that you can test editing procedures before applying them to an image, record, edit, and play macros, customize toolbars, and set default options for the way Picture Publisher functions.

Save Positions	Lets you save the locations of all displayed windows and the active window.
Create Scratchpad	Opens a blank image file.
Play Macro	Lets you play a prerecorded macro.
Play Batch Macro	Lets you play several macros at once.
Record Macro	Lets you record a macro.
Edit Macro	Lets you edit a macro.
Stop Macro	Lets you stop the recording of a macro.
Wizard Browser	Opens the Wizard Browser dialog box where you can choose one of Picture Publisher's 13 wizards.
Customize	Lets you create custom toolbars and add buttons and macros to existing toolbars.
Options	Lets you specify default settings.


Save Positions

The Save Positions command saves the locations of all displayed windows and the active image window. This allows you to move such items as toolbars and the QuickZoom window permanently.


To save windows positions


Saving Positions
To save positions

On the Tools menu, click Save Positions. The positions of toolbars and information windows are saved.


About the Save Positions command


Create Scratchpad

The Create Scratchpad command lets you create a blank image file to test painting or drawing effects.

The image size and selection of a grayscale or full-color image are predefined in the Options dialog box under the Scratchpad tab. This feature can be very handy in helping you get the feel of a particular brush setting before applying it to an image. It is also a good place to create new colors or blends the same way a traditional artist uses a palette.

When you are working with very large image files, the repainting and previewing of your image modifications can become time consuming. By creating a scratchpad large enough to preview your edits, you can copy a smaller section of an image to it and experiment with your edits right on the scratchpad.

If your edited section is what you want, you can use that as a reference and apply it to your image file, or simply cut and paste the edited section directly from the scratchpad.

The maximum size for the scratchpad is 500 pixels by 500 pixels. It can be defined either as a grayscale or full-color image format.

Tip

When you are working on a full-color image, you may need to compare a section of the image or the full image as a grayscale image (for proofing on a monochrome laser printer). By creating a scratchpad that has a grayscale format, you can copy sections of your full-color image directly to it and get an example of grayscale values.


To create a scratchpad


Creating a Scratchpad
To create a scratchpad

On the Tools menu, click Create Scratchpad.


About the Create Scratchpad command


Using Macros

A macro is a recording of selected actions that you perform in Picture Publisher.

Before you create a macro, you assign the macro a name descriptive of the action performed by the macro. When you later play the macro, you will be able to remember the purpose of the macro.

You can use the Play Batch command on the Tools menu to run one or more macros on multiple images. This is useful if you need to make the same correction to a group of images.

You can use this command to open PPF or PP5 files at full resolution so that they rebuild, then save them to disk. You can use this command to apply an effect to many images, for example on a bad roll of film that needs to be edited.

You can edit macros using the Edit Macro command on the Tools menu. This command lets you view and edit all the commands in a macro.

A possible use for a macro is to record a special effect and then let the macro repeat multiple times to increase the power of the effect. You can repeat a macro up to 99 times by changing the Repeat value in the Play Macro dialog box.


To play a macro

To play a macro for a group of files

To record a macro

To edit a macro

To stop a macro


To play a macro

1	On the Tools menu, click Play Macro.

2	Click the name of the macro to play.

3	Click Play.


To play a macro for a group of files

To record a macro

To edit a macro

To stop a macro

Using macros


To play a macro for a group of files

1	On the Tools menu, click Play Batch Macro.

2	Click Add Images.

3	Click the files to process and click Select.

4	Click Add Macros.

5	Click the macro you want to run and click Load. You can add more than one macro to the Macro List.

6	Click Play to run the macro on the selected files.


To play a macro

To record a macro

To edit a macro

To stop a macro

Using macros


To record a macro

1	On the Tools menu, click Record Macro.

2	In the Enter Macro Name box, type the name of the macro to create.

3	Complete all of the tasks you want to include in the macro.

Note

If you make a mistake, click the Undo command on the Edit menu to restore the image to its previous condition. When you run the macro on other files, it will make and undo the mistake, just as you recorded it. If you want to use this macro frequently, you probably will want to record the macro again because making and undoing a lot of errors causes the macro to take longer to complete its tasks.

4	On the Tools menu, click Stop Macro when you have completed all actions to be recorded.


To play a macro

To play a macro for a group of files

To edit a macro

To stop a macro

Using macros


To edit a macro

1	On the Tools menu, click Edit Macro.

2	Click the name of the macro to edit.

3	Click Load.

4	Edit the macro by clicking Disable or Delete, or by dragging the commands to different locations in the Command List.

5	Click Save to save the changes, click Play to play the changed macro, or click Close to close the Edit Macro dialog box.


To play a macro

To play a macro for a group of files

To record a macro

To stop a macro

Using macros


To stop a macro

On the Tools menu, click Stop Macro.


To play a macro

To play a macro for a group of files

To record a macro

To edit a macro

Using macros


Play Macro dialog box
Play/Load Macro Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you select a macro to be played or edited.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To play a macro

To play a macro for a group of files

To record a macro

To edit a macro

To stop a macro


Using macros


Sets the number of times you want the macro to repeat.


Play Batch Macro Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you select the image files which the macros will affect, and select the macros to be played. You can also specify that the macros be played in sequence to conserve memory.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Shows the image files that will be affected by the macro or macros.


Shows the macro or macros that will be played. Each image file can have a different set of macros applied to it.


Opens the Batch ImageBrowser dialog box to let you select an image file to be affected by the macros.


Opens the Load Macro dialog box to let you select a macro to be played.


Deletes the selected files or macros.


Opens the Play Batch Macro Options dialog box to let you set options for handling each of the image files upon completion of the batch operation.


Opens the selected image files and plays the selected macros.


Plays the selected macros one at a time. Once started, the playing of the macros can be stopped only by closing Picture Publisher through Windows.


Play Batch Macro Options Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you set options for handling each of the image files upon completion of the batch macro operation.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Lets you select a save option: Don't Save, Save Over Original, Save to Directory, or Save to Album.


Lets you enter a name of a directory or album in which the image file is to be saved upon completion of the macro.


Lets you change the file type for the image when you save a copy of the file to a directory or an album upon completion of the macro.


Lets you select a new file type for the image when you save a copy of the file to a directory or an album upon completion of the macro.


Lets you close the image after the batch macro is completed.


Edit Macro Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you make changes to an existing macro.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Indicates the number of selected commands in the macro area.


Displays the macro commands.


Toggles between showing command details and the commands only without the details.


Disables the selected commands in the Macro area.


Deletes the selected commands in the Macro area.


Opens the Save Macro dialog box to let you save the current macro.


Save Macro dialog box
Record/Save Macro Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you specify a name under which to save a macro you are recording or editing.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Wizard Browser

This command opens the Wizard Browser dialog box. Picture Publisher ships with 13 wizards. These wizards automate different imaging processes, from generating contact sheets to creating cool text.


Picture Publisher Wizard Browser dialog box

This dialog box lets you run either a wizard, a tutorial, or a macro. Click the tab of the corresponding pane to run one of these processes.

Picture Publisher ships with 13 wizards. These wizards automate different imaging processes, from generating contact sheets to creating cool text.

Picture Publisher ships with 16 tutorials. Each tutorial illustrates Picture Publisher features that you can learn in just a few minutes. You can start with any tutorial because they are independent of each other. Within each tutorial are two or three individual procedures that teach you various aspects of Picture Publisher.

Picture Publisher ships with 18 pre-defined macros. These macros can enhance the appearance of your image files.


Customize toolbars
Customizing Toolbars

As you use Picture Publisher, you will discover that you use some tools and commands more often than others. To help you quickly access them, Picture Publisher lets you create your own toolbars filled with the features you use most. You can create, hide, or display as many toolbars as you want.

Besides tools and commands, you also can add macros to custom toolbars. Commands and macros appear at the top of custom toolbars and tools appear at the bottom.


To create a custom toolbar

To customize a toolbar


Customize Dialog Box

As you use Picture Publisher, you will discover that you use some tools and commands more often than others. To help you quickly access them, the Customize dialog box lets you create your own toolbars filled with the features you use most. You can create, hide, or display as many toolbars as you want.

Besides tools and commands, you also can add macros to custom toolbars. Commands and macros appear at the top of custom toolbars and tools appear at the bottom.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Customizing toolbars


Lets you select a category for the tool to be added to a custom toolbar.


Lets you select a tool button to be added to a custom toolbar. Click a button to see its description below. Point to a button you want, then drag and drop the button to the custom toolbar.


To customize a toolbar

1	Make sure the toolbar that you want to customize is shown in the window.

2	On the Tools menu, click Customize.

3	To add a button to the toolbar:

a.	In the Categories box, click the category of tool to add to the toolbar.

b.	To see a description of a button in the Buttons area, click the button.

c.	Drag the button you want from the Buttons area to the toolbar and release the mouse button.

4	To remove a button from a toolbar, drag the icon off the toolbar and release the mouse button.


Customizing toolbars


Options Command

Picture Publisher lets you customize how you work in many ways. You can set preferences with the Options command on the Tools menu. The Options dialog box contains seven options categories, each in its own tab.


To set Picture Publisher options


Options Dialog Box

Picture Publisher lets you customize how you work in many ways. You can set preferences with the Options command on the Tools menu. The Options dialog box is divided into seven tabs. Click the tab of the category you want.

General tab

The General tab of the Options dialog box lets you specify miscellaneous options for Picture Publisher.

Plug-ins tab

The Plug-ins tab lets you use plug-ins and set the paths for plug-ins. Plug-ins are additional effects you can buy from different software manufacturers, and "plug-in" to an application.

Units tab

The Units tab controls the unit of measurement used in Picture Publisher for resizing and positioning images. You can also set your ruler and grid options for more exact placement of objects. You can choose from inches, millimeters, picas/points, centimeters, and pixels.

Objects tab

The Objects tab lets you set preferences for floating objects.

Undo tab

The Undo tab contains options for making the Undo mode settings. You can choose how many undos are tracked by Picture Publisher and whether they apply to the image as a whole or to objects floating on the image.

Scratchpad tab

The Scratchpad tab lets you create a blank image file to test painting and drawing effects.

Files

The Files tab lets you set the default for where Picture Publisher saves certain program files.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


About the Options command


Lets you edit line art images as 8-bit images. If the option is deselected and you edit a line art image as a 1-bit image, your image requires one-eighth the memory of the same image edited as a grayscale image. This could be important if you are editing a large image or if you have limited computer memory. When you edit an image as a 1-bit image, you can use only two colors: black and white.


Lets you choose No Undo, Manual Apply, or Auto Apply. Auto Apply lets every new change or edit be automatically applied to the working image. This is a convenient way to work through a session without stopping to manually apply changes.

In Auto Apply mode, the Undo command on the Edit menu and the Eraser tool remove only the last edit. Choosing the Auto Apply option means changes are automatically applied; you cannot undo them. It also frees up memory.

If the Manual Apply option is selected, the Manual Apply command on the Edit menu applies all changes made since the last manual apply. This lets you evaluate changes in combination before making them part of the image. Regardless of which apply mode you use, only the Save and Save As commands permanently save changes to a file.


Lets you choose whether you wante one undo per image or per object. If you choose One Per Image, you can undo only the last change made, whether it was to an image or object. If you choose One Per Object, each object has its own undo. The base image is also considered an object.


Lets you turn on and off undo for mask edits. If you choose this option, then you cannot undo mask edits, but you save memory.


Lets you turn on and off the Command Center. If you choose this option, Picture Publisher will not create a command list for the image. Deselect this option to access unlimited undo and redo capabilities.


Lets you decide how you want Picture Publisher to keep track of the work done on an image. You can choose None, Author, Date, or Author and Date.


Lets you move and transform any objects in the image. When this option is deselected, an object combines with the base image as soon as you release the bitmap from the transform tool.


Lets you draw masks on objects. Thus, you can affect only an area of an object for retouching or editing. If the option is deselected and a mask overlaps an object, changes affect the masked area, including the overlapping area.


Displays a "tooltip" when you rest the mouse pointer over an object. The tooltip displays the name of the object (if any), the object's distance from the top and left side of the image, and the width and height of the object.


Lets you enable or disable the Paste At dialog box when you paste an object onto an image. The Paste At dialog box lets you specify the X and Y positions of the pasted object.


Lets you choose a color or a gray image for the scratchpad.


Lets you specify the width of the Scratchpad. The maximum width for the Scratchpad is 500 pixels. It can be defined as either a grayscale or full-color image format.


Lets you specify the height of the Scratchpad. The maximum height for the Scratchpad is 500 pixels. It can be defined as either a grayscale or full-color image format.


Lets you set the paths for plug-ins. Plug-ins are additional effects you can buy from different software manufacturers, and "plug in" to an application.


Lets you enable or disable plug-ins.


Lets Picture Publisher automatically detect digital watermarks created by Digimarc in all images you open.


Lets you specify the active display area on the monitor. The physical size (in inches) must be entered correctly, so Picture Publisher can display the actual size of an image.


Lets you display a pair of rulers in the current image window. To show or hide the rulers, click Rulers on the View menu.


Lets you display pixel values as percentages (0 to 100) or levels (0 to 255).


Lets lets you show and hide the grid in the active image window.


Lets you snap to any displayed guides in the active image window.


Lets you snap to the grid in the active image window.


Lets you control the unit of measurement for grids. You can choose from inches, millimeters, centimeters, and pixels.


Lets you set the horizontal spacing between grid dots using the Grid Units.


Lets you set the vertical spacing between grid dots using the Grid Units.


Lets you select a macro that runs when Picture Publisher is started.


Lets you set the color used when displaying masks in Ruby Overlay mode.


Lets you indicate the default image type when you open a new image.


Lets you specify miscellaneous options if you are using a tablet/digitizer. Picture Publisher supports tablets/digitizers which provide a Wintab driver with their software.

If you choose Unused, no pressure is available. If you choose Transparency, your brush strokes become less transparent as you apply more pressure to the tablet with the pen. The transparency decreases with pressure up to the limit you specified in the ribbon. If you choose Brush Size, your brush size increases as you apply more pressure to the tablet with the pen. The brush size increases with pressure up to the limit you specified in the ribbon. If you choose Brush Size and Transparency, your brush strokes become less transparent and your brush size increases as you apply more pressure to the tablet with the pen. The transparency decreases and the brush size increases with pressure up to the limit you specified in the ribbon.


Lets you turn off gradient dithering. If you will not be printing the gradient, but only displaying it, you may want to disable gradient dithering. If you have a 24-bit monitor, you may not need to display gradient dithering.

Gradient dithering does not display bands of color; it provides a nice, even blend from one color to another.


Lets you choose the way setting the options for one tool affects the options for other tools in the group.


Lets you use macros you created using Picture Publisher 5.0.


Lets you set the mouse wheel to scroll up and down, rather than zoom.


Lets you turn off auto scrolling. For example, when you paint and the cursor meets the edge of the window, Picture Publisher automatically scrolls.


Lets you paste copied images at real size, regardless of resolution. For example, if you copy part of an image that has a resolution of 300 into an image that has a resolution of 150, the pasted image is scaled down.


Lets you enable and disable the Recently Used Files List on the File menu. You can specify the number of recently used files up to 10.


Lets you specify the number of recently used files whose names appear on the File menu.


Lets you enable or disable the startup dialog box each time you open Picture Publisher. This dialog box lets you create a new image, open an image, open a recently used file, or acquire an image using a scanner or digital camera. You can also read the current Tip of the Day.


Lets you specify the path for textures. Make sure you enter the full path, including the drive, directory, and any subdirectories.


Lets you specify the path for scanners. Make sure you enter the full path, including the drive, directory, and any subdirectories.


Lets you specify the path for palettes. Make sure you enter the full path, including the drive, directory, and any subdirectories.


Lets you specify the path for effects. Make sure you enter the full path, including the drive, directory, and any subdirectories.


Lets you specify the path for brushes. Make sure you enter the full path, including the drive, directory, and any subdirectories.


Lets you specify the path for clipboards. Make sure you enter the full path, including the drive, directory, and any subdirectories.


Lets you specify the path for print styles. Make sure you enter the full path, including the drive, directory, and any subdirectories.


Lets you specify the path for macros. Make sure you enter the full path, including the drive, directory, and any subdirectories.


Lets you specify the path for temporary files. Make sure you enter the full path, including the drive, directory, and any subdirectories.


To set Picture Publisher options

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	Click a tab to choose a category.

3	Choose the options you want.

4	Click OK to save the changes for future sessions, or click Apply to save the changes for the current session only.


About the Options command


Opens a dialog box that lets you create a new image.


Lets you choose an image file to open.


Closes the currently active image window.


Closes all open image windows.


Saves the currently active image using the current filename with the same file type and image settings.


Lets you assign a new name to a file or make a copy of an existing file by giving it a new name. You can also change the file format or image type using this command.


Opens an Image Properties dialog box to show information about the image type, size, number of objects, and color management.


Restores the image to the most recently saved version, undoing all changes made since you last saved the file.


Opens the TWAIN interface. Picture Publisher supports the TWAIN driver interface to give you access to scanners, video grabbers, and other data acquisition devices without requiring special drivers.


Locates temporary support files for PP5 and PPF format images created or edited using the Command List and automatically places them on the media for transfer to a service bureau.


Opens the Page Setup dialog box to let you choose the way you lay out your printed image.


Opens a submenu containing the following commands: Printer, Scanner, Monitor, and Calibration.


Lets you set up a printer and specify print styles.


Lets you identify a scanner calibration style that you want to use.


Opens the Setup Monitor dialog box to let you adjust the monitor gamma and to select a monitor device when using the Kodak Color Management system.


Opens a submenu containing the following commands you can use for calibrating your scanner and printer: For Scanning and For Printing.


Opens the Calibrate Scanner dialog box to let you calibrate your scanner by either the visual or measurement method.


Opens the Calibrate Printer dialog box to let you calibrate your printer by either the visual or measurement method.


Lets you send an image to the selected printer.


Displays a preview of how the image will print.


Lets you send an image in an e-mail message.


Lets you reopen an image file that you recently opened or saved.


Lets you reopen an image file that you recently opened or saved.


Lets you reopen an image file that you recently opened or saved.


Lets you reopen an image file that you recently opened or saved.


Lets you reopen an image file that you recently opened or saved.


Lets you reopen an image file that you recently opened or saved.


Closes Picture Publisher. If you have any image files open in which you have unsaved changes, Picture Publisher prompts you to save the files before the program closes.


Toggles between Undo and Redo. Undo removes all changes made to an image since the last time changes were applied. In Auto Apply mode, changes are applied as you proceed to the next edit, so the Undo command removes only the last change. In Manual Apply mode, you control when changes are applied.

Redo replaces the Undo command on the Edit menu after the Undo command is selected. Redo restores the most recent edit that has been undone. You can toggle between Undo and Redo to see an image before and after the latest change.


Lets you control when changes become a permanent part of the image. This command varies depending on whether the Manual Apply option or the Auto Apply option is selected in the Undo panel of the Options dialog box.

With Manual Apply, after changes are applied, they cannot be removed with the Eraser tool or the Undo command.

Notes

The changes are not applied to the permanent image file until you use the Save command.

With Auto Apply, changes are automatically applied; you cannot undo them. This option also frees up memory.


Opens the Command Center dialog box that lets you edit the Command List.


Cuts an area of the image (defined by a mask) to the Windows Clipboard. The cutout area appears as a white hole in the image.


Sends a duplicate copy of the image area defined by a mask to the Windows Clipboard. The working image is unaffected when using the Copy command.


Copies the image area defined by a mask to a named file, a new image, a texture, or a custom brush.


Opens the Copy To HTML dialog box which lets you save an image area defined by a mask (or the entire image if there is no mask) as an Internet-formatted image.


Pastes the contents of the Windows Clipboard into the current image. When you click the Paste command, the ribbon area displays options that you can use with the Selector Transform tool.


Lets you create a new image based on the contents of the Clipboard.


Removes masked portions of an image from the image window.

Note

You can restore an image that was removed with the Clear command by clicking the Undo command on the Edit menu immediately after clearing.


.Opens the ClipboardBrowser dialog box to let you manage and paste saved Clipboard images.


.Opens the ImageBrowser dialog box to let you replace an existing image in a program file with a different image.

Note

This command is shown on the Edit menu only when you are doing an in-place edit of an image in a container program such as Microsoft Word.


Displays the image at the actual physical size of the captured data.

This makes it easy to view the image on screen at its actual finished size when you are visualizing concepts. You might also discover that some detail at higher magnification does not adequately show how the image will look when printed.

Note

For the image to be truly 1:1, you must set the Screen Width in the Units panel in the Options dialog box to your screen width.


Displays the image so that the entire image fits into the window. Lets you see the whole image regardless of its size. The image displays at the maximum magnification that fits in the window and maintains the original proportions of the image.


Displays the image so that the entire image fits into the full screen. It displays the image with nothing else on the screen. This command is particularly useful when you want to display an on-screen image as part of a presentation. You also can use this command to isolate an image for a screen capture.


Opens the QuickZoom window, a view-only window of the image. When first opened, this window shows a miniature representation of the full image. You use the resizable viewing rectangles to zoom in and out on the image in the currently active window.


Hides the Picture Publisher title bar and menu bar so you can maximize the image editing area of the screen. Selected toolbars remain on the screen. All the menu commands for Picture Publisher are available using keyboard shortcuts and function keys.


Shows or hides the color palette.


Shows or hides the Info window, which displays information that helps you perform precise operations, such as aligning pixels and measuring sizes of areas within an image. The Info window also provides color (RGB or CMYK) values or grayscale values of the area under the mouse pointer, depending on the image type.


Shows or hides the Object Manager window, a moveable window containing a graphical list of the objects that are floating on the active image. Up and down arrows on the right side of the window provide for scrolling through a long roster of objects.

The list consists of small image buttons for managing objects. Objects can be grouped. Objects and groups can be hidden or shown. Objects and groups can be locked to prevent inadvertent editing. They can be selected and deleted from the image. They can be cropped. They can have their alpha channels edited. They can also be moved forward or backward to an appropriate layer in the image.


Shows or hides the Image Task Manager window, which lets you manage multiple threaded tasks by pausing, stopping, and resuming threaded operations.


Shows or hides the Pattern Window, which lets you view the image as it would appear on an Internet web page as a background pattern.


Displays the Toolbars dialog box, which lets you show or hide any of the toolbars. You can also set various options for the toolbars, create custom toolbars, and customize existing toolbars.


Shows or hides vertical and horizontal rulers in the active image window.


Saves the locations of all displayed windows and the active image window. This allows you to permanently move such items as toolbars and the QuickZoom window.


Lets you create a blank image file to test painting or drawing effects.

The image size and selection of a grayscale or full-color image are predefined in the Options dialog box under the Scratchpad tab.


Lets you play back a pre-recorded session.


Lets you run a macro on more than one file. For example, to change the contrast on several files, create a macro changing the contrast, then run it on the selected files.


Lets you record actions in Picture Publisher, then save them in a macro file.


Opens the Load Macro dialog box to let you select a macro to edit. After you select a macro, the Edit Macro dialog box opens.


Stops recording your actions in Picture Publisher.


Opens the Wizard Browser dialog box. Picture Publisher ships with 13 wizards. These wizards automate different imaging processes, from generating contact sheets to creating cool text.


Lets you modify toolbars.


Lets you change the default settings for Picture Publisher.


Removes the last change made to a mask.

The Redo command restores the most recent undo. After you use the Undo command, the Redo command replaces it on the Mask menu. You can toggle between Undo and Redo to see your mask before and after the latest change.


Deletes all active masks. You can restore removed masks by choosing the Undo command on the Mask menu.


Loads a previously saved mask and places it on the current image.


Saves masks for future use.


Opens the Chroma mask dialog box to let you create a mask based on the colors in the image. For example, if an image has a neutral background (blue, gray, or green), you can use the Chroma Mask command to draw a mask around the background, and easily replace the background with a texture.


Lets you create a mask around an object. The object itself is not affected by this command.


Removes a mask from the area inside the border and masks the area outside the border. If you mask an area of an image, this command removes the mask from that area and masks everything else.


Opens the Feather Mask dialog box to let you smooth the edge transition between the masked and unmasked areas of an image. Feathering lets you feather the edges of masks so the edges blend smoothly into the surrounding base image.


Lets you remove holes from the inside of masks. For example, if you used the Smart Mask tool to create a mask, but it left part of the image inside the mask unmasked, you could use the Remove Holes command to fill the areas inside the mask.


Lets you smooth rough edges of masks. It opens the Mask Smoother dialog box to let you specify how many pixels the mask will be smoothed.


Lets you cut out unwanted portions of an image.


Draws a border outline under a mask. You can use this command to add any number of special effects, such as adding a neon border to a masked part of the image.


Keeps all masks in place but hides or shows the mask borders. The mask border consists of a black and white animated line (red and green in grayscale images) denoting the edges of the mask. If the mask is blocking a detailed area of the image, you may want to hide it so you can better view any changes you make to the masked area.


Controls brightness, contrast, color balance, hue, saturation, and tonal details for an image. You can also use it to create special effects such as posterization.


Opens a submenu containing the Joystick and Visual commands.


Lets you use the Contrast/Brightness dialog box to sharpen (or soften) and darken (or lighten) the image using a joystick.


Lets you use the Visual Contrast/Brightness dialog box to adjust the contrast and brightness of an image visually. This dialog box displays a series of small images showing how changes alter the image.


Opens a submenu containing the Joystick and Visual commands to let you increase or decrease the effect of certain colors on an image.


Lets you increase or decrease the effect of certain colors on an image by using a joystick.


Lets you increase or decrease the effect of certain colors on an image visually.


Lets you modify tonal range by adjusting the highlight, midtone, and shadow points in an image. This usually improves the contrast of an image.


Limits the number of density levels used by each primary color to achieve a pronounced effect. They are modified either by individual channel adjustments or by adjusting all channels by using the Master channel.


Turns on individual colors that are pure above the threshold density and turns off colors that are below it, in effect creating binary (two-level) posterization. Threshold changes are made to individual channels or to all channels by using the Master channel.


Lets you shift all hues in an image based on the Hue, Saturation, and Lightness (HSL) color model. Hue is specified by a numeric value ranging between 0 to 360. When you shift the hues in an image using the Hue Shift command, all hues are shifted by the same amount. This effectively changes all colors in an image. The Hue Shift command also lets you adjust the saturation and lightness of an image.


Lets you shift selected ranges of hues in an image using the Hue, Saturation, and Lightness (HSL) color model. For changing hues, Picture Publisher divides the HSL color wheel into 12 ranges. Each range represents 30 of the 360 hues. You shift a range by moving a hue shift slider. Hue shift is useful if you want to change a single color in an image to another color without affecting other colors.


Displays a histogram of the current image. The histogram shows the distribution of the shadows, midtones, and highlights for the Master channel and the color channels.


Lets you make adjustments in Picture Publisher to improve the quality of your images by compensating for imperfections in scanning and printing devices.


Lets you edit, replace, or remap the color palette of an image that has been converted to palette color. Palette color images are images of 256 or fewer colors. You can convert an image to palette color using the Palette Color command.


Lets you choose a command to group, ungroup, lock and unlock objects.


Lets you group two or more objects. After the objects are grouped, Picture Publisher considers the objects to be one object. Use the Ungroup command to ungroup the grouped objects.


Lets you ungroup objects that have been grouped together with the Group command.


Lets you lock the location of objects so they cannot be moved. Use the Unlock command to unlock an object so it can be moved.


Unlocks objects that have been locked with the Lock command.


Opens the Object Alignment dialog box to let you align objects to the image, to other objects, or to a mask.


Opens the Object Position dialog box to let you change the position of an object precisely. You may want to move an object to an exact coordinate on an image, and you can do this by specifying the X and Y position.


Moves a selected object back one level (layer).


Moves a selected object forward one level (layer).


Moves a selected object to the back of all other objects. It does not, however, move it behind the base or original image.


Moves a selected object to the front of all other objects.


Lets you choose a command that specifies the direction and amount to rotate an object.


Rotates an object by 90 degrees in a clockwise direction.


Rotates an object by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise direction.


Rotates an object by 180 degrees.


Opens the Rotate Object dialog box to let you rotate an object by an arbitrary number of degrees you specify.


Lets you reduce the size of an object and remove unwanted areas of the object by selecting a rectangular portion of the object you want to keep and discarding the portion of the object outside the rectangle.


Creates a drop shadow from any floating object or masked area.


Lets you choose a command that permanently combines objects to each other or to the base.


Permanently incorporates all selected objects into one object. All combined objects lose their status as separate objects. You can undo the Combine Objects Together command if you use the Undo command on the Edit menu immediately afterwards.


Permanently incorporates all objects into the base image. All objects lose their status as separate objects. You can no longer select, move, and manipulate the objects. You can, however, undo the Combine All Objects With Base command, if you use the Undo command on the Edit menu immediately afterwards.


Permanently incorporates selected objects into the base image. The selected objects lose their status as separate objects. You can no longer select, move, and manipulate the objects. You can, however, undo the Combine Selected Objects With Base command, if you use the Undo command on the Edit menu immediately afterwards.


Smoothes the edge transition between the object and the surrounding image. Feathering helps prevent a hard edge from occurring between an object and the image.


Uses a mask to define one or more edges of an object.

Removes the portion of any selected object not inside the border of a mask. Each merged object maintains its status as a separate object. After merging it with a mask, you can still select, move, and manipulate an object. This command can be used to merge a gradient from the mask into an object.


Creates an object of the area inside a mask. If more than one mask exists, a single object is created from the masked areas.


Removes the selected objects from the active image.


Displays the object's alpha channel. The alpha channel contains a grayscale image of any object on the base image. You can work directly on the alpha channel and edit the object directly.


Selects all objects on all layers. When all objects are selected, you can work on them as a group.

Tip

You can also select multiple objects by holding down SHIFT while clicking the objects one at a time.


Hides (or shows) the border of selected objects. The selected objects are still selected. The border, called the marquee, consists of a cyan and black animated line (on color images), or a red and green animated line (on grayscale images) denoting the edges of the object. If the marquee is blocking a detailed area of the image, you may want to hide it so you can better view any changes you make to the object.


Lets you redefine the size of an image without deleting (cropping) any portion of it. This helps manage file size in memory, adjust resolution for specific output devices, and define height and width needed for a specific program.

Note

The Size command can change the resolution and size of an image, providing better control over file size. For best results, file size should match the output capability of the imaging device. Excess data can result in an oversized file, with some data simply being thrown away if a printer cannot use this data.


Redefines the boundaries of an image without changing the original image. Has the same effect as copying the image and pasting it into a larger window.


Lets you choose a command that specifies the direction and amount to rotate an entire image.


Rotates an entire image by 90 degrees in a clockwise direction.


Rotates an entire image by 90 degrees in a counterclockwise direction.


Rotates an entire image by 180 degrees.


Opens the Rotate Image dialog box to let you rotate an entire image by an arbitrary number of degrees you specify.


Lets you choose a command to specify the direction to flip an image.

Note

Affects a portion of an image, defined by a mask, or the entire image.


Lets you flip an image horizontally (left to right).

Note

Affects a portion of an image, defined by a mask, or the entire image.


Lets you flip an image vertically (top to bottom).

Note

Affects a portion of an image, defined by a mask, or the entire image.


Lets you flip an image diagonally (both left to right and top to bottom).

Note

Affects a portion of an image, defined by a mask, or the entire image.


Lets you choose commands to view and modify the individual color components of a color image. You can edit the individual channels, if you like. Also lets you choose a command to recombine the channels.


Lets you split a color image into individual Red, Green, and Blue channels.


Lets you split a color image into individual Hue, Saturation, and Lightness channels.


Lets you split a color image into individual Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black channels.


Lets you recombine the previously split channels of a color image into a single image.

Note

All channels must be present for the recombine process to be successful.


Lets you choose a command to convert the image type of the image on your screen.


Creates monochrome art.


Dithers your line art image to give the impression of more shades of gray.


Makes an image with up to 256 shades of gray.


Creates a one-channel, 8-bit image and opens the Convert to Palette Color dialog box.


Makes a 24-bit image. This provides the most colors, up to 16 million.


Converts the image to the primary subtractive colors.


Create a new image using color management and opens the Color Management Selection dialog box.


Reverses the colors of an entire image or portions of an image defined by a mask. A black-and-white image looks like a photo negative. A color image reverses using additive colors.


Lets you stitch two images together. You only need to choose two common points on both images, and click the Stitch button in the ribbon. Picture Publisher then automatically creates a new image from the two smaller images.


Opens the EffectsBrowser dialog box and lets you choose from the many different effects supplied with Picture Publisher. The effects can be used on part of the image (defined by a selection) or on the entire image.


Choose one of Picture Publisher's 13 wizards from the submenu.


Choose one of Picture Publisher's 15 wizards from the submenu.


Lets you create multiple frames of the same image. When you edit one frame, the changes appear in all of the frames, provided that they are duplicates of the active window (duplicated from the active open image). You can set each frame at a different magnification to see the effects of edits at various levels of detail.

The filename for each open image appears at the bottom of the Window menu, numbered in the order that they were opened, and the magnification is displayed unless the window has been minimized. The active window is identified by a check mark. Minimized images are represented by small title bars at the bottom of the Picture Publisher window.


Lets you overlap the active image windows diagonally in the order that they were created.


Fills the screen with the open image windows, adjusting their sizes to fit the Picture Publisher window's available space.


Spaces the small titlebars (for minimized windows) evenly across the bottom of the Picture Publisher window.


Lets you activate another open image window.


Lets you activate another open image window.


Lets you activate another open image window.


Lets you activate another open image window.


Lets you activate another open image window.


Displays the contents for the Picture Publisher help system.


Displays on-line instructions for using the Windows 95 help system.


Opens the Web Favorites dialog box to access the Micrografx and Microsoft home pages on the Internet. You can add other URLs to jump to Internet Web pages without having to access your Web browser. Picture Publisher uses your default Web browser when link to a home page.


Opens a help topic that describes how Picture Publisher is used with other Microsoft Office Compatible products.


Displays the Tip of the Day dialog box. You can browse through Picture Publisher tips by clicking the Next Tip button.


Displays the About Picture Publisher dialog box that includes the version number and version date of your Picture Publisher program. You can also click the Picture Publisher icon to view a list of Picture Publisher developers.


Lets you choose the inverse mode to add to the area of existing masks where a mask doesn't exist, but subtract from existing masks where they overlap.


Lets you copy or move a mask or the mask and the image inside the mask.


Object Linking and Embedding (OLE)

Picture Publisher offers object linking and embedding (OLE) capabilities. OLE lets you combine information created by different programs into a single document. With OLE, your focus is on the document rather than on the specific program.

An object is defined as anything you create in Picture Publisher and transfer through the Clipboard. Documents that contain one or more objects are called compound documents.

The Clipboard is the standard device that you use to move data between programs. To transfer data using this method, you first open the program used to create the object. Next you select and copy the object to the Clipboard. You then open the program into which you want to paste the object. To edit the object after it is pasted, you must return to the object’s original file and repeat this process. When you use OLE, you do not have to repeat these copy and paste sequences. After you have pasted an object, you can edit it by simply double-clicking the object in the compound document.

An object can be saved in a compound document using two methods: object linking and object embedding. A linked object contains a graphic representation of the object and information that identifies the original file and program. For example, suppose you have a document created in Microsoft Word Pad, an OLE-compatible word processing program, and the document contains an object created in Picture Publisher. If you edit the original Picture Publisher file, then reopen the Word Pad file, the changes made to the Picture Publisher file automatically appear in the Word Pad file.

An embedded object contains a graphic representation of the object plus the information needed to recreate the original object. An advantage of an embedded object is that you do not have to worry about the location of the original file. With a linked object, you may have to reestablish the object link if the compound document or object file is moved to another directory. A disadvantage of an embedded object is that the file size of the compound document may be larger when compared to a linked object. When you select an object from an OLE-compliant program and paste it to another OLE-compliant program using the Paste command, the default action is to embed the object. To link an object, you must use the Paste Special command and select the link option.

Picture Publisher supports in-place editing of embedded objects in compound documents. This means that you can edit a Picture Publisher object while you are working within a compound document (if the program you are using to create the compound document also supports In-Place editing). For example, if you double-click a Picture Publisher object while working in a word processing program, Picture Publisher tools appear and the Picture Publisher object is editable at the same location (in-place) within the word processor. By simply clicking outside the Picture Publisher object area, you switch back to the word processor.


Moving linked files


To edit a linked Picture Publisher object

To edit an embedded Picture Publisher object

To edit a link

To embed a Picture Publisher object into a document

To link a Picture Publisher object to a document

To paste information into a document

To see a list of the objects linked to Picture Publisher


To edit a linked Picture Publisher object

1	Double-click the Picture Publisher object in the compound document.

2	Edit the image.

3	On the File menu, click Exit.

4	Click Yes. Picture Publisher closes, and the compound document displays the changes to the object.


To edit an embedded Picture Publisher object

To edit a link

To embed a Picture Publisher object into a document

To link a Picture Publisher object to a document

To paste information into a document

To see a list of the objects linked to Picture Publisher

About Object linking and embedding


To edit an embedded Picture Publisher object
To edit an embedded Picture Publisher object (If both programs support in-place editing)

1	Double-click the Picture Publisher object in the compound document.

2	Edit the image.

3	Click outside the Picture Publisher editing area. The compound document displays the changes to the object.

To edit an embedded Picture Publisher object (If neither program supports in-place editing)

1	Double-click the Picture Publisher object in the compound document.

2	Edit the image.

3	On the File menu, click Exit & Return to <Compound Document Name>. Picture Publisher closes and the compound document displays the changes to the object.


To edit a linked Picture Publisher object

To edit a link

To embed a Picture Publisher object into a document

To link a Picture Publisher object to a document

To paste information into a document

To see a list of the objects linked to Picture Publisher

About Object linking and embedding


To edit a link

1	Open the compound document that contains the link to edit.

2	On the Edit menu, click Links.

3	Click a link in the list box to select it for editing.

4	Click a link option button.

Click Update Now to update the object with changes that have been made in the source file.

Click Open Source to open the source file in which the object was created.

Click Change Source to choose a new source file or item for the object.

Click Break Link to disconnect the link between the object and the source file. The link is removed from the list.

Note

If you select Change Source and choose a new source that is invalid, Picture Publisher displays a message asking if you want to correct it. Click Yes to choose a different source. Click No to keep the source you selected. If you click No, the link is broken.

5	Click the Automatic or Manual option if you want to change the update method.

Note

With the Automatic option, the object is updated automatically if changes are made to the object in the source file. With the Manual option, changes are not made to the object until you click Update Now in the Links dialog box.

6	Click Close or Cancel.


To edit a linked Picture Publisher object

To edit an embedded Picture Publisher object

To embed a Picture Publisher object into a document

To link a Picture Publisher object to a document

To paste information into a document

To see a list of the objects linked to Picture Publisher

About Object linking and embedding


To embed a Picture Publisher object into a document

1	Create or open an image file.

2	Copy the entire image to the Clipboard by clicking Copy on the Edit menu.

or

Copy a portion of the image to the Clipboard by masking a portion of the image and clicking Copy on the Edit menu.

3	Minimize Picture Publisher.

4	Open an OLE-compatible program, such as Microsoft Word for Windows.

5	Open the document in which to embed the object.

6	Paste the object into the document.

Notes

You can embed an image created in Picture Publisher into a document in another OLE-compatible program. The image becomes the object, and the document becomes a compound document.

It is not necessary to save an object in a source file before it can be embedded in a document.


To edit a linked Picture Publisher object

To edit an embedded Picture Publisher object

To edit a link

To link a Picture Publisher object to a document

To paste information into a document

To see a list of the objects linked to Picture Publisher

About Object linking and embedding


To link a Picture Publisher object to a document

You can link an image created in Picture Publisher into a document in another OLE-compatible program. The image becomes the object, and the document becomes a compound document.

1	Create or open an image file.

2	On the File menu, click Save As.

3	Type a filename and click Save.

Note

You must save the object in a source file before the object can be linked to a document.

4	Copy the entire image to the Clipboard by clicking Copy on the Edit menu.

or

Copy a portion of the image to the Clipboard by masking a portion of the image and clicking Copy.

5	Minimize Picture Publisher.

6	Open an OLE-compatible container program, such as Microsoft Word for Windows.

7	Open the document to which you want to link the object.

8	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

9	Click the Paste Link option and click OK.

The object is linked from Picture Publisher (the object program) to the document.

Note

The link may be broken if the source file is deleted or moved to another directory. If a link is broken, the object still can be displayed in the container program. It will appear similar to the last time it was updated. However, it can no longer be updated from the container program. You must reestablish the link within the container program.


To edit a linked Picture Publisher object

To edit an embedded Picture Publisher object

To edit a link

To embed a Picture Publisher object into a document

To paste information into a document

To see a list of the objects linked to Picture Publisher

About object linking and embedding


To see a list of the objects linked to Picture Publisher

1	Open the compound document that contains the links.

2	On the Edit menu, click Links. The dialog box shows the name and location of the source file, and the update method (automatic or manual).

3	Click Close or Cancel.


To edit a linked Picture Publisher object

To edit an embedded Picture Publisher object

To edit a link

To embed a Picture Publisher object into a document

To link a Picture Publisher object to a document

To paste information into a document

About object linking and embedding


Moving Linked Files

You can move a set of linked files and still maintain the links between the files. For example, you may want to move a set of linked files from a hard disk to a floppy disk for transporting them. When you open the files from the floppy disk, the links are intact.

Note

You must move all the linked files together to the same location.


To paste information into a document

1	Copy the information to the Clipboard.

2	Minimize the program and open the container document.

3	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

4	Select a paste format in the list box. (Note that the Paste option is selected by default.)

5	Click to check the Display as Icon option if you want the object to appear as an icon rather than as a full graphic.

6	Click OK.

Notes

The Display as Icon option is available only if you select the Object format in the list box.

The Paste Special command on the Edit menu of the program that created the container document lets you paste information from the Clipboard in various formats.


To edit a linked Picture Publisher object

To edit an embedded Picture Publisher object

To edit a link

To embed a Picture Publisher object into a document

To link a Picture Publisher object to a document

To see a list of the objects linked to Picture Publisher

About object linking and embedding


Tools and Buttons

A

Active Color Swatch Button

Actual Size View Tool

Additive Mode Button

Add Point Button

Alternate Color Swatch Button

Anti-Alias Button

B

Bézier Curve Button

Bold Text Button

C

Clone Retouch Tool

Clone Source Button

Color Fill Tool

Color Palette Button

Color Probe Rectangular Sample Tool

Color Probe Tool

Color Shield Button

Color Swatch Button

Copy To Clipboard Button

Crop Mask Tool

Cut Button

D

Darken Filter Tool

Delete Point Button

Down One Layer Button

Draw Curve Mode Button

Draw Freehand Tool

Draw Lines Mode Button

Draw Polyline Tool

Draw Shape Tool

Draw Tool

E

Elliptical Draw Tool

Elliptical Mask Tool

Entire Image View Tool

F

File Options Button

Fill Color Tool

Fill Gradient Tool

Fill Smart Tool

Fill Texture Tool

Fill Tint Tool

Fill Tool

Filter Darken Tool

Filter Lighten Tool

Filter Sharpen Tool

Filter Smooth Tool

Filter Tool

Flip Texture Horizontally Button

Flip Texture Vertically Button

Freehand Draw Tool

Freehand Mask Tool

Full Screen View Tool

G

Gradient Fill Tool

I

Info Button

Inverse Mode Button

Italic Text Button

J

Justify Text Center Button

Justify Text Left Button

Justify Text Right Button

L

Lighten Filter Tool

Lock Objects Button

M

Mask Channel Button

Mask Crop Tool

Mask Freehand Tool

Mask Paint On Tool

Mask Point Edit Tool

Mask Rectangular/Elliptical Tool

Mask Smart Tool

Mask Tool

Mask Transform Tool

Move Point Button

N

New Image File Button

O

Open Image File Button

P

Paint On Mask Tool

Paint Retouch Tool

Paste Button

Point Edit Mask Tool

Polyline Draw Tool

Previous View Tool

Print Image Button

Q

QuickZoom Button

R

Rectangular Draw Tool

Rectangular/Elliptical Mask Tool

Redo Button

Retouch Clone Tool

Retouch Paint Tool

Retouch Texture Tool

Retouch Tool

Ruby Mask Button

S

Save Image File Button

Selector Tool

Selector Transform Tool

Shape Draw Tool

Sharpen Filter Tool

Smart Fill Tool

Smart Mask Tool

Smooth Filter Tool

Stitch Button

Subtractive Mode Button

Swatch Color Button

T

Text Justify Center Button

Text Justify Left Button

Text Justify Right Button

Text Tool

Text Underline Button

Texture Fill Tool

Texture Retouch Tool

Tint Fill Tool

Transform Mask Tool

U

Underline Text Button

Undo Button

Up One Layer Button

V

View Actual Size Tool

View Circle Marker Button

View Entire Image Tool

View Full Screen Tool

View Previous Tool

View Square Marker Button

View Tool

View Zoom In Tool

View Zoom Out Tool

Z

Zoom In Tool

Zoom Out Tool


Additive Mode Button


Add Point Button


Anti-Alias Button


Bold Text Button


Bézier Curve Button


Clone Retouch Tool


Clone Source Button


Color Palette Button


Color Probe Rectangular Sample Tool


Color Probe Tool


Color Shield Button


Color Swatch Button


Copy To Clipboard Button


Crop Mask Tool


Cut Button


Darken Filter Tool


Delete Point Button


Down One Layer Button


Draw Curve Mode Button


Draw Lines Mode Button


Draw Tool


Flip Texture Horizontally Button


Flip Texture Vertically Button


File Options Button


Fill Tool


Filter Tool


Freehand Draw Tool


Freehand Mask Tool


Gradient Fill Tool


Info Button


Inverse Mode Button


Italic Text Button


Justify Text Center Button


Justify Text Left Button


Justify Text Right Button


Lighten Filter Tool


Lock Objects Button


Mask Tool


Mask Channel Button


Move Point Button


New Image File Button


Open Image File Button


Paint Retouch Tool


Paint On Mask Tool


Paste Button


Point Edit Mask Tool


Polyline Draw Tool


Print Image Button


QuickZoom Button


Rectangular/Elliptical Mask Tool


Redo Button


Retouch Tool


Ruby Mask Button


Save Image File Button


Selector Tool


Selector Transform Tool


Shape Draw Tool


Sharpen Filter Tool


Smart Fill Tool


Smart Mask Tool


Smooth Filter Tool


Stitch Button


Subtractive Mode Button


Text Tool


Texture Fill Tool


Texture Retouch Tool


Tint Fill Tool


Transform Mask Tool


Underline Text Button


Undo Button


Up One Layer Button


View Actual Size Tool


View Circle Marker Button


View Entire Image Tool


View Full Screen Tool


View Tool


View Previous Tool


View Square Marker Button


Zoom In Tool


Zoom Out Tool


Getting Started

Each tutorial illustrates Picture Publisher features that you can learn in just a few minutes. You can start with any tutorial because they are independent of each other. Within each tutorial are two or three individual procedures that teach you various aspects of Picture Publisher. At the end of these tutorials is a Continue button. Click this button to move to the next part of the tutorial.

Before you begin, you should know how to open menus and choose commands with a mouse. Also, many tutorials let you practice with a sample Picture Publisher image; therefore, you should know how to open and close images in Picture Publisher.

Note

After you finish each tutorial, do not save changes to the file. Instead, click Close on the File menu. When Picture Publisher displays a message asking if you want to save the changes, click No.

Each tutorial assumes that Picture Publisher is already running before you begin.


Using Online Help

Online help is the quickest way to find answers to your Picture Publisher questions. In this tutorial you learn how to get instant, context-sensitive help, and how to find a topic using the Index tab.


Getting Instant Help for a Tool

You can get help for any button or tool in Picture Publisher’s window.

1	Click the Mask tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Freehand Mask tool [image].

3	Press F1 A help message for the Freehand Mask tool appears.

4	Click anywhere to close the help window.


Getting Instant Help for a Command

You can get help for any command in Picture Publisher’s menus.

1	On the File menu, point to Save.

2	Press F1. A help message for the Save command appears.

Tip

You can click the Help button and click a command on a menu or a button on the toolbar to display a help message for the command or button.


Searching for a Help Topic

Searching for a help topic is like using a book’s index. Click the Index tab when you want to find a topic based on its name. For example, to find help for print styles, base your search on the word "print."

1	Press F1 to open the help window, if necessary.

2	Click the Index tab.

3	Type Print. The index list shows entries beginning with "print."

4	Click Print Dialog Box to select it.

5	Click Display. A help message displays for the Print Dialog Box.

6	Close the help window by clicking the Close button [image] located in the top right corner of the Help window.

Tip

You can also use the Find tab to search for a word or phrase located in any help topic.


Using the Help Contents

The help Contents is similar to a book’s table of contents. You can click a topic to look up Picture Publisher’s terms, learn about shortcut keys and error messages, or view any of the other listed topics.

1	Press F1 to open Help and click the Contents tab.

2	Double-click Using Tools. A list of topics displays.

3	Double-click Mask tools. The Mask Tools topic opens.

4	Close the help window by clicking the Close button [image] located in the top right corner of the Help window.


Editing Screen Shots

Many desktop publishers have discovered that Picture Publisher is an excellent tool for editing screen shots to place into brochures, artwork for boxes, or other production work. A screen shot is a "snapshot" of your computer screen that you can paste into Picture Publisher.

In this tutorial, you learn how to capture the entire contents of your desktop, capture a single window from your desktop, paste the screen shots into Picture Publisher for editing, convert a screen shot to a grayscale image, and use a different palette.


Capturing Your Desktop

Windows has a built-in feature that lets you capture the content of your desktop and place a copy in the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste the contents of the Clipboard into Picture Publisher and edit the image.

1	Minimize Picture Publisher by clicking the Minimize button [image] in the top right corner of Picture Publisher’s window.

2	Press Print Screen. The contents of your desktop is placed into the Windows Clipboard.

3	Click Micrografx Picture Publisher on the Windows taskbar to maximize Picture Publisher.

4	On the Edit menu, click Paste As New Image. Picture Publisher creates a new image window and pastes the screen shot of your desktop into the image window.

After a screen shot is pasted into Picture Publisher, it becomes an image. You can edit it like any other image.


Fig. 1


Converting to Grayscale

Desktop publishers often convert color images to grayscale images to save disk space. If the image will be used only in a one-color printing, the color can be removed from the image without any loss of information.

1	On the Image menu, point to Convert To, and click Grayscale. The image becomes a grayscale image.

2	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.


Capturing a Window

The Windows screen capture feature also lets you capture only the active window instead of the entire desktop. In this section, you capture a screen shot of the Windows Calculator and paste it into Picture Publisher.

1	Minimize Picture Publisher by clicking the Minimize button [image] in the top right corner of Picture Publisher’s window.

2	Open the Windows Calculator by clicking the Start button, pointing to Programs, Accessories, and clicking Calculator.

3	Press Alt+Print Screen. The contents of the active window are placed into the Windows Clipboard.

4	Click Micrografx Picture Publisher in the Windows taskbar to maximize Picture Publisher.

5	On the Edit menu, click Paste As New Image. Picture Publisher creates a new image and pastes the screen shot of the Calculator into the image.


Fig. 2


Using a Different Palette

Next, you load a different palette to remove the possibility of "dithering." Dithering can create undesirable "cross-hatch" patterns in screen shots.

Note

If the Edit Palette command below is unavailable, you must first convert the image to a palette color. On the Image menu, point to Convert To and click Palette Color. The Convert To Palette Color dialog box opens. Click Convert.

1	On the Map menu, click Edit Palette. The Palette Editor dialog box opens showing colors in the current palette.

2	Click Load. The Load Palette dialog box opens.

3	In the Select Palette Name box, select Default Palette.

4	Click Load. The Load Palette dialog box closes.

5	In the Dither box, select None.

6	Click OK. The Default palette is remapped to the image, removing any dithering patterns in the image.

7	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.


Masking an Area of an Image

You can mask an area of an image and copy it to the Clipboard. When you paste the masked area, the pasted area becomes an object that you can resize, scale, rotate, flip, and skew.

In this tutorial, you paint a mask over a balloon; copy the masked area; and then paste, resize, and move the object to add a distant balloon in an image.


Painting a Mask

Picture Publisher lets you create a mask with many different tools. Perhaps the easiest masking tool to use is the Paint On Mask tool. You use the Paint On Mask tool to paint a mask over a balloon.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	In the Files of Type box, select All Files.

3	Double-click the file BALLOONS.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder. The file opens.

4	Click the Mask tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

5	Click the Paint On Mask tool [image]. The pointer changes to the brush shape selected in the ribbon.

6	Move the pointer to the center balloon, press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer over the center balloon until the entire balloon is covered with a mask.

7	Release the left mouse button when finished. A marquee appears around the area that you masked.

Note

To help you better see the area that you are masking, you can display the ruby overlay by clicking the Ruby Overlay button [image] on the Image Tools toolbar.

Repeat steps 6 and 7 as necessary to touch up any areas you may have missed. If you paint a mask outside the center balloon area, click the Subtractive Mode button [image] in the ribbon to "paint out" your mistake. Click the Additive Mode button [image] to continue painting a mask. You may need to zoom in to the image for a closer look.


Fig. 3


Creating an Object

You can copy a masked area and paste it to create an object. You can also scale the object to make it smaller.

1	On the Edit menu, click Copy. The masked area is copied to the Clipboard.

2	On the Mask menu, click Remove Mask. The mask is removed from the image.

3	On the Edit menu, click Paste. The area you copied is pasted as an object.

4	Point to a corner of the object. The pointer changes to a double-headed arrow.

5	Press and hold the left mouse button, and scale the object until the status line reads approximately 25%.

6	Release the mouse button. The object reduces in size.


Moving an Object

Now move the balloon object into the "sky" area of the image and feather the edges to make the object blend into the image.

1	Point inside the object. The pointer changes to a four-arrow pointer.

2	Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the object to the sky area above the balloons.

3	Release the left mouse button.

4	On the Object menu, click Feather Object. The Feather Object dialog box opens.

5	Click Feather. The balloon object is feathered and a marquee appears.

6	On the Object menu, point to Combine, and click All Objects With Base. The object is combined with the underlying image.

7	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.


Fig. 4


Smart Mask Tool

Picture Publisher offers many ways to mask an area of your image. A quick and easy way to create a mask is to use the Smart Mask tool. It automatically draws a mask by sensing color differences within an image and masking between them.

In this tutorial, you use the Smart Mask tool to draw a mask around a flower and reduce the lightness around the flower to make it stand out of the image.


Using the Smart Mask Tool

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file FLOWER.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder. The file opens.

3	Click the Mask tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

4	Click the Smart Mask tool [image]. The pointer changes to a magic wand.

5	Click inside the white area of the flower. A mask marquee appears around the flower. Because the inside of the flower is a different color, the mask did not draw around this area.

6	On the Mask menu, click Remove Holes. The unmasked area inside the mask is filled with a mask.


Fig. 5


Expanding a Mask

When the Smart Mask tool draws a mask around an area, the masked area is based on the color you clicked with the magic wand. In this case, you want the mask to be slightly larger to capture more of the flower edge. To expand the mask range, use the Expand button in the ribbon.

1	In the Expand box in the ribbon, type 3.

2	Click the Expand button [image] in the ribbon. The range of the colors included in the mask area is increased by 3 percent.


Inverting a Mask

With an object masked, you can invert the mask so the area around the object is masked and the object is not.

On the Mask menu, click Invert Mask. The mask is inverted.


Changing Saturation

1	On the Map menu, point to Contrast/Brightness, and click Joystick. The Contrast/Brightness dialog box opens.

2	In the Brightness box, type -20.

3	Click OK. The lightness is reduced in the masked area.

4	On the Mask menu, click Remove Mask. The mask is removed from the image.

5	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.


Fig. 6


Converting a Text Mask

When you type text into an image, the text is placed as an object. You can convert the text object to a mask and use the mask to protect an area. The result is like using a cookie cutter to cut text into your image.

In this tutorial, you create a postcard by protecting a text area and filling the remaining area with black.


Adding Text

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file POSTCARD.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder. The file opens.

3	Click the Text tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

4	In the Font box in the ribbon, click Arial.

5	In the Points box in the ribbon, type 200.

6	Click the Bold button [image] in the ribbon to make the text bold.

7	Point to the bottom left side of the image and click the left mouse button. A text cursor appears.

8	Type SKI.

9	Double-click the left mouse button. The word SKI appears over the image with an object marquee around the text.


Fig. 7


Converting an Object into a Mask

Text typed onto an image is an object. To create a mask around the text area, you can use the Create Mask from Object command. After the mask is created, you invert the masked area so you can later fill the area around the text.

1	On the Mask menu, click Create Mask from Object. A mask appears around the text. Notice that the marquee is now black and white instead of black and cyan.

2	On the Object menu, click Delete Objects.

3	On the Mask menu, click Invert Mask. The mask is inverted.


Filling an Area

1	Click the Color Palette button [image] on the Standard toolbar. The Color Palette opens. (You may need to move the Color Palette out of the way.)

2	Click the black color. The active color swatch becomes black.

3	Click the Fill tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

4	Click the Color Tint Fill tool [image]. The pointer changes to a paint bucket.

5	Point inside the image window away from the text area and click the left mouse button. The area outside the text area is filled with black.

6	On the Mask menu, click Remove Mask. The mask is removed from the image. (Fig. 10)

7	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.


Fig. 8


Using Merge Mask

The Merge Mask command is a powerful feature that lets you remove the portion of any selected object that is not inside the border of a mask. In this tutorial, you copy a sunset from an image, paste it over an image of the prehistoric Stonehenge monoliths, and merge the mask to make the sunset appear behind Stonehenge.


Copying Part of an Image

You begin by opening two images: one of Stonehenge and one of a sunset. After you copy part of the sunset image, you close it and work only with the Stonehenge image.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Click the file STONE.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder.

3	Press and hold Ctrl and click the file SUNSET.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder. Release Ctrl.

4	Click Open. Both files open.

5	Click the Mask tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

6	Click the Shape Mask [image] tool. The pointer changes to a razor knife.

7	Drag a mask around the sky area of the sunset image. Do not include the mountains or water in the mask.

Tip

While the left mouse button is pressed, you can press and hold the right mouse button to move the mask. This facilitates moving a mask to the edges of an image.

8	On the Edit menu, click Copy. The masked portion of the image is copied to the Clipboard.

9	On the File menu, click Close. The sunset image closes.


Fig. 9


Merging a Mask

You use the Smart Mask tool to select an area to be replaced with an image from the Clipboard.

1	Click the Mask tool [image] in the toolbox. The Mask tool set opens.

2	Click the Smart Mask tool [image]. The pointer changes to a magic wand.

3	In the Wand Range box in the ribbon, type 20. This increases the area that will be masked.

4	Click numerous times in different areas of the sky until all of the sky area is masked. Also click the sky area between the stones.

5	On the Edit menu, click Paste. The area you copied from the sunset image is pasted over the Stonehenge.

6	Drag the pasted image upward until it touches the top of the Stonehenge image.

7	On the Object menu, click Merge Mask. The area outside the mask is deleted.

8	On the Object menu, point to Combine, and click All Objects With Base. The sunset object is combined into the Stonehenge image.

9	On the Mask menu, click Remove Mask.

10	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.


Fig. 10


Using Chroma Mask

The Chroma Mask command in the Mask menu lets you select areas of an image (with a mask) based on their color. The Chroma Mask command is similar to the Color Shield except the Chroma Mask command lets you specify a "fade" along the edges of the mask so the end result looks more natural.

In this tutorial you use the Chroma Mask command to mask the background area surrounding a model and fill the background area with a texture.


Masking with the Chroma Mask

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file MODEL.TIF located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder.

3	On the Mask menu, click Chroma Mask. The Chroma Mask dialog box opens. (You may need to move the dialog box to see the image better.)

4	Click a Probe button [image] in the Chroma Mask dialog box. The pointer changes to a probe.

5	Move the pointer to the background area of the image and click the left mouse button.

6	In the Range box located next to the probe button you selected, type 27. This lets you mask a larger area.

7	In the Fade box, type 50. This increases the amount of fading along the edges of the mask.

8	Click OK. The Chroma Mask dialog box closes and the background area of the image is masked.


Fig. 11


Filling an Area with a Texture

You can fill a masked area with a texture to change the appearance of an image.

1	Click the Fill tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Texture Fill [image] tool. The pointer changes to a paint bucket.

3	Click the Texture button in the ribbon.

4	Drag the scroll box and choose Pink Marble from the list of textures.

4	Click the pointer on any part of the image. The background area is filled with the Marble texture.

5	On the Mask menu, click Remove Mask. The mask is removed from the image.

6	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.

Notice that the Chroma Mask command lets you create a natural blending between the model’s hair and the background.


Fig. 12


Saving a Mask

Picture Publisher lets you save masks so you can use them in other images. In this tutorial, you save a mask and use it in another image to create the effect of a palm tree casting its shadow over sand.


Opening Two Images

To work with two images, open both images at the same time. You can later use the Window menu to switch between the two windows.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Click the file SAND.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder.

3	Press and hold Ctrl and click the file TREE.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder. Release Ctrl.

4	Click Open. Both files open.


Saving the Mask

1	Click the Mask tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Smart Mask tool [image]. The pointer changes to a magic wand.

3	In the Wand Range box in the ribbon, type 25.

4	Click in the center of the blue sky area that surrounds the palm tree in the tree image. A mask marquee appears around the blue area.

5	On the Mask menu, click Invert Mask. A mask marquee appears around the tree.

6	On the Mask menu, click Save Mask. The Save Mask dialog box opens.

7	In the Enter Mask Name box, type Tree.

8	Click Save. The mask of the tree is saved.


Using a Mask to Create a Shadow

Now you move to the sand image, load the tree mask, feather the mask to make it look more natural, stretch the mask to make it look like a shadow, and darken the area inside the mask to make a shadow.

1	On the Window menu, click SAND.JPG. The file becomes the active image.

2	On the Mask menu, click Load Mask. The Load Mask dialog box opens.

3	In the Select Mask Name box, click Tree.

4	Click Load. The Tree mask appears over the sand image.

5	Drag the mask down until the bottom of the mask appears on the bottom of the sand.

6	In the Transformation box in the ribbon, select Distort. This option lets you stretch the mask to make it look more like a shadow.

7	Individually drag the top corner handles of the mask upwards and to the right.

8	Double-click the left mouse button to anchor the mask. A marquee appears over the sand.

9	On the Mask menu, click Feather Mask. The Feather Mask dialog box opens.

10	In the Amount box, type 3.

11	In the Direction box, select Outside.

12	Click Feather. This feathers the mask so the shadow looks more natural.

13	Click the Filter tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

14	Click the Darken tool [image]. The pointer changes to the brush size and shape selected in the ribbon.

12	In the Size box in the ribbon, type 50.

13	In the Pressure box in the ribbon, type 10.

14	Move the pointer over the mask, press and hold the left mouse button, and "paint" the masked area until it is completely darkened. Release the left mouse button. You can paint over the mask lines, and only the masked area is darkened.

15	On the Mask menu, click Remove Mask. The mask is removed and the shadow is complete.

16	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.


Fig. 13


Fig. 14


Texturizing an Image

You can create a textured effect by pasting an image over another image using special options. When you copy and paste a masked area, the pasted area is an object that can be modified using options such as Transparency and Merge Mode. In this tutorial, you use the Texturize option in the Merge Mode box in the ribbon to create the texture of bricks on an image of the earth.


Creating an Object

You create an object by masking an area in an image, copying the masked area, and pasting the object from the Clipboard.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Click the file EARTH.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder.

3	Press and hold CTRL and click the file TEXTURE.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher directory. Release CTRL.

4	Click Open. Both files open.

5	On the Window menu, click TEXTURE.JPG to activate the image window.

6	On the Edit menu, click Copy. The image is copied to the Clipboard.

7	On the Window menu, click EARTH.JPG. The earth image becomes the active image.

8	On the Edit menu, click Paste. The contents of the Clipboard are pasted over the image of the earth.


Fig. 15


Using the Merge Mode

When you pasted the brick texture, it completely covered the image of the earth. However, the pasted image is an object; its attributes can be changed and the object can be moved.

1	In the Merge Mode box in the ribbon, click Texturize. The image of the earth shows through with a brick texture.

2	Drag the object so the center of the brick texture is centered in the earth.

3	Double-click the left mouse button. The object is anchored to the earth image and an object marquee appears around the object.

4	On the Object menu, click Hide Marquee. The marquee disappears.

5	On the File menu, click Close All. Click No when prompted to save the image.

Even though the object is anchored, it still remains an object, and therefore can be moved or can have other options applied to it.


Fig. 16


Creating Great Line Art

Line art images (also called monochrome or bi-level) are composed of only two gray values: black and white. Because they are easy to reproduce, line art images are used in many publications. Any image can be converted into line art using the Convert To submenu in the Image menu. However, you may not get the results you want if you do not process the image properly.

This tutorial shows you how you can process an image to create great line art from any image.

Normally the first step in creating line art is to convert a color image to a grayscale image using the Convert To Grayscale command in the Image menu. In this tutorial, the image is already converted for you.

The next step is to change the threshold of the image using the Threshold command in the Map menu. By changing the threshold, you control which areas in the image are black or white. You also mask part of an image to change the threshold of the masked area, then invert the mask and change the threshold by a different amount for the rest of the image.


Masking Part of an Image

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file LINEART.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder. The file opens.

3	Click the Mask tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

4	Click the Freehand Mask tool [image]. The pointer changes to a knife.

5	Carefully drag a mask around the eyes, nose, and mouth area to mask off the face. Double-click the left mouse button. A mask is created around the face area.


Fig. 17


Changing the Threshold of a Masked Area

You created a mask around the face area to change the threshold by a different amount from the rest of the image. If you did not do this, the face area would disappear when you change the threshold by the amount needed by the rest of the image.

1	On the Map menu, click Threshold. The Threshold dialog box opens.

2	Move the Threshold slider until it reads approximately 20%. The threshold of the image changes as you drag the slider.

3	Click OK. The Threshold dialog box closes and the threshold of the area inside the mask is changed.

Now you invert the mask and change the threshold of the rest of the image by a greater amount.

4	On the Mask menu, click Invert Mask. The mask is inverted.

5	On the Map menu, click Threshold. The Threshold dialog box opens.

6	Move the Threshold slider until it reads approximately 50%. The threshold of the image changes as you drag the slider.

7	Click OK. The Threshold dialog box closes and the threshold of the area outside the mask is changed.

8	Press Ctrl+R to remove the mask.


Converting an Image to Line Art

The image now looks like a line art image, but it is still a grayscale image and must be converted.

1	On the Image menu, point to Convert To, and click Line Art. The image is converted to a line art image even though it looks the same.

2	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.

Tip

Use the Retouch tools to remove unwanted black areas in the image.


Fig. 18


Removing Red from an Eye

You can easily remove the red from a subject’s eye caused by a camera flash. In this tutorial, you remove the red from a cat’s eye by opening the image using FastBits and then painting over the red color to make it black.


Using FastBits

FastBits is a method of opening and editing only a portion of an image to make editing faster. Any changes you make to the edited portion of the image are applied to the entire image when you save.

Note:

FastBits can only be used with TIFF files. For changes to affect the entire image, you must save the changes to the same filename as the original file.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	In the Mode box, select FastBits.

3	In the File of Type box, select TIF.

4	Double-click the file REDEYE.TIF located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher directory. The FastBits Open dialog box opens.

5	Point above and to the left of the eye on the left.

6	Press and hold the left mouse button and drag to the lower right. As you drag, a grid pattern appears and changes size.

Tip

Press and the right mouse button to reposition the grid while drawing the grid.

7	Release the left mouse button. A grid appears over the image, and the area you selected with the pointer is inverted.

8	Click Lock Grid In Place in the FastBits Open dialog box. The grid is locked in place.

9	Click Open. The area you selected opens.


Fig. 19


Removing the Red

Now you open the Color Palette, select the black color, and paint black over the red part of the eye. Usually, the part of the eye that reflects red should be black.

1	Click the Maximize button [image] located in the top right corner of the image window to maximize the window view.

2	Click the View tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

3	Click the Zoom In tool [image] and move the pointer over the image. The pointer changes to a magnifying glass.

4	Drag a rectangle around the red part of the eye. When you release the mouse button, the image zooms in so you can edit the eye.

5	Click the Color Palette button [image] on the Standard toolbar to open the Color Palette, if necessary. The Color Palette opens.

6	Click the black color in the Color Palette.

7	Click the Retouch tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

8	Click the Paint tool [image]. The pointer changes to the brush size and shape selected in the ribbon.

9	In the Size box in the ribbon, type 2.

10	Move the Transparency slider to 10%.

11	Carefully paint over the red part of the eye to remove the red.

12	Click the View tool in the Main toolbar.

13	Click the Actual Size tool to see the results of your edit.

14	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.


Fig. 20


Creating a Texture

Picture Publisher includes many textures that can be used in an entire image or in a portion of an image. You can also create your own textures.

In this tutorial, you open a new image, draw a mask, fill the mask area with a gradient fill, and then use that area to create a new texture. After the texture is created, you tile the new texture over the entire image.


Creating a New Texture

Although Picture Publisher is an excellent image-editing program for existing images, you can also use it to create new, original images and textures.

1	On the File menu, click New. The New Image dialog box opens.

2	In the Image Type box, select RGB Color.

3	Click Create. A new image window appears.

4	Click the Mask tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

5	Click the Shape Mask tool [image]. The pointer changes to a razor knife.

6	Click the Additive Mode button [image] in the ribbon.

7	In the Shape list box in the ribbon, select the circle.

8	In the Method box, select Constrain Size. The ribbon displays other options.

9	In the Width and Height boxes in the ribbon, type 1.

10	Move the pointer inside the image and click the left mouse button. A circular mask appears in the image area.

11	Click the Color Palette button [image] on the Standard toolbar.

12	Click the color magenta in the Color Palette to set the active color to magenta.

13	Move the pointer to the Color Swatch [image] and click the alternate color to make it the active color.

14	Click the color red in the Color Palette to set the alternate color to red.

15	Click the Fill tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

16	Click the Gradient Fill tool [image]. The pointer changes to a paint bucket and crosshairs.

17	In the Color Model box in the ribbon, select HSL. This option creates a gradient of all colors between magenta and red.

18	Drag the pointer diagonally across the masked area at approximately a 45-degree angle. A rainbow of colors appears in the masked area.

19	On the Edit menu, click Copy To. The Copy To dialog box opens.

20	Click Texture.

21	In the Texture Name box, type Rainbow.

22	Click Copy. You now have a new texture called Rainbow.


Fig. 21


Tiling a Texture

Now that you have a new texture, you use it to tile your entire image.

1	On the Mask menu, click Remove Mask. The mask is removed from the image.

2	Click the Fill tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

3	Click the Texture Fill tool [image]. The pointer changes to a paint bucket.

4	Click the Texture button in the ribbon.

5	Drag the scroll box and choose Rainbow from the list of textures.

6	Click both Flip buttons [image] in the ribbon.

7	Point to the image area and click the left mouse button. The entire image is tiled with the texture you created.

8	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.


Fig. 22


Creating a Vignette

A vignette is where the edges of an image gradually blend into the background. You can easily duplicate this common photographic process by creating a mask directly on Picture Publisher’s mask channel. In this tutorial you create a vignette around an image of a dog.


Using the Mask Channel

You begin by creating a gradient mask on the mask channel and inverting the mask to protect the inside area of the image.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file DOG.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder. The file opens.

3	Click the Mask Channel button [image] on the Image Tools toolbar. The image becomes black.

4	Click the Fill tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

5	Click the Gradient Fill tool [image]. The pointer changes to a paint bucket and crosshairs.

6	In the Gradient Type box in the ribbon, select Circular.

7	In the Midpoint box in the ribbon, type 75. This makes a sharper gradient.

8	Starting at a corner of the image, drag the pointer diagonally across the image to create a gradient on the mask channel.

Tip

Press and hold the right mouse button and move the mouse to reposition the mask while you are drawing it.

9	Click the Mask Channel button on the Image Tools toolbar to return to the image.

10	On the Mask menu, click Invert Mask. The gradient mask is inverted.


Fig. 23


Filling the Masked Area

Now you fill the gradient mask with the background color to complete the vignette.

1	Click the Color Probe tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Dropper tool [image]. The pointer changes to a probe.

3	Click the background color of the image with the probe. The background color is loaded into the active color swatch.

4	Click the Fill tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

5	Click the Color Tint Fill tool [image].The pointer changes to a paint bucket.

6	Click on any part of the image. The background color is filled around the dog’s head.

7	On the Mask menu, click Remove Mask. The mask is removed from the image.

8	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.


Fig. 24


Aligning and Ordering Objects

You can align and change the order of Picture Publisher objects in relation to other objects in an image. In this tutorial you align and order planets in an imaginary solar system.

The image file used in this tutorial contains many objects and was saved in Picture Publisher’s native file format (PPF). The PPF and PP5 formats are the only formats in which Picture Publisher can save objects.


Aligning to the Image

You can align objects in relation to each other or to the image. You use both alignment methods in this tutorial. First you select two objects (the top two) and align them to the image.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file SPACE.PPF located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder. The file opens.

3	Click the Selector tool [image] on the Main toolbar.

4	Click the top right object. An object marquee appears around the selected object.

5	Press and hold Shift and click the blue planet. Both objects are selected. Release Shift.

6	On the Object menu, click Align. The Object Alignment dialog box opens.

7	Click the Horizontal Align to Center [image] and Vertical Align to Center [image] buttons in the Object Alignment dialog box. The icons in the Object Alignment dialog box move to the center.

8	Click OK. The two objects are aligned to the exact center of the image.


Fig. 25


Aligning to Each Other

Now you align (distribute) some of planets in relation to each other.

1	Click the Selector tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the bottom left planet. An object marquee appears around the selected object.

3	Press and hold Shift and click the smallest two planets. The blue, red, and yellow planets are selected. Release Shift.

4	On the Object menu, click Align. The Object Alignment dialog box opens.

5	In the Alignment Type box, select Object to Object.

6	Click the Horizontal [image] and Vertical Distribute [image] buttons in the Object Alignment dialog box.

7	Click OK. The three planets are distributed evenly.


Changing the Order of Objects

Objects are stored in the order they were placed. You can change this order by using the Order command on the Object menu, or by dragging objects in the Object Manager. In this section, you change the order of the blue planet by using the Object Manager.

1	On the View menu, click Object Manager. The Object Manager window opens.

2	Click the red planet once in the Object Manager to select it.

3	Drag the red planet to the bottom of the Object Manager. The red planet is moved behind the largest planet.

4	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.


Fig. 26


Using the command list manager
Using the Command Center

The Command Center is a record of all the actions performed in Picture Publisher to make changes to an image. You can use the Command Center to move, add, or delete commands. The Command Center provides some powerful tools to help you organize commands and to create branches to allow you to do "What If?" editing of your image. Additional tools are provided to help you precisely locate commands of interest in the Command Center.

In this tutorial, you want to change an ordinary photograph of Texas Longhorn Cattle into a charcoal print that is blurred on the edges. To do this, you create a gradient mask by applying a gradient to the mask channel and then you apply an effect over the image. By filling the mask channel with a gradient, certain areas of the image are protected from the applied effect. You also discover that, in the process of changing the image, you forgot to issue an important command that changes the outcome of the effect. You then edit the Command Center to insert the missing command. First, you organize the commands so that future editing of the Command Center is easier. Next you locate the point in the Command Center where the command should be added and finally, you edit the Command Center to insert the missing command.


Applying a Gradient to the Mask Channel

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file COMMAND.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder. The file opens.

3	Click the Mask Channel button [image]. The image turns black.

4	Click the Fill tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

5	Click the Gradient Fill tool [image]. The pointer changes to a paint bucket and crosshairs.

6	In the Gradient Type box in the ribbon, select Radial.

7	Move the pointer to the center of the image, press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer to a corner of the image. Release the left mouse button. The mask channel is filled with a gradient.

8	Click the Mask Channel button on the Image Tools toolbar. The image returns to normal.


Fig. 27


Applying an Effect

Now you apply an effect to the image.

1	On the Image menu, click Effects. The EffectsBrowser dialog box opens.

2	Select Charcoal from the list of Artistic effects.

3	Move the Pressure slider until the value is approximately 50%.

4	Click Apply.

5	Click OK. The Charcoal effect is applied to the image.


Organizing the Command List
Organizing the Command Center

The Command Center contains tools that let you organize the changes you make to an image so that the image can be edited later using the Command Center. Organization of the commands along with good descriptive labeling makes the task of finding and editing commands much easier.

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center. The Command Center dialog box opens.

2	In the Commands area, select the first commands up to and including the EditMaskChannel command and then choose the Group button. The commands are placed inside a new untitled folder.

2	In the Commands area, select the remaining commands and choose the Group button. The commands are placed inside a new untitled folder.

3	Click a folder to select it.

4	Click the name of the first folder. The name editing box appears.

5	Type Create Gradient Mask Radial and then press Enter.

6	Repeat steps 3 through 5 for the second folder. In step 5, type Apply Charcoal Effect 50% Pressure.

7	Click OK.


Editing the Command List

Oops, the inside of the image is blurred instead of the outside of the image. The mask you created should have been inverted so that the inside of the image is in focus. You edit the Command Center to add the Invert Mask command to correct this problem.

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center. The Command Center dialog box opens.

2	Click in the Insertion Pointer column [image] on the same line as the Create Gradient Mask Radial folder to move the Insertion Pointer next to the folder. Any new commands added are automatically listed below this folder.

3	If necessary, click the box to the left of the folder to close it. A + appears in the box. Since the folder is closed, commands will be inserted after the folder, rather than in it.

4	Click OK. The image is regenerated up to the creation of the radial mask channel.

5	On the Mask menu, click Invert Mask. The mask is inverted.

6	On the Edit menu, click Command Center. The Command Center dialog box opens showing the inserted command.

7	Click in the Insertion Pointer column [image] at the bottom of the Command List.

8	Click OK. The image is rebuilt with the Charcoal effect applied to the outside edges of the image.

9	Press Ctrl+R to remove the mask.

10	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.


Fig. 28


Colorizing an Image

You can use Picture Publisher’s Hue Map command to colorize black-and-white (grayscale) images. In this tutorial, you colorize an old photograph of a boy.


Converting to RGB Color

Before you can colorize an image, you must convert the grayscale image to a color image.

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file COLORIZE.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder. The file opens.

3	On the Image menu, point to Convert To, and click RGB Color. The image becomes a color image even though it still appears as a grayscale image.


Using Hue Map to Colorize

The Hue Map command lets you put color back into a black-and-white image. First you mask an area to colorize.

1	Click the Maximize button [image] in the top right corner of the image window to maximize the window, if necessary.

2	Click the View tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

3	Click the Zoom In tool [image] and move the pointer over the image. The pointer changes to a magnifying glass.

4	Drag a rectangle around the face with the magnifying glass pointer. The image zooms to the face area.

5	Click the Mask tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

6	Click the Paint On Mask tool [image]. The pointer changes to the brush size and shape selected in the ribbon. You may need to increase or decrease the brush size; use a size you feel comfortable with.

7	Move the pointer to the face area and carefully paint a mask over the face, ears, and neck of the boy. Don’t worry if you make mistakes; you can correct them in the next two steps.

8	Click the Subtractive Mode button [image] in the ribbon.

9	Paint over the eye and mouth areas of the boy to remove the mask from these areas. You may have to reduce the size of the brush. Use this mode to correct any mistakes you made when creating the mask.

10	On the Map menu, click Hue Map. The Hue Map dialog box opens.

11	Move the Saturation Shift slider until it reads approximately 20%.

12	Move the first Hue slider down until the masked area becomes a flesh-tone hue.

13	Click OK. The masked area is colorized.

14	On the Mask menu, click Remove Mask. The mask is removed from the image.

Using the technique you just learned, you can colorize the other parts of the image. The jacket is a good place start. Don’t forget about the boy’s hair, lips, and eyes. You may also want to practice using other masking tools such as the Smart Mask tool with the ruby overlay.

15	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.


Fig. 29


Fig. 30


Retouching an Image

A common use for Picture Publisher is restoring old photographs by retouching. In this tutorial, you learn how to retouch a damaged black-and-white photograph using the Clone tool.

While retouching an image is not difficult, it does require patience. You must proceed slowly and make changes to the image in small increments. Large changes often look unnatural and are difficult to control.

You use the QuickZoom window to move around quickly in the image and to view the changes on the entire image.


Opening the QuickZoom Window

1	On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box opens.

2	Double-click the file RETOUCH.JPG located in the TUTORIAL folder of the Picture Publisher folder. The file opens.

3	On the View menu, click QuickZoom. The QuickZoom window opens.

4	Resize the QuickZoom window by dragging its bottom left corner until the QuickZoom window fills about one-quarter of the Picture Publisher screen. The QuickZoom window always maintains the aspect ratio of the full image.

5	Move the pointer inside the QuickZoom window and drag a rectangle in a damaged area of the image. The image zooms into the area you selected. Press and hold the right mouse button to reposition the rectangle while drawing.

Tip

You can move quickly to another area in the image by clicking in the QuickZoom window, or you can drag another rectangle in the QuickZoom window to zoom in or out of the image.


Fig. 31


Retouching with the Clone Tool

Now that you have zoomed into a damaged portion of the image, you can begin using the Clone tool to retouch the damaged area. The Clone tool lets you use adjacent areas to copy, or "clone," over the damaged areas.

The Clone tool consists of two brushes: the source brush and the destination brush. The source brush, marked with an X, indicates the source of the clone and the destination brush indicates the location where the copy will be placed.

1	Click the Retouch tool [image] in the Main toolbar.

2	Click the Clone tool [image].

3	In the Feather box in the ribbon, type 100.

4	Move the Transparency slider in the ribbon to 50%.

5	Click the Source button in the ribbon.

6	Position the source brush close to the damaged area in the image and click the left mouse button to set its position.

7	Position the destination brush in a damaged area near the source brush and click the left mouse button. A small area from under the source brush is copied to the area under the destination brush.

8	Move the Clone tool a small distance and click the left mouse button to "dab" more of the adjacent area over the damaged area.

9	Press Shift to move the destination brush a small distance. Pressing Shift lets you move the destination brush without moving the source brush. Release Shift to continue cloning.

The secret to successful cloning is to clone in small increments while frequently changing the location of the source and destination brushes. Be sure to clone areas from both sides of the damaged area.

10	Click the left mouse button to clone another small area.

11	While moving throughout the image with the QuickZoom window, repeat steps 7 through 10 to remove the damaged areas in the image.

12	On the File menu, click Close. Click No when prompted to save the image.

Tip

If you have zoomed to a different location and the brushes are not visible, click the Source button again and click in the image. Then click to place the destination brush.

The striped areas in the image can be cloned by placing the source brush over a "good" stripe and moving the destination brush over the area that should be striped. You may also have to change the size of the brushes to fit into "tight" areas of the image.

The "fixed" image at the beginning of this tutorial was retouched using only the Clone tool. Depending on your success with the Clone tool, you may also have to retouch the image with other tools such as the Smear or Airbrush tools.


Fig. 32


Brush Styles

When you open the Retouch, Filter or Draw tool sets, you choose the brush style by clicking the Brush Styles button on the ribbon. The example below shows the Brush Styles dialog box for the Paint tool of the Retouch tool set.

You can scroll through the list of categories, collapsing or expanding the categories by clicking the + or - signs. When you find the brush style you want to use, click the brush style name. A red check mark indicates this is the active brush style.

You can undock the Brush Styles dialog box by dragging it away from the ribbon and dropping it on your workspace. When you undock the Brush Styles dialog box, you can change brush styles on the fly.

If you leave the Brush Styles dialog box docked on the ribbon and choose a brush style, the dialog box closes.

You can also edit existing brush styles, delete brush styles, add brush styles, and reset brush styles from the Brush Styles dialog box.

Note

The Smear, Eraser, and Spray Can tools are located in the Brush Styles dialog box for the Paint tool. These three tools have their own categories and corresponding brush styles.


About the Edit Brush command

About the Delete Brush command

About the Add Brush command

About the Reset Brush command


To edit a brush style

To delete a brush style

To add a custom brush

To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command

To reset a brush style


Edit Brush Command

The Edit command lets you edit existing brush styles. A brush style is a collection of attributes for a brush that can be added and edited.


About brush styles


To edit a brush style


Edit Brush command
Edit Brush Dialog Box

The Edit Brush dialog box lets you edit existing brush styles. A brush style is a collection of attributes for a brush that can be added and edited.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Edit Brush command
Edit Brush Dialog Box

The Edit Brush dialog box lets you edit existing brush styles. A brush style is a collection of attributes for a brush that can be added and edited.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Edit Brush command
Edit Brush Dialog Box

The Edit Brush dialog box lets you edit existing brush styles. A brush style is a collection of attributes for a brush that can be added and edited.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Create Dialog Box

The Create dialog box lets you name a new brush tip. If you have masked off an area from which you want to create a new brush tip, you can name the brush tip in this dialog box.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To create a new brush tip


To create a new brush tip

1	Mask off the area from which you want to create a new brush tip.

2	In the Retouch, Filter or Draw tool ribbon, click the Brush Styles button.

3	In the Shape box in the ribbon, click Create.

4	In the Brush Name box, type the name of the new brush tip.

5	Click Create. Now you can choose the new brush tip from the Shape box in the ribbon.


Lets you set how far apart the points in a brush or pen stroke are laid down. You can create very solid or very dotty brushes or pens. Experiment to get the style you want.


Lets you set how fast a brush or pen fades to nothing. The size of the brush or pen gets smaller as a brush or pen fades.


Lets you choose the solid brush or pen to use.


Lets you choose the scattered brush or pen to use.

Note

If you choose Scattered, the Scatter Pressure area becomes active. You must enter a value greater than zero for the Scattered style to work.


Lets you set how scattered the scatter style is. A low value creates a very sparse scatter style, and a high value creates a very dense scatter style.


Lets you set how true the brush or pen stroke is to the actual stroke. For example, if the Smoothness setting is low, you may get straight lines between strokes when moving the brush or pen quickly. Turn up the Smoothness setting to record the strokes and place them on the image.


Lets you specify whether the brush or pen strokes double up when transparency is used. For example, you may want a specific transparency to be applied only once to an area of the image. If you turn off this option, only one layer of paint is applied per brushing or drawing session. However, this option can take up more memory when using the Manual Apply mode.


Lets you try out the brush style you want.


Lets you clear the editing area.


Type the name of the path and folder for the brush you want to add.


Select the name of the category in which the brush you want to edit is stored.


Type the name of the brush you want to edit.


Click Brush if you want the brush attributes to be those of brushing tools.


Click Smear if you want the brush attributes to be those of smear tools.


Click Spray if you want the brush attributes to be those of spray tools.


Click Erase if you want the brush attributes to be those of erase tools.


To edit a brush style

1	In the Retouch, Filter or Draw tool ribbon, click the Brush Styles button.

2	Click Edit. The Edit Brush dialog box opens.

3	In the Category box, select the name of the category in which the brush is stored.

4	In the Name box, type the name of the brush you want to edit.

5	Set the attributes for the style.

6	Click OK.


About the Edit Brush command

About brush styles


Lets you define the method of merging colors of an object related to the existing base image and other overlapping objects.

The various methods are decribed in the Picture Publisher Help topic "Merge Modes".


Delete Brush Command

The Delete command lets you delete brush styles. You can delete only the brush styles you added.


To delete a brush style


To delete a brush style

1	In the Retouch, Filter or Draw tool ribbon, click the Brush Styles button.

2	Highlight the style you want to delete.

3	Click Delete. A confirmation dialog box opens.

4	Click OK.

Note

You can delete only the brush styles you added.


About the Delete Brush command

About brush styles


Add Brush Command

The Add Brush dialog box lets you add a custom brush style to the list of brush style categories. You are most likely to use this command if someone has given you a custom brush they created using Picture Publisher (.MBS file format). After copying their file onto your hard disk, you need to let Picture Publisher know there is a new brush on your system.


To add a custom brush

To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command


Add brush command
Add Brush Dialog Box

The Add command lets you add a custom brush style to the list of brush style categories. You are most likely to use this command if someone has given you a custom brush they created using Picture Publisher (.MBS file format). After copying their file onto your hard disk, you need to let Picture Publisher know there is a new brush on your system.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


To add a custom brush

1	In the Retouch, Filter or Draw tool ribbon, click the Brush Styles button.

2	Click Add. The Add Brush dialog box opens.

3	Type the name of the path and folder for the brush you want to add.

4	Select the name of the category for the new brush from the drop-down list.

5	Type the name of the brush style.

6	Click OK.


To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command

About the Add Brush command

About brush styles


To add a custom brush using the Copy To command
To add a custom brush shape using the Copy To command

1	Draw a mask around the area you want to make into a custom brush shape.

2	On the Edit menu, click Copy To.

3	Click Brush Tip.

4	Type a name for the brush shape in the Brush Name box.

5	Click Copy.


To add a custom brush

About the Add Brush command

About brush styles


Reset Brush Command

The Reset command lets you restore a brush style to its default options. You can only reset a brush style if you made changes to the brush using the ribbon. If you made changes to a brush using the Edit Brush command, clicking Reset only restores the options to those you changed using the Edit Brush command.


To reset a brush style


To reset a brush style

1	In the Retouch, Filter or Draw tool ribbon, click the Brush Styles button.

2	Highlight the style you want to reset.

3	Click Reset.

Note

You can reset a brush style if you made changes to the brush using the ribbon.


About the Reset Brush command

About brush styles


Command Center

This command opens the Command Center dialog box to let you edit the Command List.

The Command Center lets you make changes to the Command List and test those changes. When you have made changes to the Command List, the current image file is regenerated with the changes so you can see the results.

The Command Center also provides tools that let you organize the commands used in modifying your image so that you can manage those changes. Then, when you save the image file in PPF format, the Command List information can also be saved.


Why should I use the Command Center?

Organizing the Command Center

Editing the Command Center

About the Command Center dialog box

The benefits of saving a file in the PPF format


To change the order of commands in the Command Center

To insert new commands in the Command Center

To enable or disable a command in the Command Center

To delete commands from the Command Center

To group commands in the Command Center

To create a branch of commands in the Command Center

To insert a new folder in the Command Center

To add comments to the Command Center

To edit the properties of a command in the Command Center

To commit the changes to a PPF/PP5 file

To step through the commands in the Command Center

To use Command Center stop points


Command Center Dialog Box

This dialog box lets you make changes to the Command Center and test those changes. When you have made changes to the Command Center, the current image file is regenerated with the changes so you can see the results.

This dialog box also provides tools that let you organize the commands used in modifying your image so that you can manage those changes. Then, when you save the image file in PPF format, the Command Center information can also be saved.

Edit tab

The Edit tab lets you change the order of the commands in the Command Center, disable or enable commands, insert commands, delete commands, and edit the properties of commands. You can use the tools on this tab to organize the changes you make to an image, for example, so that you can create several different versions of an image. You can create a folder into which you can store commands. You can select a group of commands and store it in a folder. You can also insert a command branch. Inserting a branch creates a new branch folder after the selected command in the Command area. This folder contains folders which contain sets of alternative commands. Only one of these folders can be enabled at one time.

This tab also lets you add a comment in the Command Center for any folder or branch. Adding comments lets you annotate the commands for future use.

Option tab

The Option tab lets you load a macro containing a set of commands and insert it into the Command Center after the currently selected command. It also lets you save a set of commands as a macro.

You can also choose options that let you track different versions of the image based on the author of the changes and the date of the changes. If the date or author has changed since the last time the file was opened, these options automatically insert new folders in the Command Center when the file is opened. The new group folder is titled according to the author's name, based on the current user's login name, or the current date.

The Option tab also lets you commit the changes to the current image file up to a selected command. When the changes are committed, the image file is regenerated with all changes made prior to the selected command. Committed commands are removed from the Command Center. The unselected commands remain in the Command Center.

Step tab

The Step tab lets you step through the commands in the Command Center so that you can identify a particular command or a folder containing a command of interest. You can choose to single step through the commands, step through the commands in folders, or animate the steps. You can choose to exclude commands from the steps so that you can isolate the command of interest. Excluded commands are not deleted from the Command Center; they are simply deselected from the stepping process.

Stop Points tab

The Stop Points tab lets you define stopping points in the Command Center so you can regenerate the image up to the point when a selected command type is executed or a command affects an area on the image that you define. This helps you review the changes made to the image up to that point so you can accurately locate a command of interest. You can use the two features alone or in combination. Using the combination feature lets you locate a particular type of command that affects an area on the image.

Note

Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.


Why should I use the Command Center?

Organizing the Command Center

Editing the Command Center

About the Command Center Edit command

The benefits of saving a file in the PPF format


Displays the commands, folders, and branches.


Enables or disables the selected commands in the Command area.


Deletes the selected command in the Command area.


Creates a new untitled folder after the selected command in the Command area. The folder is open.


Creates a new closed untitled folder after the selected command in the Command area and places the selected commands in the new folder.


Creates a new untitled branch folder after the selected command in the Command area. This folder contains alternate commands or folders which contain sets of alternative commands. Only one of these commands or folders can be enabled at one time.


Opens the Save Macro dialog box to let you save the commands in the Command area as a macro.


Opens the Load Macro dialog box to let you insert a macro after the selected command in the Command area.


Regenerates the PPF/PP5 image file with all changes made prior to the selected command and saves the changes to the base file. The committed commands are removed from the Command Center.

Note

If the original file was linked, the link is broken. A new PPF file is created.


Initiates the single stepping of commands in the Command Center.


Initiates stepping of folders in the Command Center.


Initiates playing of the commands in the Command Center without pausing between steps.


Stops playing of the commands in the Command Center.


Resets the image to its original condition before playing of the commands in the Command Center.


Plays the commands in the Command Center, pausing briefly between commands.


Lets you select the type of stop points to be used: Stop on Command Type, Stop on Area, or Stop on Command Type and Area.


Lets you select the type of command to stop on.


Lets you define the location of the area to be stopped on by letting you drag a rectangle on the image. Drawing the rectangle automatically fills the adjacent boxes with values indicating the locations of the sides of the rectangle referenced in pixels to the upper left corner of the image.


Lets you define the location of left side of the area to be stopped on. Referenced in pixels from the left side of the image.


Lets you define the location of top of the area to be stopped on. Referenced in pixels from the top of the image.


Lets you define the location of right side of the area to be stopped on. Referenced in pixels from the left side of the image.


Lets you define the location of bottom of the area to be stopped on. Referenced in pixels from the top of the image.


Shows the currently defined stop points.


Adds the currently displayed stop point to the Stop Points area.


Removes the currently selected stop point from the Stop Points area.


Removes all stop points from the Stop Points area.


To change the order of commands in the Command Center

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center.

2	Click Edit.

3	If necessary, open or close any folders.

Note

Closed folders are marked with a + in the box to the left of the folder icon. Items dragged to a closed folder are moved to the position following the folder. Open folders have a - in the box. Items dragged to an open folder are placed inside the folder.

4	Change the order of the commands by dragging the commands and folders to different locations in the Command Center.

5	Click OK.


About the Command Center Edit command

Why should I use the Command Center?

Organizing the Command Center

Editing the Command Center

The benefits of saving a file in the PPF format

To edit the Command Center


To enable or disable a command in the Command Center

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center.

2	Select the command or commands in the Command Center that you want to enable or disable. Selection of multiple commands must be contiguous.

3	Click Enable to change the status of the commands.

4	Click OK.

Note

Commands shown with a red X are disabled.


To delete a command from the Command Center

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center.

2	Select the command in the Command Center that you want to delete.

3	Click Delete.

4	Click OK.

Note

Selection of multiple commands for deletion is not allowed.


To create a group of commands in the Command Center

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center.

2	Select the commands in the Command Center that you want to group. Selection of commands must be contiguous.

3	Click Group. A closed untitled folder appears. The grouped commands are contained within the folder.

Note

Closed folders are marked with a + in the box to the left of the folder icon. Open folders have a - in the box.

4	Click the title of the new folder, pause briefly, and then click the title again.

5	Type a name for the folder.


To create a command branch in the Command Center

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center.

2	Select the command in the Command Center after which you want to create a branch.

3	Click Branch. An open untitled branch appears in the Command Center.

4	Click the title of the new branch, pause briefly, and then click the title again.

5	Type a name for the branch.

6	If necessary, click the box to the left of the branch icon to open the folder.

Note

Closed folders are marked with a + in the box to the left of the folder icon. Open folders have a - in the box.

6	Drag alternative commands and folders into the branch.

7	Click the command or folder to be enabled, then click Enable.


To insert a new folder in the Command Center

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center.

2	Select the command in the Command Center after which you want to create a folder.

3	Click New Folder. An open untitled folder appears.

Note

Closed folders are marked with a + in the box to the left of the folder icon. Open folders have a - in the box.

4	Click the title of the new folder, pause briefly, and then click the title again.

5	Type a name for the folder.


To insert new commands in the Command Center

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center.

2	Click in the Insertion Pointer column [image] next to the command where you want to insert the new commands.

If the commands are to be inserted into a folder , make sure the folder is open.

Note

Closed folders are marked with a + in the box to the left of the folder icon. Open folders have a - in the box.

3	Click OK.

4	Make the additional changes to the image.

5	On the Edit menu, click Command Center.

6	Click Edit. The Command Center shows the inserted commands.

7	If necessary, click in the Insertion Pointer column [image] next to its previous position in the Command Center.

8	Click OK.


To add comments to the Command Center

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center.

2	Click the folder or branch in the Command Center to which you want to add a comment.

3	Pause briefly, and then click the folder or branch again, this time on the Info [image] column. A text box appears.

4	Type a comment in the box.

5	Press Enter. An Info icon [image] appears in the Info column for the folder or branch.

Note

Comments can be seen by resting the mouse pointer on a folder or branch for a moment. Comments appear only when ToolTips are enabled using the Toolbar command on the View menu.


To edit the properties of a command in the Command Center

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center.

2	Double-click the command in the Command Center to which you want to edit the properties. The Properties dialog box appears.

Note

The Properties dialog box will vary, depending on the type of command selected. Click ? at the top of a dialog box, and then click the item you want information about. You can also click the item with the right mouse button, and then click the What's This? button.

3	Make the changes you want to the properties in the dialog box.

4	Click OK.


To commit the changes to a PPF/PP5 file

Note

The Commit option is available only for image files in the PP5/PPF format.

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center.

2	Click the Option tab.

3	Select the command up to which you want to commit the changes to the image.

4	Choose Commit.


To step through the commands in the Command Center

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center.

2	Click the Step tab.

3	Click in the Insertion Pointer column [image] column for any commands or folders which you want to deselect for stepping through the image. A red dot appears in the column for deselected commands.

4	Choose Step or Step Folder. The Command Center dialog box closes, the image is returned to its base state, and the Step window appears.

5	In the Step window, choose the button for the type of command stepping you want to do.

Build Image

Animate

Step

Step Folder

Stop

The image is stepped according to the button you chose.

6	If necessary, click Step or Step Folder repeatedly while observing the effect on the image.

7	Repeat this procedure as needed to identify the step or steps in which you have an interest.


To use Command Center stop points

1	On the Edit menu, click Command Center.

2	Click the Stop Pts. tab.

3	In the Type list, select the type of stop point to be used.

4	If you choose Stop On Command Type or Stop on Command Type and Area, in the Command list, select the type of command on which to stop.

or

If you choose Stop on Area or Stop on Command Type and Area, click the Stop Points button [image] and drag a rectangle on the image to define the location of the area on which you want to stop. Drawing the rectangle automatically fills the adjacent boxes with values indicating the locations of the sides of the rectangle referenced in pixels to the upper left corner of the image.

5	Click Add.

6	Click the Step tab.

7	Click Play. Picture Publisher stops on the area or the command you selected.


Why should I use the Command Center?

Often the changes that you make to an image are tentative. You may make several changes today, save the image, and then change your mind tomorrow as to one of the many changes you made. If you have saved the image file as PPF format and included the Command Center when you saved the file, you can return to previous work and make changes to it.

Note

You can make changes in other file formats, such as JPG, BMP, GIF, or TIF, and edit the Command Center, but editing is limited to those commands made during the current session. Once you close the file and save it in a file format other than PPF, the Command Center information is lost.

The Command Center allows you to exercise considerable control over the command information in your image file. You can revisit the changes you made previously, determine the exact commands that were used to make a change to the image, and edit those commands.


Organizing the Command Center

Editing the Command Center

The benefits of saving a file in the PPF format


Organizing the Command Center

When you need to edit the changes that have been made to an image, you first must isolate and identify the command or commands that were used originally to make those changes. Regardless of the working style of the person who made the changes, organized or free-form, you can locate commands of interest.

The Organized User

If the work style of the person who makes changes to the image is very organized, the Command Center can be used as the work is done to make the image file "maintainable". As changes are made to the image, commands that are used to perform a specific task are grouped. Each group is labeled so that it can be located without having to isolate commands individually.

Let's say, for example, that you want to change the eye color of a cat in an image and then crop the image to keep only the head, you would organize your actions to record what you are doing. You begin those changes by opening the Command Center, creating a new folder, labeling it Shift Hue Eyes. Then you make sure the folder is open (a - appears in the box to the left of the folder icon), click OK to close the Command Center dialog box, and then perform the steps required to change the cat's eye color. When you have completed those steps, you choose Command Center Edit again and click the Shift Hue Eyes folder to close it. You then create a new folder, label it Crop to Head, close the Command Center dialog box, and then perform the steps required to crop the image. If you need to edit the Command Center later, your task is simplified because the steps required to search for a command of interest are greatly reduced.

The Free-form User

If the work style of the person who made the changes is more free-form, meaning that edits were not tracked and organized as the changes were made, your search for a specific command or set of commands is more complicated. Several tools in the Command Center, however, will help you organize the Command Center. You can use these tools to isolate a command or a set of commands of interest. You can step through the commands one at a time and observe the effect on the image or you can run the commands in an animated fashion and observe the general area in the Command Center in which the command is located.

For commands that are difficult to locate, you can use the Stop Points tool to define an area on the image that was affected by the command of interest. When you run the Command Center, it stops when a command makes a change to the defined area. The image is regenerated up to that point so you can preview the changes. You can define the area by dragging a rectangle on the image or you can specify the position of the four corners of the rectangle. You specify the position in pixels relative to the upper left corner of the image.

You can also use the Stop Points tool to stop when a selected command type is executed. You can use this feature alone or in combination with the Area Stop feature. Using the combination feature lets you locate a particular type of command that affected the area on the image.


Why should I use the Command Center?

Editing the Command Center

The benefits of saving a file in the PPF format


Editing the Command Center

When you have located the command or commands of interest, you can edit the Command Center. You can rearrange commands by dragging them to different positions, delete unwanted commands, enable or disable commands, change the properties of commands, insert new commands, organize commands in folders, nest folders of commands in other folders, and create branches to alternative commands or folders of commands. You can load a macro containing a predefined set of commands. You can also select a set of commands and save them as a macro for future use.

Committing your Changes

When you have reached a point where you are satisfied with some of the changes made to your image, you can commit the changes up to that point. You simply select the last command to be committed, and then choose the Commit button. The selected commands are removed from the Command Center. The commitment is made from the first command in the Command Center up to the command you select. If you want to commit all the commands in the Command Center, select the last command. Committing saves the selected commands to the base file and then regenerates the base file.

You should consider carefully whether you want to commit commands in the Command Center. Committing commands is not reversible.

Note

The Commit button is available only for images saved in the PPF/PP5 format.

About Versioning

Picture Publisher lets you keep track of the work done on an image based on the date the work was done, the user who did the work, or both. When you are tracking commands by date, a new folder titled with the current date is created each time you open the image. This happens only if the date has changed. Likewise, when you are tracking commands by the user who made the changes, a new folder titled with the User's name is created each time the user changes.


Why should I use the Command Center?

Organizing the Command Center

The benefits of saving a file in the PPF format


Why Do I Need CMS?

You have several pieces of sophisticated equipment that let you work with your images. As the Picture Publisher documentation explains, these devices use different color models for defining, selecting, and changing colors. These color models are:

RGB (red, green, and blue)

CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black)

YCC (Photo CD)

CMS makes sure that you get consistently accurate color throughout the process, regardless of the devices you use--from scanning an image or using a photo CD, to viewing the image on a monitor, to printing the image.

CMS takes these different views of an image into account and automatically translates them within your PC. For example, CMS converts the image from your scanner's color space to your monitor's RGB color space.

The software that CMS uses to do this is called a Precision Transform (PT). The Picture Publisher software comes with the most widely used Precision Transforms built in. If you need additional PTs, you can purchase them from Kodak. Contact your Kodak Service Representative for details, or call 1-800-75COLOR.

The main benefit of using CMS comes from being able to get accurate, repeatable color from your system. This means that the image you get on your screen, printer, or other output device has the colors you expected, based on the image you started with and the creative manipulations you performed.

To do this, you have to set up Picture Publisher and each of the imaging devices in your system to use CMS. You also tell CMS what devices it has to work with. Then you calibrate your equipment. Just as you get better performance when your car is tuned up, you'll get better images when your image processing equipment is calibrated.

When you open a file, you tell Picture Publisher to open it using CMS. You select the source and destination for your image, and CMS applies the color profiles for those devices, so that the image you get on your printer looks as much as possible like the image you saw on your monitor.


The idea behind color management

Your roadmap to CMS

Where do Precision Transforms come from?

What is color?

Additive color model?

Subtractive color model?


The Idea Behind Color Management

Each type of device uses its own metaphor to read, display, and interpret color. This metaphor is called the device's "color space." For example, Photo CD devices store color in the YCC color space, and computer monitors display color in the RGB color space. It's as if they were all speaking different languages.

CMS automatically transforms the data from each device so it is accurate and understandable to the next. For example, suppose your scanner could speak only Norwegian, your monitor only English, and your printer only Japanese. None of these devices can communicate accurately with one another because they speak different languages. They need an interpreter. The interpreter translates or "transforms" the Norwegian scanner information so the English monitor can accurately display the same colors that were scanned. When it is time to print, the interpreter transforms the information into Japanese so the color is accurate on the printer.

The "interpreter" in a color management system is called the Color Processor (in this case, Kodak Precision Color Management System). When the scanner reads an image into its scanner color space, CMS automatically converts the image into any other device's color space, as needed.


Why do I need CMS?

Your roadmap to CMS

Common problems


How Color Management Works

The aim of color management is to preserve true color information by making up for the differences in the way devices process color. Each device has a Precision Transform (PT) that you can select. CMS uses these PTs to translate the color image from one color space to another.

For example, when you scan an image under CMS, the scanner's PT translates the RGB image from the scanner through CMS to the monitor (or other destination that you specify). CMS also takes into account and compensates for the particular characteristics of your scanner, using information it has stored in its database. The scanner is the "source" device in this case.


How CMS translates between scanner and monitor

How CMS translates between monitor and printer

Where do Precision Transforms come from?

Why do I need CMS?

The idea behind color management

Your roadmap to CMS

Common problems


How CMS Translates between Scanner and Monitor

CMS translates the scanned image into one the monitor can understand by processing the image through the monitor's PT. The monitor is the "destination" device.

When you print the image, the monitor becomes the "source." CMS processes the image from the monitor's PT, then translates that image through the printer's PT to create the printed image on the destination device. The printer's PT translates the image into a form the printer can use.


How color management works

How CMS translates between monitor and printer

Where do Precision Transforms come from?


How CMS Translates between Monitor and Printer

The monitor uses an RGB color model, and the printer uses a CMYK model (or some other RGB model). CMS uses the Precision Transforms (PTs) to translate from the monitor's color space to the printer's color space.

This difference between the color spaces is the reason why people are sometimes surprised by the results. Here are some examples from Picture Publisher users. Bear with us; this can seem a bit complicated, but it does make sense if you follow it through.

Suppose you opened an image directly from a Photo CD into the printer's SWOP CMYK color space. Then you saved the image as a CMYK TIFF file. Later, you reopened it using the SWOP CMYK profile for the source and setting the destination to SWOP CMYK, too.

The reopened image looks identical to the saved image on the RGB monitor. The image has been converted to SWOP CMYK, and the monitor simulates the appearance of the output device. Picture Publisher went through a CMYK-to-RGB conversion to display the image on the monitor. You're seeing what the printer "sees."

Now suppose you opened a Photo CD image directly into the SWOP CMYK color space and saved it as CMYK TIFF. If you reopened it with the source set to SWOP and the destination to monitor RGB, the result is a washed-out looking image.

Here's why: The color range (or "gamut") of the printer is smaller than that of an RGB monitor. It's as if the printer had a smaller "box of crayons" than the monitor does. So, when your image is converted into the SWOP CMYK color space, CMS has to do some color mapping to move into a smaller, totally printable gamut. As a result, you lose some color information. The translation from RGB to CMYK depends very much on the kinds of devices involved, since each CMYK device has a different (and smaller gamut) from your RGB monitor.

Now if you take this image and convert it to RGB for display, what you're seeing is the same image drawn with the smaller box of crayons (that is, you've lost some of the richness of shading). It's the difference between the printable gamut of a printer and a monitor. That's why it looks "washed-out" on the screen.


How color management works

How CMS translates between scanner and monitor

Where do Precision Transforms come from?

Additive color model?

Subtractive color model?


Where Do Precision Transforms Come From?

Kodak scientists used highly sensitive and specialized equipment to measure the characteristics of several examples of each specific device to determine the intrinsic properties of the device. From these measurements they developed software called a Device Color Profile (DCP) for each make and model that they measured. The Device Color Profile contains information about the specific device, a brief description of what's in the DCP itself, installation information, and a set of Precision Transforms (PTs)for the device with a short description of what they do.

You can see for yourself what's in a Precision Transform by clicking the Info button on any screen in which it appears or by using the Windows Notepad to open any of the .DCP files containing the PTs.


How color management works

How CMS translates between scanner and monitor


Your Roadmap to CMS

Roadmaps show you how to get where you want to go, and this one is no exception. We've tried to give you enough detail to get you started and show the steps you'll need to go through. For some of these topics, though, you'll need the detail that you'll find in this online help file.

Load the software

You can install Kodak's CMS software through the ABC Graphics Suite installer. Choose the Custom setup option and from the Select Components dialog box, highlight Picture Publisher and click Details. Choose Color Management System and click Continue. Follow the instructions on screen for the remainder of the installation.

Start Picture Publisher

Double-click the Picture Publisher icon. You'll see the Picture Publisher main window.

Telling Picture Publisher to use CMS

On the Tools menu, click Options. Click the General tab. Click the Use Color Management check box to select it. Then click Save.

Setting up Picture Publisher to use CMS

Use the Setup options on Picture Publisher's File menu to set up your monitor, scanner, and printer to use CMS. At the same time, you're telling CMS the characteristics of the devices you're using. CMS uses this information to translate images between these devices.

Calibrating your equipment

Calibration means setting a device to match a known standard, and it's essential to producing consistent color results. You can use Picture Publisher's built-in calibration tools, the device manufacturer's recommendations, or special external tools.


To tell Picture Publisher to use CMS

To set up your monitor to use CMS

To open a Photo CD file using CMS

To set up your ink jet printer to use CMS

To set up your scanner to use CMS

To scan an image using CMS

To set up your Imagesetter to use CMS

To calibrate your printer

To calibrate your monitor

To calibrate your scanner


Basic questions about your system

Background information

Explaining "source" and "destination"

Telling Picture Publisher to use CMS

Setting up your monitor to use CMS

Opening a Photo CD file using CMS

Setting up your ink jet printer to use CMS

Setting up your scanner to use CMS

Setting up your Imagesetter to use CMS

Calibrating your setup

Common problems


Basic Questions About Your System

In the next part of the setup process, you tell CMS what kind of equipment you're using. Print this help topic by clicking the Print button on the toolbar and fill in the sheet, so you'll have all the information in one place when you need it.

What equipment are you using?

List the devices that you'll be using to capture, manipulate, display, and print images using Picture Publisher with CMS.

Scanner

Manufacturer: _____________________________________

Model Name: ______________________________________

Model Number: ____________________________________

TWAIN? ______Yes  _______No (or Don't know)

Monitor

Manufacturer: _____________________________________

Model Name: ______________________________________

Model Number: ____________________________________

Printer

Manufacturer: _____________________________________

Model Name: ______________________________________

Model Number: ____________________________________

Photo CD

Manufacturer: _____________________________________

Model Name: ______________________________________

Model Number: ____________________________________

Other Devices (for example, Imagesetter)

Device Type: _______________________________________

Manufacturer: ______________________________________

Model Name: ______________________________________

Model Number: ____________________________________

Note

As you might expect, CMS doesn't try to anticipate every specific device that anyone might have in an imaging system. The Kodak Precision CMS Device Color Profiles list the specific devices that the basic CMS supports. In general, these profiles cover the most popular devices in use when the software was released. If you have a different device, you can purchase additional Device Color Profiles directly from Kodak. Call 1-800-75COLOR to receive the latest list of available Device Color Profiles and their prices.

What software are you using?

Occasionally, conflicts may arise between Picture Publisher, running with CMS, and other applications that may be loaded on your system, even if they are not running at the same time. (For example, you may have applications that operate on the same data, but leave it in a state that another application can't recognize or use.)

To help diagnose any potential conflicts, please list the following information for future reference:

Microsoft Windows version: ___________________________

Micrografx Picture Publisher version: ___________________

Photoshop? _____ Yes  _____No  version: _____

PhotoStyler? _____ Yes  _____No  version: _____

Other graphics and page layout applications that will be loaded (but not necessarily running) while you're running CMS:

Quark? _____ Yes  _____No  version: _____

PageMaker? _____ Yes  _____No  version: _____

Others? _______________________________________________

_____________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________


Background Information

You already know that different people perceive colors differently, and that even the same person's perception can be thrown off by different lighting conditions. Add to this the fact that different devices interpret and define color differently and simply can't create the same range (or "gamut") of colors. The idea of color management, then, is to help you get accurate, predictable color by managing, compensating for, and controlling these differences. The Kodak Precision Color Management System (CMS) is a tool that you can use to manage these fundamental challenges while still keeping your customers and your sanity.

Here are the basic concepts. Notice the difference between calibration and characterization:

Setup: Telling Picture Publisher to use CMS and setting up the devices in your system to use CMS.

Calibration: Setting each device to a known, "standard" state. Even two new devices that come down the same production line one after the other can have small differences, and these differences are accentuated with time and use. Calibration accounts for these individual differences. When you use a calibrated device, you can accurately predict the results you'll get.

Characterization: Describing the relationship of the color characteristics of a calibrated device (its "color space") to a standard built into CMS. You do this by selecting in a list box a color profile that matches each device. The next section describes more about how characterization works in color management.

Use: Once you've set up, calibrated, and characterized your system, you can open, manipulate, and save the files using color management.


Explaining "Source" and "Destination"

People often get confused about the seemingly obvious concepts of what is the "source" of an image and what is its "destination," so let's clarify this up front.

In CMS terms, the "source" of an image is where the image currently is. The "destination" is where you want the image to go. For example, when you scan in an image, you want it to appear on you monitor. So the source is your scanner, and the destination is your monitor.

Likewise, when you open a Photo CD image, the source is the Photo CD, and the destination is the monitor.

Now, you manipulate the image on the screen, then print it. The source this time is the monitor (because that's where the image is), and the destination is the printer (that’s where you want it to go).

Suppose that you really like the printed image, and you decide to save the file as you printed it (that is, the file that CMS converted to the printer's CMYK color space) so that you can repeat that image later. You do a "Save As..." command, giving the file a unique name and saving it as a PPF file.

Now you decide to open that file again, maybe to print another proof. Because you saved the file that went to the printer, the source profile that you want CMS to use is the printer CMYK profile. That's the one that best describes the characteristics of the file, because that's the way you saved it. So you select the matching printer profile in the Source dialog box. The destination, in this case, is also a printer, because that's where you want the image to go. CMS doesn't have to apply additional transforms, because the information it needs is already stored in the file.

When you "Save" or "Save As..." a .PPF format file, Picture Publisher saves the precision transform along with the file, so the next time you open it you don't have to select "Source." Typically, you're saving the image in monitor RGB, but in the preceding example, you have converted to the CMYK (or printer) color space first.


Telling Picture Publisher to Use CMS

First, you activate CMS by telling Picture Publisher to use it. You'll find the following descriptions a lot more interesting if you follow along with them at your PC.


To tell Picture Publisher to use CMS


Your roadmap to CMS


To tell Picture Publisher to use CMS

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	Click the General tab.

3	Click Use Kodak CMS to select it.

4	Click Save.


Telling Picture Publisher to use CMS

Your roadmap to CMS


Setting Up Your Monitor to Use CMS

Since you need to see images on your screen, we'll set up the monitor for color management first. To begin, you tell CMS what kind of monitor you have.


Your roadmap to CMS


To set up your monitor to use CMS


To set up your monitor to use CMS

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Monitor.

2	Click the Monitor Profile tab.

3	Choose a monitor device from the Monitor Device list box that best matches your monitor. If you don't know which one to use, select Generic P22 1.8 Monitor.

Note

A generic monitor profile with a gamma of 1.8 gives the best color transformations. The gamma value indicates the degree of contrast (just like the contrast control on a TV set).

4	Click OK. The Setup Monitor dialog box closes, and your monitor is ready to display color-managed images.


Setting up your monitor to use CMS

Your roadmap to CMS


Opening a Photo CD File Using CMS

Now you need to set up the Photo CD for color management and select a Precision Transform to apply. With a Photo CD file, you can also see the effects of using color management before opening the file, as noted below. For this scenario, we're using a standard Kodak Photo CD, but you can use any one you want.


To open a Photo CD file using CMS


Your roadmap to CMS


To open a Photo CD file using CMS

1	On the File menu, choose Open. The ImageBrowser dialog box opens.

2	Choose the PCD file type.

3	Choose the file you want to open using color management.

4	Click Open. The Photo CD Open dialog box opens.

5	Click Use Color Management to select it, if necessary.

6	Click CMS. The Color Management Selection dialog box opens.

7	In the Source Profile box, select Photo CD as the file source.

8	In the Precision Transform box, select a precision transform that matches the type of your original on the Photo CD (for example, Universal Ektachrome).

9	In the Destination Profile box, select Default Monitor as the destination.

10	Click OK. The Color Management Selection dialog box closes.

11	Double-click the image in the preview area to select the entire image to open, or drag a rectangle around the part of the image you want to open. Press and hold the right mouse button to reposition the rectangle while you're drawing it.

12	Click Open. The file opens using color management, and you can see on the monitor the image you selected.

Now look at the color-managed image on your monitor. You can do any of the standard Picture Publisher manipulations on it, but for our purposes, we'll just accept the image as it appears and print it. If the colors seem a little off, continue to the calibration section to fine-tune your monitor and scanner.

Notes

The most accurate Photo CDs are those scanned with the proper film term. You can see this information in the center of the Photo CD Open dialog box.

For all E6-processed emulsions (like Ektachrome or Fujichrome) the images should be scanned using the Universal E6 film term. Its media type is 052/55 SPD 0000 #00. For the Universal K14 film term (Kodachrome), the media type is 116/22 SPD 0000 #0. For color negative films, the film term and media type vary, depending on the emulsion. The Photo CD provider should choose the one that matches the color negative emulsion.

Photo CD providers should scan all Universal E6 and K14 with no color corrections and without any modifications to the film term; that is, with "Lock Beam ON," sometimes referred to as "Scene Balance OFF."

Color negatives are best scanned with the proper film term for the media type and with "Lock Beam OFF" (or Scene Balance ON), and with no color corrections. This is the default mode of the photographic imaging workstation (PIW) that produces Photo CDs.


Opening a Photo CD file using CMS

Your roadmap to CMS


Setting Up Your Ink Jet Printer to Use CMS

You set up the printer to use color management and to tell CMS what kind of printer you have, then print an image. In this case, we'll print to an Epson Stylus four-color ink-jet printer, so we'll select an RGB profile. The Epson print driver sends RGB to the printer, and it will automatically do a final conversion to CMYK. If you're doing this on your own system, choose the profile that matches your own printer.


To set up your ink jet printer to use CMS


Your roadmap to CMS


To set up your ink jet printer to use CMS

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Printer. The Setup Printer dialog box opens.

2	Click Setup Print Style. The Setup Print Style dialog box opens.

This dialog box controls many aspects of printing, such as ink correction, halftone screens, dot gain, and trim marks. Picture Publisher comes with predefined print styles for most popular printers. You can alter and save a print style, or create a new one by saving the print style using a new name.

4	Click the Printer Profile tab.

5	In the Destination Device box, select a printer that matches your printer.

In this example, we're selecting the Epson Stylus Color printer as our destination. Notice the destination color space of your printer's profile; for example, the Epson Stylus has an RGB profile. To check the destination color model, click Info to see the output color space. This determines the "selected" printer type.

6	Click OK. The Printer Style Name dialog box opens.

7	Type a name for the Printer Style. Make sure the printer type matches your printer.

8	Click OK.

9	Click OK in the Setup Print dialog box to accept the values you've entered. You're now set up to print using color management.

Note

To print the image, on the File menu, click Print. Picture Publisher prints the image on your designated (ink jet) printer.


Setting up your ink jet printer to use CMS

Your roadmap to CMS


Setting Up Your Scanner to Use CMS

Before you scan the image, you must set up the scanner to use color management, and you tell CMS what kind of scanner you have.


To set up your scanner to use CMS

To scan an image using CMS


Your roadmap to CMS


To set up your scanner to use CMS

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Scanner. The Scanner dialog box opens.

2	Click Use Color Management to select it.

3	Click CMS. The Color Management Selection dialog box opens.

4	In the Source Profile box, select a scanner profile that best matches your scanner. If you don't know which one to use, select the Generic P22 1.0 gamma option.

5	In the Destination Profile box, select a monitor profile that best matches your monitor. If you don't know which one to use, select the Generic P22 1.8 monitor profile.

Note

In most cases, the destination of the scanned image is the monitor.

6	Click OK. The Color Management Selection dialog box closes.

7	Click OK. Your scanner is now ready to scan using color management.

Note

You can create your own custom input profiles by using the Kodak Precision Input Color Characterization software, available separately. For purchasing information, call 1-800-75COLOR.


To scan an image using CMS

Setting up your scanner to use CMS

Your roadmap to CMS


To scan an image using CMS

1	Place a test photograph on your scanner bed.

2	On the File menu, click TWAIN. The Acquire dialog box opens.

3	In the Scan Type box, select Color.

4	Click Scan. The image is scanned, and it appears on your monitor.

Note

Once you've scanned an image, you can manipulate it on the monitor, save it to a file, and print it. You can open a scanned file that you've stored and treat it like a scanned image.


To set up your scanner to use CMS

Setting up your scanner to use CMS

Your roadmap to CMS


Setting Up Your Imagesetter to Use CMS

You set up the printer to use color management and to tell CMS what kind of printer you have, then print an image. In this case, we're going to print to an Imagesetter, which is a four-color CMYK device. We need to use the Kodak SWOP CMYK profile. The procedure is the same as before, but the selections you make are different.


To set up your Imagesetter to use CMS


Your roadmap to CMS


To set up your Imagesetter to use CMS

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Printer. The Setup Printer dialog box opens.

2	Click Setup Print Style. The Setup Print Style dialog box opens.

This dialog box controls many aspects of printing, such as ink correction, halftone screens, dot gain, and trim marks. Picture Publisher comes with predefined print styles for most popular printers. You can alter and save a print style, or create a new one by saving the print style using a new name.

3	Click the Printer Profile tab.

4	In the Destination Device box, select a printer that matches your printer.

In this example, we're selecting the Kodak SWOP CMYK printer as our destination. Notice the destination color space of your printer's profile; for example, the Imagesetter has a SWOP CMYK profile. To check the destination color model, click Info to see the output color space. This determines the "selected" printer type.

5	Click OK. The Printer Style Name dialog box opens.

6	Type a name for the Printer Style. Make sure the printer type matches your printer.

7	Click OK.

8	Click OK in the Setup Print dialog box to accept the values you've entered. You're now set up to print using color management.

Note

To print the image, on the File menu, click Print. Picture Publisher prints the image on your designated (Imagesetter) printer.


Setting up your Imagesetter to use CMS

Your roadmap to CMS


Calibrating Your Setup

To get the best color reproduction, you must calibrate your equipment and use it in a predictable environment. How do you know when your equipment needs to be calibrated? Your well-trained eyeball is a good guide.

Your eye can see more colors than even the finest, most expensive equipment can reproduce. So any electronically or mechanically reproduced image necessarily will not have the full range of colors that you would perceive if you were looking at the real object.

The range of colors that people can see is called the visible color gamut, and the same term, "gamut" applies to the range of colors that a device can reproduce.

Your eye can tell you whether an image is too light or dark, too contrasty, or tinted toward one color or another. But your eye can also be fooled by conditions that have nothing to do with the image or the equipment. That's why the first step is to check out the environment in which you're working.


Calibrating your viewing environment

Your roadmap to CMS

Common problems


Calibrating Your Viewing Environment

You know how the same color looks different when viewed in different light conditions. For example, two socks that seem to be identical under incandescent light can appear to be quite different when you view them in daylight or under fluorescent light. The same applies to the environment in which you view your images. Since you calibrate your equipment by comparing images, you'll get the best (and easiest) results if you view the original (source) image and the result (destination) image under the same light conditions.

For best results, you need a controlled, consistent, neutral, and subdued environment. This lets you focus on the image itself, not on the background or fluctuations in lighting, for example.

The printing industry has adopted a standard color temperature of light for viewing both transparencies and reflective images. This standard approximates the color distribution of natural daylight and ensures consistent viewing results by minimizing or eliminating external sources of reflected light. The standard is called D5000: D for Daylight and 5000 for the color temperature of the light in degrees Kelvin.


Guidelines for your viewing environment

Calibrating your setup

Your roadmap to CMS


Guidelines for Your Viewing Environment

Here are some tips for setting up an ideal viewing environment:

Use a controlled and consistent light source. The room lighting should be indirect incandescent lighting, such as track lighting or a wall wash. Use white light. If you use a dimmer switch with this light, mark the desired setting.

Use a room with no windows to let in external light. Or cover existing windows with curtains while you're working.

Use a room with neutral walls or flooring. This is because all surfaces in the room reflect light. If surfaces in the room are not neutral colors, their color reflects onto the image and affects your perception.

Try to make sure that nothing, such as your clothing or glasses, is reflecting light or color onto the monitor. This can change your perception of the image. Of all the devices in your system, your monitor is the most sensitive to changes in conditions.

At minimum, you should have a D5000 viewing booth. Some models are portable, like the one in this picture, and fit on a table top.

Tip

Here's a quick test to see how environment affects your perception of the colors on your monitor. In normal room light, sit in front of the monitor with an image displayed on the screen. Now have someone flip off the room lights. Notice the difference in the colors you see on the screen.


Calibrating your equipment

Calibrating your viewing environment

Your roadmap to CMS


Calibrating Your Equipment

Most designers rely on the image they see on the monitor in judging how they want the image to appear on the final printed page. But though the information stored in a digital image file remains constant, the way the monitor displays this information can be very different from what the printed image looks like. And the same image, displayed on different monitors, can also look different.

To get consistent color from your input devices to your monitor to your printer or Imagesetter, you have to calibrate (that is, standardize) each piece of equipment. It's like finding where you are on a roadmap. Once you know where you are, you can figure out how to get to where you want to be. Likewise, calibration puts a device into a known state. Once it's in that state, CMS can give you consistent-quality images. By removing the guesswork, you can be both more creative and more productive.


Calibration checklist

Guidelines for your viewing environment

Calibrating your viewing environment

Your roadmap to CMS


Calibration Checklist

If you already have experience in calibrating equipment, you can use this checklist to make sure you have covered all the necessary elements. If you are new to calibration, this checklist will serve as an overview of the more detailed explanations later in this help file. Remember, room conditions can affect the way you see the colors in your prints.

Check the Device Setup in Picture Publisher

Does each device have Use Color Management turned on?

Is the right profile (PT) specified for each device?

Check the Viewing Environment

Are you viewing the original and printed images using a standard D5000 light source?

Are the walls and ceiling of the viewing area white or neutral-colored?

Is your clothing black or neutral-colored, so it won't reflect its color onto the monitor screen?

Is the ambient light in the room controlled and consistent (preferably indirect, incandescent, white light, not on a dimmer switch), and is any external light blocked out?

Check the Equipment Environment

The physical positioning of a device and any internal changes to it can affect the way it "sees" an image. A "yes" to any of these questions may mean you should recalibrate.

Has the scanner or monitor been moved since its last calibration?

Has any component (like a scanner lamp) been replaced since the last calibration?

Was the last calibration over a month ago?


Walking through the calibration process

Calibrating your equipment

Guidelines for your viewing environment

Calibrating your viewing environment

Your roadmap to CMS


Walking through the Calibration Process

Calibrating equipment can take a bit of time, so set aside about an hour when you can work with few interruptions. Before you begin, make sure that you let the monitor, scanner, and printer warm up for the interval recommended by their manufacturers, usually about an hour.

In the steps that follow, we'll show you how to visually calibrate your system, one device at a time, so what you scan, view, and print look similar. We'll start by calibrating the printer, then the monitor, then the scanner.

It's a good idea to use four or five different types of images (for example, high-key, low-key, brilliant color, grayscale, and flesh tones) to calibrate each device, just to make sure that you get a good balance among them.

Once you've finished calibrating your system, you're ready to use it. Be sure to open the image using color management.

Remember that you should recalibrate at least once a month and whenever you change the position or components of your printer, scanner, or monitor. Properly calibrating your equipment takes time, but you'll more than make up for it in productivity.


Calibrating your printer

Calibrating your monitor

Calibrating your scanner

Calibration checklist

Your roadmap to CMS


Calibrating Your Printer

Printers are generally fairly stable devices, less subject to variation than monitors and scanners (because they don't rely on light sources or phosphors). But because they're mechanical devices, printers do need calibration from time to time. Use the Windows Control Panel to make sure that your printer is properly set up. Check that you're using the kind of paper that you specified in the Windows printer setup dialog box.

You can check whether your printer needs calibrating by running this simple test:

Scan an image and ignore what shows up on the monitor. Then print the image without doing any correction or manipulation or applying any transforms.

Compare the print and the original in a light booth. You may want to make proof prints of four or five different images--low key, high-key, vivid color, flesh tones, and grayscale. Remember that you're trying to achieve the best overall color in these images, rather than bringing one to perfection at the expense of the others.

If the images match, then your printer's calibration is acceptable. If not, refer to the manufacturer's documentation that came with your printer and make sure that the settings, ink, and paper are correct, the ink or toner reservoirs are full,and so forth. Make any necessary adjustments and try the test again.


To calibrate your printer


Walking through the calibration process

Calibration checklist

Calibrating your equipment

Your roadmap to CMS


To calibrate your printer

Notes

Before you calibrate your printer, turn off any self-correction that the printer may have.

Since you're going to be recalibrating the printer, you need to get rid of the old calibration data by disabling the printer calibration map. To do this, on the File menu, click Setup, move the mouse pointer to the right and click Printer. Click Setup Print Style. In the Setup Printer dialog box, click the Calibration tab. Select None in the Printer Calibration Map list box, and then click OK. The Printer Style Name dialog box opens. Type a name in the Enter New Name field and click OK. Then click OK.

1	Open an image that you want to print. It can be a stored file, a Photo CD image, or one you've scanned.

2	On the File menu, click Print. The Print dialog box opens.

3	Click Print. The image prints to your printer.

4	On the File menu, point to Setup, point to Calibration, and click For Printing. The Calibrate Printer dialog box opens. Move the dialog box so you can see both it and the image on your monitor.

5	In the Calibration Method box, select Visual.

6	Place the mouse pointer on one of the little boxes along the diagonal line, then press and hold the left mouse button as you drag the box to change the curve. You can change the contrast by moving the box at the lower left end of the line along the "OUT" and "IN" directions. You can change the overall color cast by moving the body of the line into a curve. As you do so, notice that the "Gamma Adjust" value at the bottom of the window changes, as does the position of the slider below it.

7	Move the points until the image on screen matches the printed image. Feel free to experiment with different settings. You can always return to the original settings by clicking Reset.

8	Click Save when the image matches the printed image. The Printer Calibration Name dialog box opens.

9	Type Visual Printer in the Enter New Name field.

10	Click OK.

11	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Printer. The Setup Printer dialog box opens.

12	Click Setup Print Style. The Setup Print Style dialog box opens.

13	Click the Calibration tab.

14	In the Printer Calibration Map box, select Visual Printer.

15	Click OK. The Printer Style Name dialog box opens.

16	Type Calibrated Printer in the Enter New Name field.

17	Click OK.

18	Click OK.

19	Now print a test image and compare it with the original image. They should be very similar. You may notice that some colors may not be as rich and pure as in the original. This can happen because the printer's color range (its "gamut") may be limited, so it isn't capable of accurately printing those colors.

Note

If the image you printed using the calibrated printer isn't what you expected, it may be because the monitor that you used to adjust the image also needs calibration. From the new printed image, however, you should be able to tell what kinds of adjustments you still have to make. Go back into the visual calibration steps above and adjust the image according to what you feel the print needs. Save as before and print a new image to verify the results.


Calibrating your printer

Calibration checklist

Your roadmap to CMS


Calibrating Your Monitor

Monitors are the most variable of the imaging system components and the most affected by environmental factors. Your perception of the monitor image is affected by such factors as ambient light and reflection. The image on screen itself can be affected by the age and type of the phosphor that coats the screen, the presence of other devices that may create radio-frequency interference, temperature, humidity, and even the Earth's magnetic field.

The larger your monitor, the more susceptible it is to variations in the environment. All monitors automatically clear themselves of any stray magnetic fields when you turn them on, but as you use them, they tend to develop a relationship with other strong magnetic fields in their environment. For the best viewing, make sure your monitor is away from devices such as unshielded electric motors, cellular phones, and radios which generate magnetic fields.

To decide whether your monitor needs calibrating, open a Photo CD image and look at it on the monitor. Is the color true? Are the contrast and brightness satisfactory? If not, it's time to calibrate the monitor.

Note

Before you calibrate your monitor, you need to establish a normal, or constant working environment using the guidelines in the checklist. Make sure the monitor's color, contrast, and brightness controls are set according to the manufacturer's directions.


To calibrate your monitor

To fine-tune your monitor with CMS


Walking through the calibration process

Calibration checklist

Calibrating your equipment

Your roadmap to CMS


To calibrate your monitor

Notes

To stabilize the monitor, turn it on for at least one hour before you start calibrating it.

If you haven't already done so, open an image from a Photo CD so you can see the results of the adjustments you make.

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Monitor. The Setup Monitor dialog box opens. Move the dialog box so that you can see both it and the image on your monitor.

2	Click the Monitor Gamma tab. The Monitor Gamma tab has three "channels" that let you adjust the red, green, and blue components of the image on screen. Each channel has its own slider you can adjust, as well as a box that lets you enter a number to adjust the color that the channel represents.

3	Adjust the sliders and notice what happens to the image on the screen. At the same time, you'll see that the color patches on the Monitor Gamma tab are also changing. The fourth color patch, which shows shades of gray, is the result of all the other adjustments.

Notes

Adjusting your monitor's gamma controls is like adjusting the tint on a color TV screen--and just as with a TV, you can give people in your picture green hair and purple skin by experimenting with these adjustments. Normally, however, you want to have natural skin tones, good contrast, and just the right brightness. You can get these by setting the red, green, and blue adjustments on the Monitor Gamma tab.

You can adjust each of the channels individually, or all of them simultaneously. To adjust all of them at once, click the Lock button below the sliders. To go back to individual adjustments, click the Unlock button.

Feel free to experiment with different settings. You may find that you get the best results when the number in the box is 1.8, but try different settings or adjustments to see what works best for you. By experimenting with outrageous changes, you'll see the range of possibilities your monitor can handle. For serious work, though, you'll want to set the monitor's gamma to give more normal results.

4	Click OK when the image on screen is the way you want it.


To fine-tune your monitor with CMS

Calibrating your monitor

Calibration checklist

Your roadmap to CMS


To fine-tune your monitor with CMS

Note

If you want to adjust what you see on the monitor, you can apply a different device profile using CMS. For example, you might have originally set the monitor up to use a source profile of "Generic P22 Gamma 1.8." You could change the profile to "None" and apply it to see how that affects the results. Or you could select "Generic EBU 1.8 Gamma Monitor."

1	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Monitor. The Setup Monitor dialog box opens.

2	In the Monitor Device box, select the device you want.

3	In the Monitor Profile box, select a profile to apply to that device. To see the details about the profile you've selected, click Info.

4	Repeat these steps until you are satisfied with the overall appearance of your test images. When you achieve the result you want, save the device profile for future use.


To calibrate your monitor

Calibrating your monitor

Calibration checklist

Your roadmap to CMS


Calibrating Your Scanner

To decide whether your scanner needs calibrating, select a good image and scan it. Then hold the original next to your calibrated monitor and compare the two images. Is the color true? Are the contrast and brightness satisfactory? If not, it's time to calibrate the scanner.


To calibrate your scanner

To fine-tune your scanner input with CMS


Walking through the calibration process

Calibration checklist

Calibrating your equipment

Your roadmap to CMS


To calibrate your scanner

Notes

To stabilize the scanner, turn it on for at least one hour before you start calibrating it. One of the most common causes of poor images is not letting the scanner warm up sufficiently. An aging lamp can also cause poor scans.

Consult the manual that came with your scanner and make sure all the scanner controls are set to what the manufacturer recommends. Turn off any scanner-controlled color-correction features.

You have to turn off CMS for your scanner before doing this type of calibration, then turn CMS back on when you've finished calibrating. Otherwise, you can't do the Visual Calibrate Scanner procedures. To do this, on the File menu, click Setup, move the mouse pointer to the right and click Scanner. Click the Use Color Management check box to deselect it, and then click OK.

1	Place a test photograph on your scanner bed.

2	On the File menu, click Acquire. The Acquire dialog box opens.

3	In the Scan Type list box, select Color.

4	Click Scan. The image is scanned, and the scanned image is displayed on your monitor.

5	On the File menu, point to Setup, point to Calibration, and click For Scanning. The Calibrate Scanner dialog box opens. Move the dialog box so you can see both it and the image on your monitor.

6	In the Calibration Method box, select Visual.

7	Click All Channels the Same to select it.

8	Click Use for Grayscale Scans to deselect it.

9	Place the mouse pointer on one of the little boxes along the diagonal line, then press and hold the left mouse button as you drag the box to alter the curve. You can change the contrast by moving the box at the lower left end of the line along the "OUT" and "IN" directions. You can change the overall color cast by moving the body of the line into a curve. As you do so, notice that the "Gamma Adjust" value at the bottom of the window changes, as does the position of the slider below it.

10	Move the points until the image on screen matches the original photo. Feel free to experiment with different settings. You can always return to the original settings by clicking Reset.

11	Click Save when the image matches the original photo. The Scanner Calibration Name dialog box opens.

12	Type Visual Color Scanner in the Enter New Name field.

13	Click OK.

14	On the File menu, point to Setup, and click Scanner. The Setup Scanner dialog box opens.

15	In the Scanner Calibration Map box, select Visual Color Scanner.

18	Click OK. The scanner is calibrated for color scanning.

Notes

If you can't adjust the colors correctly, deselect the All Channels The Same option (step 8), then adjust the Red, Green, and Blue channels separately.

Now try scanning an image. Compare the original with what you got on your monitor. Without making changes to the displayed image, print it and compare the print with the original and the monitor image. All three should be quite similar, again taking into account the differences in gamut among the devices. Repeat with different images to test the overall image quality.


To fine-tune your scanner input with CMS

Calibrating your scanner

Calibration checklist

Your roadmap to CMS


To fine-tune your scanner input with CMS

Note

Use CMS to select the device profile (Precision Transform) that matches your scanner. If you don't have a device profile for your specific scanner, use "Generic RGB Gamma 1.0" or "None." Remember, the idea is to achieve a balance among the different types of images you scan.

1	To get a baseline, scan four or five different images (high-key, low-key, vivid color, flesh-tones and grayscale; include pictures of people, clothing, and landscapes) and save each in a PPF file.

2	Print the images, then compare the originals with the prints in a standard D5000 viewing station. Analyze the results. If you are happy with the quality, you don't need to calibrate any further.

3	If you used "None" as the Source Profile, and if you aren't happy with the results, try using the profile "Generic RGB Gamma 1.0" to achieve a different, possibly better result.

Note

"Better" is a relative term. In this context, it generally means an image that has a little more contrast and brighter and cleaner colors. The decision of what constitutes "better" for your purposes depends on your own artistic judgment.

4	Once you have a scanner device profile that satisfies you, save it for future use.


To calibrate your scanner

Calibrating your scanner

Calibration checklist

Your roadmap to CMS


To open a file using CMS

1	On the File menu, click Open. The ImageBrowser dialog box opens.

2	Choose the file type you want to open.

3	Choose the specific file you want to open.

4	Click CMS. The Color Management Selection dialog box opens.

5	In the Source Profile box, select the input device. If you don't know what the source of the image was, choose the generic P22 1.0 gamma profile to start with. You can change this later, if you want.

6	In the Destination Profile box, select the profile that matches your monitor. If you don't find a match, select the generic P22 1.8 monitor profile.

7	Click OK.

8	Click Open. The file you selected opens, and the source and destination are set.

Note

Remember, when you open a scanned image, the source is the scanner, and the destination is the monitor. When you save that image, the monitor file becomes the source when you use that file in the future.


To open a Photo CD file using CMS


Saving a Color-Managed File

Whenever you translate between devices, some of the color information from the original can be lost because of the differences in the color range of the devices (not because of poor translation). So you want to make the fewest possible translations.

You can choose to save the precision transforms along with the file by saving the file in the PPF format. Generally, you should save the file as PPF unless you have a particular reason for doing otherwise, since this format requires the fewest conversions and therefore preserves the most color information.

For placement in page layout applications, convert the image to the final color space and save it in the page layout program's recommended file format, usually TIFF or EPSF. Use Image Convert to Color Managed to save the image into the output device color space. If the precision transform isn't saved with the image, you may get a message several times during printing asking you for the monitor PT. If this happens, just acknowledge the message and continue.

When you save a color-managed file, an options dialog box opens. Click the Save Precision Transforms (CMS) checkbox to turn it on. This saves the transforms along with the file. Then, when you reopen that file using color management, its source profile will be exactly what you saved. You don't need to reset the source profile. It's faster, and it preserves the best color, because you don't have to apply additional transforms to it.


Common Problems and What to Do About Them

This lists some common questions and scenarios of using CMS. The answers are practical, and though they may get fairly technical at times, they're mainly expansions of ideas and techniques you've already worked with. They'll give you an idea of some real-world usage.

How do I open an image from an unknown source?

If you don't know the source of your image, use the generic RGB 1.0 monitor or printer transform to open the image.

Does the source equal the destination once a file has been opened?

Yes. Once you've applied color management, your files automatically have a known source. Remember, "source" means where you are; "destination" means where you're going.

Do I have to indicate source and destination each time I open a file?

Yes, unless you saved a color-managed file as .PPF. Otherwise, Picture Publisher does not automatically select the appropriate source and destination when you open a file. When you click CMS during an open, it has the source set to whatever you used last, rather than taking the source from the image. To be safe, click Info for your image and check what Precision Transform it was saved with.

Why does the print I get from my color ink jet printer look so much darker than what's on my monitor?

Details of the problem: Although the image on my monitor looks great, I find that it prints much darker than my monitor. I suspect a problem with the monitor calibration or with the transform I'm using to describe the monitor. How do I tell what transform to use for the monitor? Specifically, how do I tell if it's a generic gamma 1.8 or a generic gamma 2.2, and how do I tell whether it uses P22 or EBU phosphors?

Try this: If you can't find a specific transform for your make and model monitor, first try the generic gamma 1.8 transform. If that doesn't suit your needs, you can, of course, experiment with other transforms, but it might be more productive simply to call Kodak at 1-800-75COLOR to see if a transform exists for your specific monitor.

To determine which phosphor your monitor uses (if that information isn't in your owner's manual), you could try calling your monitor manufacturer's tech support to find out the information about the phosphors. In general, monitors made in Europe or for the European market use the EBU phosphors, while most others use P22.

You may need to calibrate your monitor using a colorimeter (or call a service technician to do it for you). Your printer's output is generally very accurate, so the print is a better reflection of your image than what you're seeing on the monitor.

Try using the monitor calibration tools within Picture Publisher. You may need to adjust the R, G, and B controls separately. The monitor Precision Transforms won't correct for improper screen color temperature, though.

If lightness/darkness are the problem, try adjusting the monitor's gamma settings.

When I open a Photo CD in Picture Publisher, CMS asks for source and destination. Is the destination my monitor? Or is it the actual final destination? Choosing one or the other changes how the image on my screen by a fair amount.

When you open an image from the Photo CD, you use the PCD transform as the source and the monitor transform as the destination. Picture Publisher links the two PTs dynamically. Because Picture Publisher lets you view other color spaces as well, you need to specify the monitor as the destination.

In Printer Setup, you specify the printer transform as the destination. When you print, Picture Publisher again links the transforms, but it doesn't pop up a dialog box asking you to select the source and destination.

Eventually, I want to send the image on my monitor to CMYK separations or to a film recorder. How do I tell CMS to do that?

You can open a file from your hard drive, using the monitor as source and your CMYK PT as the destination. Then save the file under a different name (using "Save As..." and saving it as a .TIF or .EPS file), so you still have your RGB file if you want to go back and do more with it. Your image may not look great, in this case, because you're viewing it in the output color space. When saving, use the option to save with CMS information and save it as a PPF file, so it's tagged with the CMYK SWOP information. That way, you can always use the information button to see what color space it was saved in.

Or, you can open the image under CMS, then select a CMYK precision transform for the destination.

The thing to remember about source and destination is that "source" is always "where I am." That is, "source" is the color space where the image currently exists. This could be the monitor, scanner, Photo CD, or even the printer space if you saved it there. "Destination" is always where you're going--the color space you want the image converted to.

Generally, to open an image from your hard drive with CMS, you select monitor as both source and destination.

Can you suggest a "shortcut" way to hand-calibrate my monitor?

Here's an approximation of a calibration technique that you might find useful.

With CMS enabled, set your monitor in Setup to use the PT for the monitor, and set the Printer to use the 720 dpi precision transform for it. Then open a known, nicely-balanced, color image from a Photo CD. Print the image and look at it in your light box, which should be near your monitor.

Adjust your monitor's gamma. Then adjust the color controls for the best match with the printed image. Most monitors are too blue, so try backing off on the blue and increasing the red and green. It may take you some time to be satisfied with the settings.

Display a totally black image. Set the brightness control in a pitch dark room. Set the brightness control about halfway up, and turn the brightness all the way down. Hold something like a floppy disk up against the screen. Increase the brightness control until the glow from the screen outlines the disk. Work the brightness control until it is just where the outline is noticeable. Note the position of the control.

Set the contrast control so the image on the screen looks like the printout as nearly as possible.

Repeat these steps using different images. After a while, you'll refine the monitor setup to your satisfaction.